NewzIntel.com

    • Checkout Page
    • Contact Us
    • Default Redirect Page
    • Frontpage
    • Home-2
    • Home-3
    • Lost Password
    • Member Login
    • Member LogOut
    • Member TOS Page
    • My Account
    • NewzIntel Alert Control-Panel
    • NewzIntel Latest Reports
    • Post Views Counter
    • Privacy Policy
    • Public Individual Page
    • Register
    • Subscription Plan
    • Thank You Page

Category: Statistics

  • MIL-Evening Report: Waiting too long for public dental care? Here’s why the system is struggling – and how to fix it

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Santosh Tadakamadla, Professor and Head of Dentistry and Oral Health, La Trobe University

    Just over one-third of Australians are eligible for public dental services, which provide free or low cost dental treatment.

    Yet demand for these services continues to exceed supply. As a result, many Australian adults face long waits for access, which can be up to three years in some states.

    So what’s going wrong with public dental care in Australia? And how can it be fixed?

    Who funds public dental care?

    Both the federal government and state and territory governments fund public dental services. These are primarily targeted at low-income Australians, including children, and hard-to-reach populations, known as priority groups.

    Individuals and families bear a majority of the costs for dental services. They paid around 81% (A$10.1 billion) of the cost for dental services in 2022–23, either directly through out-of-pocket expenses, or through private health insurance premiums.

    The Commonwealth contributed 11% to the cost of dental care, while the states and territories paid the remaining 8% in 2022–23.

    Who is eligible for public dental care?

    Just under half of Australian children are eligible for the means-tested Child Dental Benefits Schedule. This gives them access to $1,132 of dental benefits over two years.

    While children from low-income families tend to benefit from this scheme, critics have raised concerns about the low uptake. Only one-third use the dental program in any given year.

    Some children access free or low-cost dental care from state and territory based services, such as the Victorian Smile Squad school dental program or the NSW Health Primary School Mobile Dental Program.

    Others use their private health insurance to pay for some of the costs of private dental care.

    What if you’re low-income but aren’t eligible?

    Some Australians aren’t eligible for public dental services but can’t afford private dental care. In 2022–23, around one in six people (18%) delayed or didn’t see a dental professional when they needed to because of the cost.

    Some Australians are accessing their superannuation funds under compassionate grounds for dental treatment. The amount people have accessed has grown eight-fold from 2018–19 to 2023–24, from $66.4 million to $526.4 million.

    However, concerns have been raised about the exploitation of this provision. Some people have accessed their super for dental treatment costing more than $20,000. This more than what would typically be required for urgent dental care, impacting their future financial security.

    Why are the waits so long in the public dental care system?

    The long waits are due to a combination of factors, alongside high levels need:

    • systemic under-funding by Australian governments. This is exacerbated by federal government funding for public dental services remaining fixed rather than being indexed annually

    • workforce shortages in rural and remote areas, with dental practitioners concentrated in wealthy, metro areas

    • poor incentives for the oral health workforce in public dental services

    • too few public clinics, in part because the initial outlay and ongoing equipment costs are so great.

    What is the government planning in the long term?

    The federal government is taking action to improve the affordability of dental services through long-term funding reforms only targeting priority populations to bring some dental services into Medicare.

    An initial focus is for older Australians and First Nations people.

    Cost estimates for a universal dental scheme vary significantly, depending on the population coverage and the number of dental benefits individuals are eligible for, and whether services are capped (as in the case of the Child Dental Benefits Schedule) or uncapped.

    The Grattan Institute estimates a capped scheme would cost $5.6 billion annually.

    The Australian Parliamentary Budget Office estimates it would cost $45 billion over three years.

    When increasing government funding for public dental service, it’s important policymakers ensure the services included are evidence-based and represent value for money.

    What needs to be done in the meantime

    Meaningful long-term funding reform towards a universal dental scheme requires some foundational policy work.

    First, there should be an agreed understanding of what dental services should be government subsidised and provide annual limits for reimbursement to prevent overtreatment. This would avoid some people getting a lot of dental treatment they don’t need, while others could miss out.

    Many dental services are routinely offered without any clinical benefit. This includes six-monthly oral health check-ups and cleans for low-risk patients.

    Second, resource allocation is best done when we focus on prevention and governments fund cost-effective dental services. Priority-setting is best done using economic evaluation tools.

    Third, the federal government should extend its existing decision-making frameworks to include dental services. This would bring dental care in line with medicine and service listings on the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS) and the Medicare Benefits Schedule (MBS), ensuring that safety, effectiveness and cost-effectiveness inform public funding decisions.

    Fourth, the government needs to reform the workforce. This should include funding to support recruitment and training of students from regional, rural and remote areas. These students are more likely to return to their communities to work, balancing the unequal distribution of the workforce.

    We also urgently need to attract and retain more people to work in public dental services.

    Finally, we need a coordinated national approach to oral health policy and funding. The federal government has an opportunity to do this now as consultations continue through 2025 to develop and implement the National Oral Health Plan 2025–2034.

    Santosh Tadakamadla received National Health and Medical Research Council Early Career Fellowship (APP1161659) from 2019-2023. He is Head of Dentistry and Oral Health at La Trobe Rural Health School in Bendigo.

    Tan Nguyen receives funding from National Health and Medical Research Council (Postgraduate Scholarship Scheme APP1189802). He is affiliated with Deakin University, Monash University, Oral Health Victoria, Public Association of Australia, National Oral Health Alliance and Dental Board of Australia.

    – ref. Waiting too long for public dental care? Here’s why the system is struggling – and how to fix it – https://theconversation.com/waiting-too-long-for-public-dental-care-heres-why-the-system-is-struggling-and-how-to-fix-it-261661

    MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Russia: Passenger car production in Russia fell by 2 percent in January-June

    Translation. Region: Russian Federal

    Source: People’s Republic of China in Russian – People’s Republic of China in Russian –

    An important disclaimer is at the bottom of this article.

    Source: People’s Republic of China – State Council News

    Moscow, July 24 (Xinhua) — Russia produced 326,000 passenger cars in the first half of 2025, down 2.1 percent from the same period a year earlier, the Federal State Statistics Service of the Russian Federation published on Thursday.

    In June, 45 thousand passenger cars were produced in Russia. This is 28.2 percent less than in June 2024.

    In the first half of 2025, the country saw a 23.9 percent reduction in truck production. During this period, 68.8 thousand units were produced in Russia. –0–

    Please note: This information is raw content obtained directly from the source of the information. It is an accurate report of what the source claims and does not necessarily reflect the position of MIL-OSI or its clients.

    .

    MIL OSI Russia News –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-Evening Report: Columbia’s $200M deal with Trump administration sets a precedent for other universities to bend to the government’s will

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Brendan Cantwell, Associate Professor of Higher, Adult, and Lifelong Education, Michigan State University

    Students at Columbia University in New York City on April 14, 2025. Charly Triballeau/AFP via Getty Images

    Columbia University agreed on July 23, 2025, to pay a US$200 million fine to the federal government and to settle allegations that it did not create a safe environment for Jewish students during Palestinian rights protests in 2024.

    The deal will restore the vast majority of the $400 million in federal grants and contracts that Columbia was previously awarded, before the administration withdrew the funding in March 2025.

    It marks the first financial and political agreement a university has reached with the Trump administration in its push for more control over higher education – and stands to have significant ripple effects for how other universities and colleges carry out their basic operations.

    Amy Lieberman, the education editor at The Conversation U.S., spoke with Brendan Cantwell, a scholar of higher education at Michigan State University, to understand what’s exactly in this agreement – and the lasting precedent it may set on government intervention in higher education.

    Palestinian rights demonstrators march through Columbia University on Oct. 7, 2024, marking one year of the war between Hamas and Israel.
    Kena Betancur/AFP via Getty Images

    What’s in the deal Columbia made with the Trump administration?

    The agreement requires Columbia to make a $200 million payment to the federal government. Columbia will also pay $21 million to settle investigations brought by the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.

    Columbia will need to keep detailed statistics about student applicants – including their race and ethnicity, grades and SAT scores – as well as information about faculty and staff hiring decisions. Columbia will then have to share this data with the federal government.

    In exchange, the federal government will release most of the $400 million in frozen grant money previously awarded to Columbia and allow faculty at the university to compete for future federal grants.

    How does this deal address antisemitism?

    The Trump administration has cited antisemitism against students and faculty on campuses to justify its broad incursion into the business of universities around the country.

    Antisemitism is a real and legitimate concern in U.S. society and higher education, including at Columbia.

    But the federal complaint the administration made against Columbia was not actually about antisemitism. The administration made a formal accusation of antisemitism at Columbia in May of this year but suspended grants to the university in March. The federal government had initially acknowledged that cutting federal research grants did nothing to address the climate for Jewish students on campus, for example.

    When the federal government investigates civil rights violations, it usually conducts site visits and does very thorough investigations. We never saw such a government report about antisemitism at Columbia or other universities.

    The settlement that Columbia has entered into with the administration also doesn’t do much about antisemitism.

    The agreement includes Columbia redefining antisemitism with a broader definition that is also used by the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance. The definition now includes “a certain perception of Jews, which may be expressed as hatred toward Jews” – a description that is also used by the U.S. State Department and several European governments but some critics say conflates antisemitism with anti-Zionism.

    Instead, the agreement primarily has to do with faculty hiring and admissions decisions. The federal government alleges that Columbia is discriminating against white and Asian applicants, and that this will allow the government to ensure that everybody who is admitted is considered only on the basis of merit.

    The administration could argue that changing hiring practices to get faculty who are less hostile to Jewish students could change the campus climate, but the agreement doesn’t really identify ways in which the university contributed to or ignored antisemitic conduct.

    Is this a new issue?

    There has been a long-running issue that conservatives and members of the Trump administration – dating back to his first term – have with higher education. The Trump administration and other conservatives have said for years that higher education is too liberal.

    The protests were the flash point that put Columbia in the administration’s crosshairs, as well as claims that Columbia was creating a hostile environment for Jewish students.

    The administration’s complaints aren’t limited to Columbia. Harvard is in a protracted conflict with the administration, and the administration has launched investigations into dozens of other schools around the country. These universities are butting heads with the administration over the same grievance that higher education is too liberal. There are also specific claims about antisemitism on university campuses and the privileges given to nonwhite students in admissions or campus life.

    While the administration has a common set of complaints about a range of universities, there is a mix of schools that the administration is taking issue with. Some of them, such as Harvard, are very high profile. The Department of Justice forced out the president at the University of Virginia in January 2025 on the grounds that he had not done enough to root out diversity, equity and inclusion programs at the public university. The University of Virginia may have been a target for the administration because a Republican governor appointed most members of its governance board and agreed with Trump’s complaints.

    How could this change the makeup of Columbia’s student population?

    The Supreme Court ruled in 2023 that Harvard’s affirmative action program, which considered race in admissions, violated the Equal Protection Clause of the 14th Amendment. This effectively ended race-based affirmative action for all U.S. colleges and universities.

    Now, with the Columbia deal, the government could say that it would expect to see a proportion of students who are white increase and students who are Black and Latino to decrease at Columbia. That’s a legal approach that America First Legal, a conservative legal advocacy group founded by Stephen Miller, a Trump administration official, has already tried.

    Back in February 2025, America First Legal alleged in a federal lawsuit that the University of California, Los Angeles, was using illegal admissions criteria, because of the number of Black and Latino students that were admitted by the school. That lawsuit is ongoing.

    Claire Shipman, Columbia University’s acting president, speaks during the school’s May 2025 commencement ceremony.
    Jeenah Moon/Pool/AFP via Getty Images

    What does this agreement mean for US higher education as a whole?

    It is an enormous, unprecedented shift in how the federal government works with higher education. Since the McCarthy era in the 1940s and ’50s, when professors were blacklisted and fired because of their alleged communism, Americans have not seen the federal government interrogate education.

    The federal government does have a role in securing people’s civil rights, including in the context of higher education, but this is very, very different from how the federal government has done civil rights investigations and entered into agreements with universities in the past.

    This agreement is very broad and gives the federal government oversight of things that have long been under universities’ control, such as whom they hire to teach and which students they admit.

    The federal government is now saying it has the right to look over universities’ shoulders and guide them in this work that has long been considered independent. And the government is willing to be extremely coercive to get universities to comply.

    What signal does this agreement send to other universities?

    This agreement sets a precedent for the government to direct colleges and universities to comply with its political agenda. This violates the long tradition of academic independence that had helped to make the U.S. higher education system the envy of the world.

    Columbia can afford paying $200 million to the federal government. Most universities can’t afford to pay $200 million.

    And most campuses cannot survive without federal resources, whether that comes in the form of student financial aid or research grants. This agreement sets a standard for other universities that, if they don’t immediately do what the federal government wants them to do, the government could impose penalties that are so high it could end their ability to operate.

    Brendan Cantwell is a Professor in the Department of Educational Administration at Michigan State University.

    – ref. Columbia’s $200M deal with Trump administration sets a precedent for other universities to bend to the government’s will – https://theconversation.com/columbias-200m-deal-with-trump-administration-sets-a-precedent-for-other-universities-to-bend-to-the-governments-will-261902

    MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. Reports Financial Results for the Second Quarter of 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    IOWA CITY, Iowa, July 24, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. (Nasdaq: MOFG) (“we,” “our,” or the “Company”) today reported results for the second quarter of 2025.

    Second Quarter 2025 Summary1

    • Pre-tax, pre-provision net revenue increased 15% to $24.5 million2.
      • Net interest margin (tax equivalent) was 3.57%2; core net interest margin expanded 13 basis points (“bps”) to 3.49%.2
      • Noninterest income was $10.2 million.
      • Noninterest expense was $35.8 million.
      • Efficiency ratio improved to 56.20%2 from 59.38%2.
    • Net income of $10.0 million, or $0.48 per diluted common share, reflected credit loss expense of $11.9 million stemming primarily from a single commercial real estate (“CRE”) office credit.
    • Criticized loans ratio improved 32 bps to 5.15%.
    • Allowance for credit losses ratio increased to 1.50%, due primarily to the single CRE office credit.
    • Annualized loan growth of 7.4%.
    • Tangible book value per share of $23.92,2 an increase of 2.4%.
    • Common equity tier 1 (“CET1”) capital ratio improved 5 bps to 11.02%.
    • Provided notice of redemption for all $65.0 million aggregate principal of the Company’s 5.75% fixed-to-floating rate subordinated notes due 2030 set to reprice on July 30th.

    CEO Commentary

    Charles (Chip) Reeves, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, commented, “Due to the expertise of our MidWestOne team, we continued to execute well on our 2025 strategic initiatives. Strong loan growth and back book loan re-pricing led to tax equivalent net interest margin expansion of 13 basis points, to 3.57%2, and to 5% linked quarter net interest income growth. Investments in our relationship fee income businesses continue to bear fruit with wealth management, Small Business Administration (“SBA”), and residential mortgage revenues up quarter over quarter.

    We maintained our expense discipline even as we added significant customer facing talent in Denver and the Twin Cities, as well as invested in our platforms to drive internal efficiencies and improve the customer experience.

    Earnings and certain asset quality measures were unfavorably impacted by a single $24 million suburban Twin Cities CRE office credit. The loan was originated in June 2022 and previously classified, but moved to nonaccrual in the second quarter. A receiver is in place, resolution efforts have begun, and a specific reserve was established, which led to an increase in our allowance for credit losses ratio to 1.50%.

    Our balance sheet, capital, and underlying earnings strength position us well for the second half of 2025 as we continue to make significant progress in building a high-performing, relationship-driven community bank.”

    __________________
    1Second Quarter Summary compares to the first quarter of 2025 (the “linked quarter”) unless noted.
    2Non-GAAP measure. See the separate Non-GAAP Measures section for a reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP measure.

    (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts and as noted)   As of or for the quarter ended   Six Months Ended
      June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
        2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Financial Results                    
    Revenue   $ 60,231     $ 57,575     $ 57,901     $ 117,806     $ 102,382  
    Credit loss expense     11,889       1,687       1,267       13,576       5,956  
    Noninterest expense     35,767       36,293       35,761       72,060       71,326  
    Net income     9,980       15,138       15,819       25,118       19,088  
    Pre-tax pre-provision net revenue(3)     24,464       21,282       22,140       45,746       31,056  
    Adjusted earnings(3)     10,176       15,301       8,132       25,479       12,621  
    Per Common Share                    
    Diluted earnings per share   $ 0.48     $ 0.73     $ 1.00     $ 1.20     $ 1.21  
    Adjusted earnings per share(3)     0.49       0.73       0.52       1.22       0.80  
    Book value     28.36       27.85       34.44       28.36       34.44  
    Tangible book value(3)     23.92       23.36       28.27       23.92       28.27  
    Balance Sheet & Credit Quality                    
    Loans In millions   $ 4,381.2     $ 4,304.2     $ 4,287.2     $ 4,381.2     $ 4,287.2  
    Investment securities In millions     1,235.0       1,305.5       1,824.1       1,235.0       1,824.1  
    Deposits In millions     5,388.1       5,489.1       5,412.4       5,388.1       5,412.4  
    Net loan charge-offs In millions     0.2       3.1       0.5       3.3       0.7  
    Allowance for credit losses ratio     1.50 %     1.25 %     1.26 %     1.50 %     1.26 %
    Selected Ratios                    
    Return on average assets     0.65 %     1.00 %     0.95 %     0.82 %     0.58 %
    Net interest margin, tax equivalent(3)     3.57 %     3.44 %     2.41 %     3.51 %     2.37 %
    Return on average equity     6.81 %     10.74 %     11.91 %     8.74 %     7.23 %
    Return on average tangible equity(3)     8.84 %     13.75 %     15.74 %     11.24 %     9.98 %
    Efficiency ratio(3)     56.20 %     59.38 %     56.29 %     57.75 %     62.83 %


    REVENUE REVIEW

    Revenue               Change   Change
                  2Q25 vs   2Q25 vs
    (Dollars in thousands)   2Q25   1Q25   2Q24   1Q25   2Q24
    Net interest income   $ 49,982   $ 47,439   $ 36,347   5 %   38 %
    Noninterest income     10,249     10,136     21,554   1 %   (52)%
    Total revenue, net of interest expense   $ 60,231   $ 57,575   $ 57,901   5 %   4 %

    Total revenue for the second quarter of 2025 increased $2.7 million from the first quarter of 2025 due to higher net interest income and noninterest income during the quarter. When compared to the second quarter of 2024, total revenue increased $2.3 million due to higher net interest income partially offset by lower noninterest income.

    Net interest income of $50.0 million for the second quarter of 2025 increased $2.5 million from the first quarter of 2025 due to higher earning asset volumes and yields and lower funding costs, partially offset by higher funding volumes. When compared to the second quarter of 2024, net interest income increased $13.6 million due to higher earning asset yields and lower funding volumes and costs, partially offset by lower earning asset volumes.

    The Company’s tax equivalent net interest margin was 3.57%3 in the second quarter of 2025, compared to 3.44%3 in the first quarter of 2025, driven by higher earning asset yields and lower interest bearing liability costs. Total earning asset yield increased 12 bps from the first quarter of 2025, primarily due to an increase of 10 bps in loan yield. Interest bearing liability costs during the second quarter of 2025 decreased 2 bps to 2.39%, primarily due to reductions in long-term debt costs and interest bearing deposits of 13 bps and 2 bps, to 6.28% and 2.29%, respectively, from the first quarter of 2025.

    The Company’s tax equivalent net interest margin was 3.57%3 in the second quarter of 2025, compared to 2.41%3 in the second quarter of 2024, driven by higher earning asset yields and lower interest bearing liability costs. Total earning assets yield increased 75 bps from the second quarter of 2024, primarily due to increases of 189 bps and 12 bps in total investment securities and loan yields, respectively. Interest bearing liability costs decreased 46 bps to 2.39%, due to long-term debt costs of 6.28% and interest bearing deposit costs of 2.29%, which decreased 67 bps, and 25 bps, respectively, from the second quarter of 2024.

    __________________
    3Non-GAAP measure. See the separate Non-GAAP Measures section for a reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP measure.

    Noninterest Income             Change   Change
                2Q25 vs   2Q25 vs
    (Dollars in thousands) 2Q25   1Q25   2Q24   1Q25   2Q24
    Investment services and trust activities $ 3,705     $ 3,544     $ 3,504   5 %   6 %
    Service charges and fees   2,190       2,131       2,156   3 %   2 %
    Card revenue   1,934       1,744       1,907   11 %   1 %
    Loan revenue   1,417       1,194       1,525   19 %   (7)%
    Bank-owned life insurance   677       1,057       668   (36)%   1 %
    Investment securities gains, net   —       33       33   (100)%   (100)%
    Other   326       433       11,761   (25)%   (97)%
    Total noninterest income $ 10,249     $ 10,136     $ 21,554   1 %   (52)%
                       
    MSR adjustment (included above in Loan revenue) $ (264 )   $ (213 )   $ 129   24 %   (305)%

    Noninterest income for the second quarter of 2025 increased $0.1 million from the linked quarter, primarily due to increases of $0.2 million each in loan revenue, card revenue, and investment services and trust activities revenue. The increase in loan revenue was due primarily to a $0.2 million increase in mortgage origination fee revenue, coupled with an increase of $0.2 million in SBA gain on sale revenue. The increase in card revenue was driven primarily by higher interchange fee income. The increase in investment services and trust activities revenue was driven by higher assets under administration. Partially offsetting these increases was a decline of $0.4 million in bank-owned life insurance revenue stemming from the death benefit recognized in the first quarter of 2025.

    Noninterest income for the second quarter of 2025 decreased $11.3 million from the second quarter of 2024 primarily due to the decline in other revenue stemming from the $11.1 million gain realized in connection with the sale of our Florida banking operations in the second quarter of 2024. Also contributing to the decline in noninterest income was a $0.4 million unfavorable change in the fair value of our mortgage servicing rights, which is included in loan revenue, and a decline of $0.4 million in swap origination fee income, which is recorded in other revenue. Partially offsetting these declines was an increase of $0.2 million in investment services and trust activities revenue, driven by higher assets under administration.

    EXPENSE REVIEW

    Noninterest Expense             Change   Change
                2Q25 vs   2Q25 vs
    (Dollars in thousands) 2Q25   1Q25   2Q24   1Q25   2Q24
    Compensation and employee benefits $ 21,011   $ 21,212   $ 20,985   (1)%   — %
    Occupancy expense of premises, net   2,540     2,588     2,435   (2)%   4 %
    Equipment   2,550     2,426     2,530   5 %   1 %
    Legal and professional   2,153     2,226     2,253   (3)%   (4)%
    Data processing   1,486     1,698     1,645   (12)%   (10)%
    Marketing   762     552     636   38 %   20 %
    Amortization of intangibles   1,252     1,408     1,593   (11)%   (21)%
    FDIC insurance   851     917     1,051   (7)%   (19)%
    Communications   161     159     191   1 %   (16)%
    Foreclosed assets, net   83     74     138   12 %   (40)%
    Other   2,918     3,033     2,304   (4)%   27 %
    Total noninterest expense $ 35,767   $ 36,293   $ 35,761   (1)%   — %
    Merger-related Expenses          
             
    (Dollars in thousands) 2Q25   1Q25   2Q24
    Compensation and employee benefits $ —   $ —   $ 73
    Equipment   —     —     28
    Legal and professional   —     40     462
    Data processing   —     —     251
    Communications   —     —     8
    Other   —     —     32
    Total merger-related expenses $ —   $ 40   $ 854

    Noninterest expense for the second quarter of 2025 decreased $0.5 million from the linked quarter, primarily due to decreases of $0.2 million each in data processing, compensation and employee benefits, and amortization of intangibles. The decrease in data processing was primarily driven by a decrease in core banking system costs. The decrease in compensation and employee benefits reflected the receipt of $1.1 million from Employee Retention Credit claims, which was partially offset by higher wage, equity compensation and employee benefits expense.

    Noninterest expense for the second quarter of 2025 compared to the prior year was stable at $35.8 million. The $0.6 million increase in other noninterest expense stemmed primarily from customer deposits costs. Further, excluding merger-related expenses, legal and professional costs increased $0.4 million due primarily to higher litigation-related legal expenses. Those increases were partially offset by lower intangible amortization and FDIC insurance costs, which decreased $0.3 million and $0.2 million, respectively.

    The Company’s effective tax rate was 20.6% in the second quarter of 2025, compared to 22.7% in the linked quarter. The effective income tax rate for the full year 2025 is expected to be 22-23%.

    BALANCE SHEET REVIEW

    Total assets were $6.16 billion at June 30, 2025, compared to $6.25 billion at March 31, 2025 and $6.58 billion at June 30, 2024. The decrease from March 31, 2025 was primarily due to lower cash and security volumes, partially offset by higher loan volumes. Compared to June 30, 2024, the decrease was primarily driven by lower security volumes, partially offset by higher loan volumes.

    Loans Held for Investment

    (Dollars in thousands)

    June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total  
    Commercial and industrial $ 1,226,265   28.0 % $ 1,140,138   26.5 % $ 1,120,983   26.1 %
    Agricultural   128,717   2.9     131,409   3.1     107,983   2.5  
    Commercial real estate                        
    Construction and development   280,918   6.4     293,280   6.8     351,646   8.2  
    Farmland   186,494   4.3     180,633   4.2     183,641   4.3  
    Multifamily   438,193   10.0     421,204   9.8     430,054   10.0  
    Other   1,407,469   32.1     1,425,062   33.0     1,348,515   31.5  
    Total commercial real estate   2,313,074   52.8     2,320,179   53.8     2,313,856   54.0  
    Residential real estate                        
    One-to-four family first liens   467,970   10.7     471,688   11.0     492,541   11.5  
    One-to-four family junior liens   188,671   4.3     182,346   4.2     176,105   4.1  
    Total residential real estate   656,641   15.0     654,034   15.2     668,646   15.6  
    Consumer   56,491   1.3     58,424   1.4     75,764   1.8  
    Loans held for investment, net of unearned income $ 4,381,188   100.0 % $ 4,304,184   100.0 % $ 4,287,232   100.0 %
                             
    Total commitments to extend credit $ 1,074,935       $ 1,080,300       $ 1,200,605      

    Loans held for investment, net of unearned income at June 30, 2025 were $4.38 billion, increasing $77.0 million, or 1.8%, from $4.30 billion at March 31, 2025 and increasing $94.0 million, or 2.2%, from $4.29 billion at June 30, 2024. The increases across both periods were primarily driven by organic loan growth and higher line of credit usage.

    Investment Securities(Dollars in thousands) June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total  
    Available for sale $ 1,235,045   100.0 % $ 1,305,530   100.0 % $ 771,034   42.3 %
    Held to maturity   —   — %   —   — %   1,053,080   57.7 %
    Total investment securities $ 1,235,045       $ 1,305,530       $ 1,824,114      

    Investment securities at June 30, 2025 were $1.24 billion, decreasing $70.5 million from March 31, 2025 and decreasing $589.1 million from June 30, 2024. The decrease from the first quarter of 2025 was primarily due to principal cash flows received from scheduled payments, calls, and maturities. The decrease from the second quarter of 2024 stemmed primarily from the sale of debt securities in connection with a balance sheet repositioning, as well as principal cash flows received from scheduled payments, calls, and maturities.

    Deposits June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    (Dollars in thousands) Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total  
    Noninterest bearing deposits $ 910,693   16.9 % $ 903,714   16.5 % $ 882,472   16.3 %
    Interest checking deposits   1,206,096   22.5     1,283,328   23.3     1,284,243   23.7  
    Money market deposits   971,048   18.0     1,002,066   18.3     1,043,376   19.3  
    Savings deposits   851,636   15.8     877,348   16.0     745,639   13.8  
    Time deposits of $250 and under   837,302   15.5     818,012   14.9     803,301   14.8  
    Total core deposits   4,776,775   88.7     4,884,468   89.0     4,759,031   87.9  
    Brokered time deposits   200,000   3.7     200,000   3.6     196,000   3.6  
    Time deposits over $250   411,323   7.6     404,674   7.4     457,388   8.5  
    Total deposits $ 5,388,098   100.0 % $ 5,489,142   100.0 % $ 5,412,419   100.0 %

    Total deposits at June 30, 2025 were $5.39 billion, decreasing $101.0 million, or 1.8%, from $5.49 billion at March 31, 2025, and decreasing $24.3 million, or 0.4%, from $5.41 billion at June 30, 2024. Noninterest bearing deposits at June 30, 2025 were $910.7 million, an increase of $7.0 million from March 31, 2025 and an increase of $28.2 million from June 30, 2024.

    Borrowed Funds June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    (Dollars in thousands) Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total   Balance   % of Total  
    Short-term borrowings $ —   — % $ 1,482   1.3 % $ 414,684   78.3 %
    Long-term debt   112,320   100.0 %   111,398   98.7 %   114,839   21.7 %
    Total borrowed funds $ 112,320       $ 112,880       $ 529,523      

    Borrowed funds were $112.3 million at June 30, 2025, a decrease of $0.6 million from March 31, 2025 and a decrease of $417.2 million from June 30, 2024. The decrease compared to the linked quarter was due primarily to lower securities sold under agreements to repurchase. The decrease compared to June 30, 2024 was primarily due to the pay-off of $405.0 million of BTFP borrowings and scheduled payments on long-term debt.

    In June 2025, the Company provided notice to the trustee of its intent to redeem all $65.0 million aggregate principal of its 5.75% fixed-to-floating rate subordinated notes due 2030. To complete the redemption, the Company expects to utilize a combination of cash on hand and proceeds from a $50.0 million senior term note. The senior term note is expected to be structured as a 5-year maturity, 7-year amortization facility, and bear interest at a floating rate of 1-month term SOFR plus 1.75%. The financing pursuant to the senior note is expected to close on July 29, 2025, and the redemption is expected to occur on July 30, 2025.

    Capital June 30,   March 31,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands) 2025 (1)     2025       2024  
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 589,040     $ 579,625     $ 543,286  
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (57,557 )     (63,098 )     (58,135 )
    MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. Consolidated          
    Tier 1 leverage to average assets ratio   9.62 %     9.50 %     8.29 %
    Common equity tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   11.02 %     10.97 %     9.56 %
    Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   11.88 %     11.84 %     10.35 %
    Total capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   14.44 %     14.34 %     12.62 %
    MidWestOne Bank          
    Tier 1 leverage to average assets ratio   10.43 %     10.42 %     9.24 %
    Common equity tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   12.95 %     13.02 %     11.55 %
    Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   12.95 %     13.02 %     11.55 %
    Total capital to risk-weighted assets ratio   14.20 %     14.21 %     12.61 %
    (1) Regulatory capital ratios for June 30, 2025 are preliminary          

    Total shareholders’ equity at June 30, 2025 increased $9.4 million from March 31, 2025, driven primarily by a decrease in accumulated other comprehensive loss and an increase in retained earnings, partially offset by an increase in treasury stock. Total shareholders’ equity at June 30, 2025 increased $45.8 million from June 30, 2024, primarily due to increases in common stock and additional paid-in-capital stemming from the common equity capital raise in the third quarter of 2024, and partially offset by a decrease in retained earnings.

    On July 22, 2025, the Board of Directors of the Company declared a cash dividend of $0.2425 per common share. The dividend is payable September 16, 2025, to shareholders of record at the close of business on September 2, 2025.

    The current share repurchase program allows for the repurchase of up to $15.0 million of the Company’s common shares. Under such program, the Company repurchased 63,402 shares of its common stock at an average price of $27.65 per share and a total cost of $1.8 million during the period March 31, 2025 through June 30, 2025. No shares were repurchased during the subsequent period through July 24, 2025. As of June 30, 2025, $13.2 million remained available under this program.

    CREDIT QUALITY REVIEW

    Credit Quality As of or For the Three Months Ended
    June 30,   March 31,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)   2025       2025       2024  
    Credit loss expense related to loans $ 12,089     $ 1,787     $ 467  
    Net charge-offs   189       3,087       524  
    Allowance for credit losses   65,800       53,900       53,900  
    Pass $ 4,155,385     $ 4,068,707     $ 3,991,692  
    Special Mention   98,998       121,494       146,253  
    Classified   126,805       113,983       149,287  
    Criticized   225,803       235,477       295,540  
    Loans greater than 30 days past due and accruing $ 12,161     $ 6,119     $ 9,358  
    Nonperforming loans $ 37,192     $ 17,470     $ 25,128  
    Nonperforming assets   40,606       20,889       31,181  
    Net charge-off ratio(1)   0.02 %     0.29 %     0.05 %
    Classified loans ratio(2)   2.89 %     2.65 %     3.48 %
    Criticized loans ratio(3)   5.15 %     5.47 %     6.89 %
    Nonperforming loans ratio(4)   0.85 %     0.41 %     0.59 %
    Nonperforming assets ratio(5)   0.66 %     0.33 %     0.47 %
    Allowance for credit losses ratio(6)   1.50 %     1.25 %     1.26 %
    Allowance for credit losses to nonaccrual loans ratio(7)   179.19 %     309.47 %     218.26 %
    (1) Net charge-off ratio is calculated as annualized net charge-offs divided by the sum of average loans held for investment, net of unearned income and average loans held for sale, during the period.
    (2) Classified loans ratio is calculated as classified loans divided by loans held for investment, net of unearned income, at the end of the period.
    (3) Criticized loans ratio is calculated as criticized loans divided by loans held for investment, net of unearned income, at the end of the period.
    (4) Nonperforming loans ratio is calculated as nonperforming loans divided by loans held for investment, net of unearned income, at the end of the period.
    (5) Nonperforming assets ratio is calculated as nonperforming assets divided by total assets at the end of the period.
    (6) Allowance for credit losses ratio is calculated as allowance for credit losses divided by loans held for investment, net of unearned income, at the end of the period.
    (7) Allowance for credit losses to nonaccrual loans ratio is calculated as allowance for credit losses divided by nonaccrual loans at the end of the period.

    Compared to the linked quarter, both nonperforming loans and nonperforming assets increased $19.7 million, primarily due to a single $24.0 million CRE office credit, partially offset by the sale of a $3.9 million CRE office credit. Special mention loan balances decreased $22.5 million, or 19%, while classified loan balances increased $12.8 million, or 11%. Compared to the prior year period, nonperforming loans and nonperforming assets increased $12.1 million and $9.4 million, respectively. Special mention loan balances decreased $47.3 million, or 32%, while classified loan balances decreased $22.5 million, or 15%. The net charge-off ratio declined 27 bps from the linked quarter and 3 bps from the same period in the prior year.

    As of June 30, 2025, the allowance for credit losses was $65.8 million and the allowance for credit losses ratio was 1.50%, compared with $53.9 million and 1.25%, respectively, at March 31, 2025. Credit loss expense of $11.9 million in the second quarter of 2025 primarily reflected the specific reserve established in connection with the single CRE office credit previously discussed.

    Nonperforming Loans Roll Forward
    (Dollars in thousands)
    Nonaccrual   90+ Days Past Due & Still Accruing   Total
    Balance at March 31, 2025 $ 17,417     $ 53     $ 17,470  
    Loans placed on nonaccrual or 90+ days past due & still accruing   25,279       569       25,848  
    Proceeds related to repayment or sale   (4,973 )     —       (4,973 )
    Loans returned to accrual status or no longer past due   (632 )     —       (632 )
    Charge-offs   (187 )     (151 )     (338 )
    Transfers to foreclosed assets   (183 )     —       (183 )
    Balance at June 30, 2025 $ 36,721     $ 471     $ 37,192  


    CONFERENCE CALL DETAILS

    The Company will host a conference call for investors at 11:00 a.m. CT on Friday, July 25, 2025. To participate, you may pre-register for this call utilizing the following link: https://www.netroadshow.com/events/login?show=a6070726&confId=80381. After pre-registering for this event you will receive your access details via email. On the day of the call, you are also able to dial 1-833-470-1428 using an access code of 293794 at least fifteen minutes before the call start time. If you are unable to participate on the call, a replay will be available until October 23, 2025 by calling 1-866-813-9403 and using the replay access code of 763204. A transcript of the call will also be available on the Company’s web site (www.midwestonefinancial.com) within three business days of the call.

    ABOUT MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

    MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. is a financial holding company headquartered in Iowa City, Iowa. MidWestOne is the parent company of MidWestOne Bank, which operates banking offices in Iowa, Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Colorado. MidWestOne provides electronic delivery of financial services through its website, MidWestOne.bank. MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc. trades on the Nasdaq Global Select Market under the symbol “MOFG”.

    Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

    This release contains certain “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of such term in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. We and our representatives may, from time to time, make written or oral statements that are “forward-looking” and provide information other than historical information. These statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other factors that may cause actual results to be materially different from any results, levels of activity, performance or achievements expressed or implied by any forward-looking statement. These factors include, among other things, the factors listed below. Forward-looking statements, which may be based upon beliefs, expectations and assumptions of our management and on information currently available to management, are generally identifiable by the use of words such as “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “plans,” “goals,” “intend,” “project,” “estimate,” “forecast,” “may” or similar expressions. These forward-looking statements are subject to certain risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in, or implied by, these statements. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on any such forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date made. Additionally, we undertake no obligation to update any statement in light of new information or future events, except as required under federal securities law.

    Our ability to predict results or the actual effect of future plans or strategies is inherently uncertain. Factors that could have an impact on our ability to achieve operating results, growth plan goals and future prospects include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) the effects of changes in interest rates, including on our net income and the value of our securities portfolio; (2) fluctuations in the value of our investment securities; (3) effects on the U.S. economy resulting from the implementation of proposed policies and executive orders, including the imposition of tariffs, changes in immigration policy, changes to regulatory or other governmental agencies, DEI and ESG initiative trends, changes in consumer protection policies, changes in foreign policy and tax regulations; (4) volatility of rate-sensitive deposits; (5) asset/liability matching risks and liquidity risks; (6) the ability to successfully manage liquidity risk, which may increase dependence on non-core funding sources such as brokered deposits, and may negatively impact the Company’s cost of funds; (7) the concentration of large deposits from certain clients, including those who have balances above current FDIC insurance limits; (8) credit quality deterioration, pronounced and sustained reduction in real estate market values, or other uncertainties, including the impact of inflationary pressures and future monetary policies of the Federal Reserve in response thereto on economic conditions and our business, resulting in an increase in the allowance for credit losses, an increase in the credit loss expense, and a reduction in net earnings; (9) the sufficiency of the allowance for credit losses to absorb the amount of expected losses inherent in our existing loan portfolio; (10) the failure of assumptions underlying the establishment of allowances for credit losses and estimation of values of collateral and various financial assets and liabilities; (11) credit risks and risks from concentrations (by type of borrower, collateral, geographic area and by industry) within our loan portfolio; (12) changes in the economic environment, competition, or other factors that may affect our ability to acquire loans or influence the anticipated growth rate of loans and deposits and the quality of the loan portfolio and loan and deposit pricing; (13) governmental monetary and fiscal policies; (14) new or revised general economic, political, or industry conditions, nationally, internationally or in the communities in which we conduct business, including the risk of a recession; (15) the imposition of domestic or foreign tariffs or other governmental policies impacting the global supply chain and value of the agricultural or other products of our borrowers; (16) war or terrorist activities, including ongoing conflicts in the Middle East and the Russian invasion of Ukraine, widespread disease or pandemic, or other adverse external events, which may cause deterioration in the economy or cause instability in credit markets; (17) legislative and regulatory changes, including changes in banking, securities, trade, and tax laws and regulations and their application by our regulators, and including changes in interpretation or prioritization of such laws and regulations; (18) changes in accounting policies and practices, as may be adopted by state and federal regulatory agencies and the Financial Accounting Standards Board; (19) the effects of competition from other commercial banks, thrifts, mortgage banking firms, consumer finance companies, credit unions, securities brokerage firms, insurance companies, money market and other mutual funds, financial technology companies, and other financial institutions operating in our markets or elsewhere or providing similar services; (20) changes in the business and economic conditions generally and in the financial services industry, and the effects of recent developments and events in the financial services industry, including the large-scale deposit withdrawals over a short period of time that resulted in prior bank failures; (21) the occurrence of fraudulent activity, breaches, or failures of our or our third party vendors’ information security controls or cyber-security related incidents, including as a result of sophisticated attacks using artificial intelligence and similar tools or as a result of insider fraud; (22) the ability to attract and retain key executives and employees experienced in banking and financial services; (23) our ability to adapt successfully to technological changes implemented by us and other parties in the financial services industry, including third-party vendors, which may be more difficult to implement or more expensive than anticipated or which may have unforeseen consequence to us and our customers, including the development and implementation of tools incorporating artificial intelligence; (24) operational risks, including data processing system failures and fraud; (25) the costs, effects and outcomes of existing or future litigation or other legal proceedings and regulatory actions; (26) the risks of mergers or branch sales (including the sale of our Florida banking operations and the acquisition of Denver Bankshares, Inc.), including, without limitation, the related time and costs of implementing such transactions, integrating operations as part of these transactions and possible failures to achieve expected gains, revenue growth and/or expense savings from such transactions; (27) the economic impacts on the Company and its customers of climate change, natural disasters and exceptional weather occurrences, such as: tornadoes, floods and blizzards; and (28) other risk factors detailed from time to time in Securities and Exchange Commission filings made by the Company.


    MIDWEST
    ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
    FIVE QUARTER CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

      June 30,   March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)   2025       2025       2024       2024       2024  
    ASSETS                  
    Cash and due from banks $ 78,696     $ 68,545     $ 71,803     $ 72,173     $ 66,228  
    Interest earning deposits in banks   90,749       182,360       133,092       129,695       35,340  
    Total cash and cash equivalents   169,445       250,905       204,895       201,868       101,568  
    Debt securities available for sale at fair value   1,235,045       1,305,530       1,328,433       1,623,104       771,034  
    Held to maturity securities at amortized cost   —       —       —       —       1,053,080  
    Total securities   1,235,045       1,305,530       1,328,433       1,623,104       1,824,114  
    Loans held for sale   16,812       13,836       749       3,283       2,850  
    Gross loans held for investment   4,391,426       4,315,546       4,328,413       4,344,559       4,304,619  
    Unearned income, net   (10,238 )     (11,362 )     (12,786 )     (15,803 )     (17,387 )
    Loans held for investment, net of unearned income   4,381,188       4,304,184       4,315,627       4,328,756       4,287,232  
    Allowance for credit losses   (65,800 )     (53,900 )     (55,200 )     (54,000 )     (53,900 )
    Total loans held for investment, net   4,315,388       4,250,284       4,260,427       4,274,756       4,233,332  
    Premises and equipment, net   89,910       90,031       90,851       90,750       91,793  
    Goodwill   69,788       69,788       69,788       69,788       69,388  
    Other intangible assets, net   22,359       23,611       25,019       26,469       27,939  
    Foreclosed assets, net   3,414       3,419       3,337       3,583       6,053  
    Other assets   238,612       246,990       252,830       258,881       224,621  
    Total assets $ 6,160,773     $ 6,254,394     $ 6,236,329     $ 6,552,482     $ 6,581,658  
    LIABILITIES                   
    Noninterest bearing deposits $ 910,693     $ 903,714     $ 951,423     $ 917,715     $ 882,472  
    Interest bearing deposits   4,477,405       4,585,428       4,526,559       4,451,012       4,529,947  
    Total deposits   5,388,098       5,489,142       5,477,982       5,368,727       5,412,419  
    Short-term borrowings   —       1,482       3,186       410,630       414,684  
    Long-term debt   112,320       111,398       113,376       115,051       114,839  
    Other liabilities   71,315       72,747       82,089       95,836       96,430  
    Total liabilities   5,571,733       5,674,769       5,676,633       5,990,244       6,038,372  
    SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY                   
    Common stock   21,580       21,580       21,580       21,580       16,581  
    Additional paid-in capital   414,485       414,258       414,987       414,965       300,831  
    Retained earnings   232,718       227,790       217,776       206,490       306,030  
    Treasury stock   (22,186 )     (20,905 )     (21,885 )     (21,955 )     (22,021 )
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (57,557 )     (63,098 )     (72,762 )     (58,842 )     (58,135 )
    Total shareholders’ equity   589,040       579,625       559,696       562,238       543,286  
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 6,160,773     $ 6,254,394     $ 6,236,329     $ 6,552,482     $ 6,581,658  


    MIDWEST
    ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
    FIVE QUARTER CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME

      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30,   March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
      2025     2025     2024     2024       2024     2025     2024
    Interest income                          
    Loans, including fees $ 62,276   $ 59,462   $ 62,458   $ 62,521     $ 61,643   $ 121,738   $ 119,590
    Taxable investment securities   12,928     13,327     11,320     8,779       9,228     26,255     18,688
    Tax-exempt investment securities   699     703     728     1,611       1,663     1,402     3,373
    Other   1,517     1,247     3,761     785       242     2,764     660
    Total interest income   77,420     74,739     78,267     73,696       72,776     152,159     142,311
    Interest expense                          
    Deposits   25,665     25,484     27,324     29,117       28,942     51,149     56,668
    Short-term borrowings   19     25     115     5,043       5,409     44     10,384
    Long-term debt   1,754     1,791     1,890     2,015       2,078     3,545     4,181
    Total interest expense   27,438     27,300     29,329     36,175       36,429     54,738     71,233
    Net interest income   49,982     47,439     48,938     37,521       36,347     97,421     71,078
    Credit loss expense   11,889     1,687     1,291     1,535       1,267     13,576     5,956
    Net interest income after credit loss expense   38,093     45,752     47,647     35,986       35,080     83,845     65,122
    Noninterest income                          
    Investment services and trust activities   3,705     3,544     3,779     3,410       3,504     7,249     7,007
    Service charges and fees   2,190     2,131     2,159     2,170       2,156     4,321     4,300
    Card revenue   1,934     1,744     1,833     1,935       1,907     3,678     3,850
    Loan revenue   1,417     1,194     1,841     760       1,525     2,611     2,381
    Bank-owned life insurance   677     1,057     719     879       668     1,734     1,328
    Investment securities gains (losses), net   —     33     161     (140,182 )     33     33     69
    Other   326     433     345     640       11,761     759     12,369
    Total noninterest income (loss)   10,249     10,136     10,837     (130,388 )     21,554     20,385     31,304
    Noninterest expense                          
    Compensation and employee benefits   21,011     21,212     20,684     19,943       20,985     42,223     41,915
    Occupancy expense of premises, net   2,540     2,588     2,772     2,443       2,435     5,128     5,248
    Equipment   2,550     2,426     2,688     2,486       2,530     4,976     5,130
    Legal and professional   2,153     2,226     2,534     2,261       2,253     4,379     4,312
    Data processing   1,486     1,698     1,719     1,580       1,645     3,184     3,005
    Marketing   762     552     793     619       636     1,314     1,234
    Amortization of intangibles   1,252     1,408     1,449     1,470       1,593     2,660     3,230
    FDIC insurance   851     917     980     923       1,051     1,768     1,993
    Communications   161     159     154     159       191     320     387
    Foreclosed assets, net   83     74     56     330       138     157     496
    Other   2,918     3,033     3,543     3,584       2,304     5,951     4,376
    Total noninterest expense   35,767     36,293     37,372     35,798       35,761     72,060     71,326
    Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)   12,575     19,595     21,112     (130,200 )     20,873     32,170     25,100
    Income tax expense (benefit)   2,595     4,457     4,782     (34,493 )     5,054     7,052     6,012
    Net income (loss) $ 9,980   $ 15,138   $ 16,330   $ (95,707 )   $ 15,819   $ 25,118   $ 19,088
                               
    Earnings (loss) per common share                          
    Basic $ 0.48   $ 0.73   $ 0.79   $ (6.05 )   $ 1.00   $ 1.21   $ 1.21
    Diluted $ 0.48   $ 0.73   $ 0.78   $ (6.05 )   $ 1.00   $ 1.20   $ 1.21
    Weighted average basic common shares outstanding   20,816     20,797     20,776     15,829       15,763     20,807     15,743
    Weighted average diluted common shares outstanding   20,843     20,849     20,851     15,829       15,781     20,846     15,775
    Dividends paid per common share $ 0.2425   $ 0.2425   $ 0.2425   $ 0.2425     $ 0.2425   $ 0.4850   $ 0.4850


    MIDWEST
    ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
    FINANCIAL STATISTICS

      As of or for the Three Months Ended   As of or for the Six Months Ended
      June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Earnings:                  
    Net interest income $ 49,982     $ 47,439     $ 36,347     $ 97,421     $ 71,078  
    Noninterest income   10,249       10,136       21,554       20,385       31,304  
    Total revenue, net of interest expense   60,231       57,575       57,901       117,806       102,382  
    Credit loss expense   11,889       1,687       1,267       13,576       5,956  
    Noninterest expense   35,767       36,293       35,761       72,060       71,326  
    Income before income tax expense   12,575       19,595       20,873       32,170       25,100  
    Income tax expense   2,595       4,457       5,054       7,052       6,012  
    Net income $ 9,980     $ 15,138     $ 15,819     $ 25,118     $ 19,088  
    Pre-tax pre-provision net revenue(1) $ 24,464     $ 21,282     $ 22,140     $ 45,746     $ 31,056  
    Adjusted earnings(1)   10,176       15,301       8,132       25,479       12,621  
    Per Share Data:                  
    Diluted earnings $ 0.48     $ 0.73     $ 1.00     $ 1.20     $ 1.21  
    Adjusted earnings(1)   0.49       0.73       0.52       1.22       0.80  
    Book value   28.36       27.85       34.44       28.36       34.44  
    Tangible book value(1)   23.92       23.36       28.27       23.92       28.27  
    Ending Balance Sheet:                  
    Total assets $ 6,160,773     $ 6,254,394     $ 6,581,658     $ 6,160,773     $ 6,581,658  
    Loans held for investment, net of unearned income   4,381,188       4,304,184       4,287,232       4,381,188       4,287,232  
    Total securities   1,235,045       1,305,530       1,824,114       1,235,045       1,824,114  
    Total deposits   5,388,098       5,489,142       5,412,419       5,388,098       5,412,419  
    Short-term borrowings   —       1,482       414,684       —       414,684  
    Long-term debt   112,320       111,398       114,839       112,320       114,839  
    Total shareholders’ equity   589,040       579,625       543,286       589,040       543,286  
    Average Balance Sheet:                  
    Average total assets $ 6,172,649     $ 6,168,546     $ 6,713,573     $ 6,170,609     $ 6,674,476  
    Average total loans   4,370,196       4,290,710       4,419,697       4,330,659       4,358,957  
    Average total deposits   5,398,916       5,398,819       5,514,924       5,398,868       5,498,020  
    Financial Ratios:                  
    Return on average assets   0.65 %     1.00 %     0.95 %     0.82 %     0.58 %
    Return on average equity   6.81 %     10.74 %     11.91 %     8.74 %     7.23 %
    Return on average tangible equity(1)   8.84 %     13.75 %     15.74 %     11.24 %     9.98 %
    Efficiency ratio(1)   56.20 %     59.38 %     56.29 %     57.75 %     62.83 %
    Net interest margin, tax equivalent(1)   3.57 %     3.44 %     2.41 %     3.51 %     2.37 %
    Loans to deposits ratio   81.31 %     78.41 %     79.21 %     81.31 %     79.21 %
    CET1 Ratio   11.02 %     10.97 %     9.56 %     11.02 %     9.56 %
    Common equity ratio   9.56 %     9.27 %     8.25 %     9.56 %     8.25 %
    Tangible common equity ratio(1)   8.19 %     7.89 %     6.88 %     8.19 %     6.88 %
    Credit Risk Profile:                  
    Total nonperforming loans $ 37,192     $ 17,470     $ 25,128     $ 37,192     $ 25,128  
    Nonperforming loans ratio   0.85 %     0.41 %     0.59 %     0.85 %     0.59 %
    Total nonperforming assets $ 40,606     $ 20,889     $ 31,181     $ 40,606     $ 31,181  
    Nonperforming assets ratio   0.66 %     0.33 %     0.47 %     0.66 %     0.47 %
    Net charge-offs $ 189     $ 3,087     $ 524     $ 3,276     $ 713  
    Net charge-off ratio   0.02 %     0.29 %     0.05 %     0.15 %     0.03 %
    Allowance for credit losses $ 65,800     $ 53,900     $ 53,900     $ 65,800     $ 53,900  
    Allowance for credit losses ratio   1.50 %     1.25 %     1.26 %     1.50 %     1.26 %
    Allowance for credit losses to nonaccrual ratio   179.19 %     309.47 %     218.26 %     179.19 %     218.26 %
                       
    (1) Non-GAAP measure. See the Non-GAAP Measures section for a reconciliation to the most directly comparable GAAP measure.
     

    MIDWESTONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
    AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND YIELD ANALYSIS

      Three Months Ended
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024
    (Dollars in thousands) Average
    Balance
      Interest
    Income/
    Expense
      Average
    Yield/
    Cost
      Average
    Balance
      Interest
    Income/
    Expense
      Average
    Yield/
    Cost
      Average Balance   Interest
    Income/
    Expense
      Average
    Yield/
    Cost
    ASSETS                                  
    Loans, including fees (1)(2)(3) $ 4,370,196   $ 63,298   5.81 %   $ 4,290,710   $ 60,443   5.71 %   $ 4,419,697   $ 62,581   5.69 %
    Taxable investment securities   1,168,048     12,928   4.44 %     1,207,844     13,327   4.47 %     1,520,253     9,228   2.44 %
    Tax-exempt investment securities (2)(4)   102,792     859   3.35 %     105,563     865   3.32 %     322,092     2,040   2.55 %
    Total securities held for investment(2)   1,270,840     13,787   4.35 %     1,313,407     14,192   4.38 %     1,842,345     11,268   2.46 %
    Other   104,628     1,517   5.82 %     124,133     1,247   4.07 %     20,452     242   4.76 %
    Total interest earning assets(2) $ 5,745,664   $ 78,602   5.49 %   $ 5,728,250   $ 75,882   5.37 %   $ 6,282,494   $ 74,091   4.74 %
    Other assets   426,985             440,296             431,079        
    Total assets $ 6,172,649           $ 6,168,546           $ 6,713,573        
    LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY                                  
    Interest checking deposits $ 1,221,266   $ 2,101   0.69 %   $ 1,240,586   $ 2,127   0.70 %   $ 1,297,356   $ 3,145   0.97 %
    Money market deposits   986,029     6,057   2.46 %     1,002,743     6,333   2.56 %     1,072,688     7,821   2.93 %
    Savings deposits   843,223     3,161   1.50 %     835,731     3,057   1.48 %     738,773     2,673   1.46 %
    Time deposits   1,436,301     14,346   4.01 %     1,397,595     13,967   4.05 %     1,470,956     15,303   4.18 %
    Total interest bearing deposits   4,486,819     25,665   2.29 %     4,476,655     25,484   2.31 %     4,579,773     28,942   2.54 %
    Securities sold under agreements to repurchase   896     1   0.45 %     2,705     5   0.75 %     5,300     10   0.76 %
    Other short-term borrowings   —     18   — %     —     20   — %     442,546     5,399   4.91 %
    Total short-term borrowings   896     19   8.51 %     2,705     25   3.75 %     447,846     5,409   4.86 %
    Long-term debt   112,035     1,754   6.28 %     113,364     1,791   6.41 %     120,256     2,078   6.95 %
    Total borrowed funds   112,931     1,773   6.30 %     116,069     1,816   6.35 %     568,102     7,487   5.30 %
    Total interest bearing liabilities $ 4,599,750   $ 27,438   2.39 %   $ 4,592,724   $ 27,300   2.41 %   $ 5,147,875   $ 36,429   2.85 %
    Noninterest bearing deposits   912,097             922,164             935,151        
    Other liabilities   73,094             82,280             96,553        
    Shareholders’ equity   587,708             571,378             533,994        
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 6,172,649           $ 6,168,546           $ 6,713,573        
    Net interest income(2)     $ 51,164           $ 48,582           $ 37,662    
    Net interest spread(2)         3.10 %           2.96 %           1.89 %
    Net interest margin(2)         3.57 %           3.44 %           2.41 %
                                       
    Total deposits(5) $ 5,398,916   $ 25,665   1.91 %   $ 5,398,819   $ 25,484   1.91 %   $ 5,514,924   $ 28,942   2.11 %
    Cost of funds(6)         2.00 %           2.01 %           2.41 %
                                             
    (1) Average balance includes nonaccrual loans.
    (2) Tax equivalent. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (3) Interest income includes net loan fees, loan purchase discount accretion and tax equivalent adjustments. Net loan fees were $272 thousand, $256 thousand, and $337 thousand for the three months ended June 30, 2025, March 31, 2025, and June 30, 2024, respectively. Loan purchase discount accretion was $1.1 million, $1.2 million, and $1.3 million for the three months ended June 30, 2025, March 31, 2025, and June 30, 2024, respectively. Tax equivalent adjustments were $1.0 million, $981 thousand, and $938 thousand for the three months ended June 30, 2025, March 31, 2025, and June 30, 2024, respectively. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (4) Interest income includes tax equivalent adjustments of $160 thousand, $162 thousand, and $377 thousand for the three months ended June 30, 2025, March 31, 2025, and June 30, 2024, respectively. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (5) Total deposits is the sum of total interest-bearing deposits and noninterest bearing deposits. The cost of total deposits is calculated as annualized interest expense on deposits divided by average total deposits.
    (6) Cost of funds is calculated as annualized total interest expense divided by the sum of average total deposits and borrowed funds.
         


    MIDWEST
    ONE FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.
    AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND YIELD ANALYSIS

      Six Months Ended
      June 30, 2025   June 30, 2024
    (Dollars in thousands) Average
    Balance
      Interest
    Income/
    Expense
      Average
    Yield/
    Cost
      Average
    Balance
      Interest
    Income/
    Expense
      Average
    Yield/
    Cost
    ASSETS                      
    Loans, including fees (1)(2)(3) $ 4,330,659   $ 123,741   5.76 %   $ 4,358,957   $ 121,448   5.60 %
    Taxable investment securities   1,187,836     26,255   4.46 %     1,538,928     18,688   2.44 %
    Tax-exempt investment securities (2)(4)   104,170     1,724   3.34 %     325,414     4,137   2.56 %
    Total securities held for investment(2)   1,292,006     27,979   4.37 %     1,864,342     22,825   2.46 %
    Other   114,327     2,764   4.88 %     25,529     660   5.20 %
    Total interest earning assets(2) $ 5,736,992   $ 154,484   5.43 %   $ 6,248,828   $ 144,933   4.66 %
    Other assets   433,617             425,648        
    Total assets $ 6,170,609           $ 6,674,476        
    LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY                      
    Interest checking deposits $ 1,230,873   $ 4,228   0.69 %   $ 1,299,413   $ 6,035   0.93 %
    Money market deposits   994,340     12,390   2.51 %     1,087,616     15,886   2.94 %
    Savings deposits   839,498     6,218   1.49 %     716,458     4,720   1.32 %
    Time deposits   1,417,054     28,313   4.03 %     1,458,969     30,027   4.14 %
    Total interest bearing deposits   4,481,765     51,149   2.30 %     4,562,456     56,668   2.50 %
    Securities sold under agreements to repurchase   1,795     6   0.67 %     5,315     21   0.79 %
    Other short-term borrowings   —     38   — %     426,036     10,363   4.89 %
    Total short-term borrowings   1,795     44   4.94 %     431,351     10,384   4.84 %
    Long-term debt   112,696     3,545   6.34 %     121,761     4,181   6.91 %
    Total borrowed funds   114,491     3,589   6.32 %     553,112     14,565   5.30 %
    Total interest bearing liabilities $ 4,596,256   $ 54,738   2.40 %   $ 5,115,568   $ 71,233   2.80 %
    Noninterest bearing deposits   917,103             935,564        
    Other liabilities   77,662             92,581        
    Shareholders’ equity   579,588             530,763        
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 6,170,609           $ 6,674,476        
    Net interest income(2)     $ 99,746           $ 73,700    
    Net interest spread(2)         3.03 %           1.86 %
    Net interest margin(2)         3.51 %           2.37 %
                           
    Total deposits(5) $ 5,398,868   $ 51,149   1.91 %   $ 5,498,020   $ 56,668   2.07 %
    Cost of funds(6)         2.00 %           2.37 %
                               
    (1) Average balance includes nonaccrual loans.
    (2) Tax equivalent. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (3) Interest income includes net loan fees, loan purchase discount accretion and tax equivalent adjustments. Net loan fees were $528 thousand and $574 thousand for the six months ended June 30, 2025 and June 30, 2024, respectively. Loan purchase discount accretion was $2.3 million and $2.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025 and June 30, 2024, respectively. Tax equivalent adjustments were $2.0 million and $1.9 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025 and June 30, 2024, respectively. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (4) Interest income includes tax equivalent adjustments of $0.3 million and $0.8 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025 and June 30, 2024, respectively. The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (5) Total deposits is the sum of total interest-bearing deposits and noninterest bearing deposits. The cost of total deposits is calculated as annualized interest expense on deposits divided by average total deposits.
    (6) Cost of funds is calculated as annualized total interest expense divided by the sum of average total deposits and borrowed funds.
     


    Non-GAAP Measures

    This earnings release contains non-GAAP measures for tangible common equity, tangible book value per share, tangible common equity ratio, return on average tangible equity, net interest margin (tax equivalent), core net interest margin, loan yield (tax equivalent), core yield on loans, efficiency ratio, adjusted earnings and adjusted earnings per share, and pre-tax pre-provision net revenue. Management believes these measures provide investors with useful information regarding the Company’s profitability, financial condition and capital adequacy, consistent with how management evaluates the Company’s financial performance. The following tables provide a reconciliation of each non-GAAP measure to the most comparable GAAP measure.

    Tangible Common Equity/Tangible Book Value                    
    per Share/Tangible Common Equity Ratio   June 30,   March 31,   December 31,   September 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data)     2025       2025       2024       2024       2024  
    Total shareholders’ equity   $ 589,040     $ 579,625     $ 559,696     $ 562,238     $ 543,286  
    Intangible assets, net     (92,147 )     (93,399 )     (94,807 )     (96,257 )     (97,327 )
    Tangible common equity   $ 496,893     $ 486,226     $ 464,889     $ 465,981     $ 445,959  
                         
    Total assets   $ 6,160,773     $ 6,254,394     $ 6,236,329     $ 6,552,482     $ 6,581,658  
    Intangible assets, net     (92,147 )     (93,399 )     (94,807 )     (96,257 )     (97,327 )
    Tangible assets   $ 6,068,626     $ 6,160,995     $ 6,141,522     $ 6,456,225     $ 6,484,331  
                         
    Book value per share   $ 28.36     $ 27.85     $ 26.94     $ 27.06     $ 34.44  
    Tangible book value per share(1)   $ 23.92     $ 23.36     $ 22.37     $ 22.43     $ 28.27  
    Shares outstanding     20,769,577       20,815,715       20,777,485       20,774,919       15,773,468  
                         
    Common equity ratio     9.56 %     9.27 %     8.97 %     8.58 %     8.25 %
    Tangible common equity ratio(2)     8.19 %     7.89 %     7.57 %     7.22 %     6.88 %
       
    (1) Tangible common equity divided by shares outstanding.
    (2) Tangible common equity divided by tangible assets.
     
       
        Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
    Return on Average Tangible Equity   June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)     2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Net income   $ 9,980     $ 15,138     $ 15,819     $ 25,118     $ 19,088  
    Intangible amortization, net of tax(1)     931       1,047       1,195       1,978       2,423  
    Tangible net income   $ 10,911     $ 16,185     $ 17,014     $ 27,096     $ 21,511  
                         
    Average shareholders’ equity   $ 587,708     $ 571,378     $ 533,994     $ 579,588     $ 530,763  
    Average intangible assets, net     (92,733 )     (94,169 )     (99,309 )     (93,447 )     (97,302 )
    Average tangible equity   $ 494,975     $ 477,209     $ 434,685     $ 486,141     $ 433,461  
                         
    Return on average equity     6.81 %     10.74 %     11.91 %     8.74 %     7.23 %
    Return on average tangible equity(2)     8.84 %     13.75 %     15.74 %     11.24 %     9.98 %
       
    (1) The income tax rate utilized was the blended marginal tax rate.
    (2) Annualized tangible net income divided by average tangible equity.
     
    Net Interest Margin, Tax Equivalent/
    Core Net Interest Margin
      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
      June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)     2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Net interest income   $ 49,982     $ 47,439     $ 36,347     $ 97,421     $ 71,078  
    Tax equivalent adjustments:                    
    Loans(1)     1,022       981       938       2,003       1,858  
    Securities(1)     160       162       377       322       764  
    Net interest income, tax equivalent   $ 51,164     $ 48,582     $ 37,662     $ 99,746     $ 73,700  
    Loan purchase discount accretion     (1,142 )     (1,166 )     (1,261 )     (2,308 )     (2,413 )
    Core net interest income   $ 50,022     $ 47,416     $ 36,401     $ 97,438     $ 71,287  
                         
    Net interest margin     3.49 %     3.36 %     2.33 %     3.42 %     2.29 %
    Net interest margin, tax equivalent(2)     3.57 %     3.44 %     2.41 %     3.51 %     2.37 %
    Core net interest margin(3)     3.49 %     3.36 %     2.33 %     3.42 %     2.29 %
    Average interest earning assets   $ 5,745,664     $ 5,728,250     $ 6,282,494     $ 5,736,992     $ 6,248,828  
       
    (1) The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (2) Annualized tax equivalent net interest income divided by average interest earning assets.
    (3) Annualized core net interest income divided by average interest earning assets.     
     
          Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
    Loan Yield, Tax Equivalent / Core Yield on Loans   June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)     2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Loan interest income, including fees     $ 62,276     $ 59,462     $ 61,643     $ 121,738     $ 119,590  
    Tax equivalent adjustment(1)       1,022       981       938       2,003       1,858  
    Tax equivalent loan interest income     $ 63,298     $ 60,443     $ 62,581     $ 123,741     $ 121,448  
    Loan purchase discount accretion       (1,142 )     (1,166 )     (1,261 )     (2,308 )     (2,413 )
    Core loan interest income     $ 62,156     $ 59,277     $ 61,320     $ 121,433     $ 119,035  
                           
    Yield on loans       5.72 %     5.62 %     5.61 %     5.67 %     5.52 %
    Yield on loans, tax equivalent(2)       5.81 %     5.71 %     5.69 %     5.76 %     5.60 %
    Core yield on loans(3)       5.70 %     5.60 %     5.58 %     5.65 %     5.49 %
    Average loans     $ 4,370,196     $ 4,290,710     $ 4,419,697     $ 4,330,659     $ 4,358,957  
       
    (1) The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (2) Annualized tax equivalent loan interest income divided by average loans.
    (3) Annualized core loan interest income divided by average loans.
     
          Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
    Efficiency Ratio   June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)     2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Total noninterest expense     $ 35,767     $ 36,293     $ 35,761     $ 72,060     $ 71,326  
    Amortization of intangibles       (1,252 )     (1,408 )     (1,593 )     (2,660 )     (3,230 )
    Merger-related expenses       —       (40 )     (854 )     (40 )     (2,168 )
    Noninterest expense used for efficiency ratio     $ 34,515     $ 34,845     $ 33,314     $ 69,360     $ 65,928  
                           
    Net interest income, tax equivalent(1)     $ 51,164     $ 48,582     $ 37,662     $ 99,746     $ 73,700  
    Plus: Noninterest income       10,249       10,136       21,554       20,385       31,304  
    Less: Investment securities gains, net       —       33       33       33       69  
    Net revenues used for efficiency ratio     $ 61,413     $ 58,685     $ 59,183     $ 120,098     $ 104,935  
                           
    Efficiency ratio (2)       56.20 %     59.38 %     56.29 %     57.75 %     62.83 %
       
    (1) The federal statutory tax rate utilized was 21%.
    (2) Noninterest expense adjusted for amortization of intangibles and merger-related expenses divided by the sum of tax equivalent net interest income, noninterest income and net investment securities gains.
     
        Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
    Adjusted Earnings   June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data)     2025       2025       2024     2025       2024  
    Net income   $ 9,980     $ 15,138     $ 15,819   $ 25,118     $ 19,088  
    Less: Investment securities gains, net of tax(1)     —       25       24     24       51  
    Less: Mortgage servicing rights (loss) gain, net of tax(1)     (196 )     (158 )     96     (355 )     (177 )
    Plus: Merger-related expenses, net of tax(1)     —       30       634     30       1,608  
    Less: Gain on branch sale, net of tax(1)     —       —       8,201     —       8,201  
    Adjusted earnings   $ 10,176     $ 15,301     $ 8,132   $ 25,479     $ 12,621  
                         
    Weighted average diluted common shares outstanding     20,843       20,849       15,781     20,846       15,775  
                         
    Earnings per common share – diluted   $ 0.48     $ 0.73     $ 1.00   $ 1.20     $ 1.21  
    Adjusted earnings per common share(2)   $ 0.49     $ 0.73     $ 0.52   $ 1.22     $ 0.80  
       
    (1) The income tax rate utilized was the blended marginal tax rate.
    (2) Adjusted earnings divided by weighted average diluted common shares outstanding.
     
        For the Three Months Ended   Year Ended
    Pre-tax Pre-provision Net Revenue   June 30,   March 31,   June 30,   June 30,   June 30,
    (Dollars in thousands)   2025       2025       2024       2025       2024  
    Net interest income   $ 49,982     $ 47,439     $ 36,347     $ 97,421     $ 71,078  
    Noninterest income     10,249       10,136       21,554       20,385       31,304  
    Noninterest expense     (35,767 )     (36,293 )     (35,761 )     (72,060 )     (71,326 )
    Pre-tax Pre-provision Net Revenue   $ 24,464     $ 21,282     $ 22,140     $ 45,746     $ 31,056  

    Category: Earnings
    This news release may be downloaded from Corporate Profile | MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc.

    Source: MidWestOne Financial Group, Inc.

    Industry: Banks

    Contacts:  
    Charles N. Reeves   Barry S. Ray
    Chief Executive Officer  Chief Financial Officer
    319.356.5800  319.356.5800

    The MIL Network –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Canada: Police-reported crime statistics in Canada, 2024: Minister Ellis

    “I am pleased to see Statistics Canada’s 2024 police-reported crime statistics show significant improvement in Alberta. Our province achieved a nine per cent decrease in both crime severity and overall crime rate – more than double the national decline of four per cent. These strong results show that Alberta is on the right track.

    “While there is still more work to do to keep Albertans and their property safe, these results reflect the outstanding efforts of law enforcement officers across the province. I want to thank all the police services operating across Alberta for their commitment to protecting our communities. Their work, combined with strategic provincial investments in public safety, community engagement and crime prevention is delivering clear, measurable results for Albertans.

    “For instance, Statistics Canada reports that property crime and vehicle theft in Alberta dropped by eight and nine per cent respectively in 2024, continuing a broader downward trend.

    “Our year-over-year figures are encouraging and so are those illustrating long-term trends. Alberta has seen a significantly lower increase in crime severity compared to the rest of the country and recorded the lowest increase in crime rate among all provinces – six times lower than the national average.

    “While these short- and long-term trends are cause for optimism, Alberta’s government remains firmly committed to improving the safety and security of our communities through comprehensive action. While police services across the province are working hard to serve their communities, specialized units within the Alberta Sheriffs continue to augment and support their work, closing drug houses, apprehending fugitives and bolstering surveillance and officer presence in rural areas.

    “The province’s strong support for the Alberta Law Enforcement Response Teams is also helping disrupt organized and serious crime across the province. It’s clear that officer presence matters, and investments in front-line policing are helping address social disorder and improve public safety in our urban centres. 

    “However, these local successes stand in stark contrast to the ongoing inaction from the federal government whose policies have broken the bail system, allowing violent repeat offenders back on our streets, contributing to a national increase in crime. Alberta continues to call on Ottawa to reverse its harmful policy decisions that have made it harder for police to do their jobs and easier for offenders to reoffend.

    “I look forward to continuing our productive partnerships with police services across the province to maintain these positive provincial trends. People deserve communities in which they can live, work and raise a family in peace and security. While this recent data shows that things are moving in the right direction, we won’t take our eye off the ball. Alberta’s government will continue to do whatever it takes to improve public safety, reduce crime and foster safer streets and neighbourhoods for all Albertans.”

    Related news

    • New chief, next step for municipal policing option (July 2, 2025)
    • Expanding municipal police service options (April 7, 2025)
    • Tackling catalytic converter and scrap metal theft (April 7, 2025)
    • Helping rural municipalities with policing costs (Nov. 6, 2024)
    • Alberta Sheriffs help bring fugitives to justice (Sept. 17, 2024)
    • More boots on the ground to fight rural crime (July 18, 2024)
    • More boots on the ground in Calgary and Edmonton (Apr. 11, 2024)

    MIL OSI Canada News –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Analysis: High-profile sex assault cases — and their verdicts — have consequences for survivors seeking help

    Source: The Conversation – Canada – By Lisa Boucher, Assistant Professor, Gender & Social Justice, Trent University

    Five former Canada world junior hockey players have been acquitted of sexually assaulting a woman in a hotel room in 2018 after Ontario Superior Court Justice Maria Carroccia said the Crown failed to prove its case and that the victim’s evidence was neither credible nor reliable.

    The shocking outcome highlights the inadequacies and harms of the legal system and formal institutions in responding to sexual assault that advocates, researchers and victim/survivors have long pointed to.

    If we truly want to address sexual violence, then challenging rape myths — in the courts, in the media and elsewhere — is an essential part of this work.

    Sexual violence — a type of gender-based violence — is a persistent problem in Canada and across the globe, with high rates of sexual assault and other forms of sexual violence. Statistics Canada has found that approximately 4.7 million women in Canada have been sexually assaulted since the age of 15. Reporting remains low, however, and victims/survivors face a multitude of barriers to care and justice.

    Barriers to reporting and seeking help include factors like service gaps, not knowing where to go for help, inaccessibility and shame and stigma. Attitudes surrounding sexual violence can also impact survivors’ decisions to disclose. They can also influence the responses survivors receive when they reach out for support.

    Supportive vs. unsupportive reactions

    The majority of victims/survivors never report or seek help through formal channels. Instead, they’re more likely to disclose to informal support systems, like friends and family.

    When a disclosure of violence is met with a supportive reaction, victim/survivors can experience improved well-being. Positive reactions can also lead to additional help-seeking by affirming the victims/survivors’ need for care, and offering information about services and resources.

    In contrast, unsupportive responses can hinder a victim/survivor’s recovery. Such responses might involve blaming the victim, taking control of decision-making or priorizing the well-being of the person or entity receiving the information over the victim/survivor’s.

    Negative reactions can silence the victim/survivor, encourage self-blame and deter them from seeking help. And when victims/survivors anticipate negative reactions to a disclosure of violence, they are less likely to talk about it, alert authorities or seek help.

    Additionally, while most victims/survivors seek help through informal channels, most people are unprepared to hear about it. High levels of misinformation about sexual violence — or rape myths — also increase the likelihood that victims/survivors will receive unsupportive responses.

    The persistence of rape myths

    Rape myths are pervasive false beliefs about sexual assault. They minimize the seriousness of sexual violence and shift blame from individual perpetrators and root causes onto victims or survivors.

    Common rape myths include ideas that rape is rare and committed by strangers, that victims/survivors lie, that certain clothing or behaviour invites sexual assault and that it is only rape if it involves physical force and active resistance.

    Despite decades of research refuting rape myths, they persist. And they continue to influence perceptions of sexual violence, victims and perpetrators.

    Rape myth acceptance is linked to higher rates of sexual assault and lower reporting and convictionrates. Because rape myths are often internalized, they also decrease the likelihood that victims/survivors will identify their experience as violence.




    Read more:
    Rape myths can affect jurors’ perceptions of sexual assault, and that needs to change


    Rape myths and media

    One powerful way that rape myths circulate is through media. This includes traditional forms of media and social media. The pervasiveness of media in our lives makes it difficult to avoid exposure to false and harmful ideas about sexual violence.

    High-profile cases in the media — like the Jian Ghomeshi, Harvey Weinstein and Hockey Canada trials — expose the public to details and discourses about sexual violence. The intensity of coverage can have harmful effects on victims/survivors.

    For instance, in a study about experiences with seeking help and reporting sexual assault, researchers found interview participants were negatively affected by rape myths circulating during the Brett Kavanaugh confirmation hearings for a position on the United States Supreme Court.




    Read more:
    Trauma 101 in the aftermath of the Ford-Kavanaugh saga


    Interviewees reported an increase in victim-blaming reactions from friends, family and professionals. They also described intense feelings like grief and anger, and reflected on barriers to reporting sexual violence.

    Sexual assault centres in Ontario have reported spikes in calls to their crisis/support lines in response to the Hockey Canada sexual assault trial.

    This is further evidence that coverage of sexual violence can be stressful and retraumatizing for victims/survivors. Service providers have noted that some of the calls include concerns about the hurdles and attitudes sexual assault victims face when they report.

    Challenging rape myths, victim-blaming

    There are signs of growing awareness of sexual violence, spurred in large part by survivor-led movements like the #MeToo movement. Nonetheless, rape myths continue to influence understandings of, and responses to, this type of violence.

    Challenging rape myths is therefore a critical anti-violence strategy. This requires ongoing education, for the public and for professionals.

    It also requires commitments from institutions, like the courts and media, to take an active role in stopping the spread of misinformation about sexual violence, and challenging it whenever possible.

    Lisa Boucher has previously received funding from the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada and Women and Gender Equality Canada.

    – ref. High-profile sex assault cases — and their verdicts — have consequences for survivors seeking help – https://theconversation.com/high-profile-sex-assault-cases-and-their-verdicts-have-consequences-for-survivors-seeking-help-260668

    MIL OSI Analysis –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Submissions: Columbia’s $200M deal with Trump administration sets a precedent for other universities to bend to the government’s will

    Source: The Conversation – USA (2) – By Brendan Cantwell, Associate Professor of Higher, Adult, and Lifelong Education, Michigan State University

    Students at Columbia University in New York City on April 14, 2025. Charly Triballeau/AFP via Getty Images

    Columbia University agreed on July 23, 2025, to pay a US$200 million fine to the federal government and to settle allegations that it did not create a safe environment for Jewish students during Palestinian rights protests in 2024.

    The deal will restore the vast majority of the $400 million in federal grants and contracts that Columbia was previously awarded, before the administration withdrew the funding in March 2025.

    It marks the first financial and political agreement a university has reached with the Trump administration in its push for more control over higher education – and stands to have significant ripple effects for how other universities and colleges carry out their basic operations.

    Amy Lieberman, the education editor at The Conversation U.S., spoke with Brendan Cantwell, a scholar of higher education at Michigan State University, to understand what’s exactly in this agreement – and the lasting precedent it may set on government intervention in higher education.

    Palestinian rights demonstrators march through Columbia University on Oct. 7, 2024, marking one year of the war between Hamas and Israel.
    Kena Betancur/AFP via Getty Images

    What’s in the deal Columbia made with the Trump administration?

    The agreement requires Columbia to make a $200 million payment to the federal government. Columbia will also pay $21 million to settle investigations brought by the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.

    Columbia will need to keep detailed statistics about student applicants – including their race and ethnicity, grades and SAT scores – as well as information about faculty and staff hiring decisions. Columbia will then have to share this data with the federal government.

    In exchange, the federal government will release most of the $400 million in frozen grant money previously awarded to Columbia and allow faculty at the university to compete for future federal grants.

    How does this deal address antisemitism?

    The Trump administration has cited antisemitism against students and faculty on campuses to justify its broad incursion into the business of universities around the country.

    Antisemitism is a real and legitimate concern in U.S. society and higher education, including at Columbia.

    But the federal complaint the administration made against Columbia was not actually about antisemitism. The administration made a formal accusation of antisemitism at Columbia in May of this year but suspended grants to the university in March. The federal government had initially acknowledged that cutting federal research grants did nothing to address the climate for Jewish students on campus, for example.

    When the federal government investigates civil rights violations, it usually conducts site visits and does very thorough investigations. We never saw such a government report about antisemitism at Columbia or other universities.

    The settlement that Columbia has entered into with the administration also doesn’t do much about antisemitism.

    The agreement includes Columbia redefining antisemitism with a broader definition that is also used by the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance. The definition now includes “a certain perception of Jews, which may be expressed as hatred toward Jews” – a description that is also used by the U.S. State Department and several European governments but some critics say conflates antisemitism with anti-Zionism.

    Instead, the agreement primarily has to do with faculty hiring and admissions decisions. The federal government alleges that Columbia is discriminating against white and Asian applicants, and that this will allow the government to ensure that everybody who is admitted is considered only on the basis of merit.

    The administration could argue that changing hiring practices to get faculty who are less hostile to Jewish students could change the campus climate, but the agreement doesn’t really identify ways in which the university contributed to or ignored antisemitic conduct.

    Is this a new issue?

    There has been a long-running issue that conservatives and members of the Trump administration – dating back to his first term – have with higher education. The Trump administration and other conservatives have said for years that higher education is too liberal.

    The protests were the flash point that put Columbia in the administration’s crosshairs, as well as claims that Columbia was creating a hostile environment for Jewish students.

    The administration’s complaints aren’t limited to Columbia. Harvard is in a protracted conflict with the administration, and the administration has launched investigations into dozens of other schools around the country. These universities are butting heads with the administration over the same grievance that higher education is too liberal. There are also specific claims about antisemitism on university campuses and the privileges given to nonwhite students in admissions or campus life.

    While the administration has a common set of complaints about a range of universities, there is a mix of schools that the administration is taking issue with. Some of them, such as Harvard, are very high profile. The Department of Justice forced out the president at the University of Virginia in January 2025 on the grounds that he had not done enough to root out diversity, equity and inclusion programs at the public university. The University of Virginia may have been a target for the administration because a Republican governor appointed most members of its governance board and agreed with Trump’s complaints.

    How could this change the makeup of Columbia’s student population?

    The Supreme Court ruled in 2023 that Harvard’s affirmative action program, which considered race in admissions, violated the Equal Protection Clause of the 14th Amendment. This effectively ended race-based affirmative action for all U.S. colleges and universities.

    Now, with the Columbia deal, the government could say that it would expect to see a proportion of students who are white increase and students who are Black and Latino to decrease at Columbia. That’s a legal approach that America First Legal, a conservative legal advocacy group founded by Stephen Miller, a Trump administration official, has already tried.

    Back in February 2025, America First Legal alleged in a federal lawsuit that the University of California, Los Angeles, was using illegal admissions criteria, because of the number of Black and Latino students that were admitted by the school. That lawsuit is ongoing.

    Claire Shipman, Columbia University’s acting president, speaks during the school’s May 2025 commencement ceremony.
    Jeenah Moon/Pool/AFP via Getty Images

    What does this agreement mean for US higher education as a whole?

    It is an enormous, unprecedented shift in how the federal government works with higher education. Since the McCarthy era in the 1940s and ’50s, when professors were blacklisted and fired because of their alleged communism, Americans have not seen the federal government interrogate education.

    The federal government does have a role in securing people’s civil rights, including in the context of higher education, but this is very, very different from how the federal government has done civil rights investigations and entered into agreements with universities in the past.

    This agreement is very broad and gives the federal government oversight of things that have long been under universities’ control, such as whom they hire to teach and which students they admit.

    The federal government is now saying it has the right to look over universities’ shoulders and guide them in this work that has long been considered independent. And the government is willing to be extremely coercive to get universities to comply.

    What signal does this agreement send to other universities?

    This agreement sets a precedent for the government to direct colleges and universities to comply with its political agenda. This violates the long tradition of academic independence that had helped to make the U.S. higher education system the envy of the world.

    Columbia can afford paying $200 million to the federal government. Most universities can’t afford to pay $200 million.

    And most campuses cannot survive without federal resources, whether that comes in the form of student financial aid or research grants. This agreement sets a standard for other universities that, if they don’t immediately do what the federal government wants them to do, the government could impose penalties that are so high it could end their ability to operate.

    Brendan Cantwell is a Professor in the Department of Educational Administration at Michigan State University.

    – ref. Columbia’s $200M deal with Trump administration sets a precedent for other universities to bend to the government’s will – https://theconversation.com/columbias-200m-deal-with-trump-administration-sets-a-precedent-for-other-universities-to-bend-to-the-governments-will-261902

    MIL OSI –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Analysis: Always on, always tired, sometimes rude – how to avoid the ‘triple-peak trap’ of modern work

    Source: The Conversation – UK – By Marc Fullman, Docotoral Researcher in Organisational Behaviour, University of Sussex Business School, University of Sussex

    A groaning inbox by 6am? Nanci Santos Iglesias/Shutterstock

    If your first task of the day is triaging a bulging inbox at 6am, you are not alone. A recent Microsoft report headlined “Breaking down the infinite workday” found that 40% of Microsoft 365 users online at this hour are already scanning their emails – and that an average worker will receive 117 emails before the clock rolls around to midnight.

    But that’s not all. By 8am, Microsoft Teams notifications outstrip email for most workers, and the typical employee is hit with 153 chat messages during the day.

    The report states that, while meetings swallow the prime 9am–11am focus window, interruptions arrive every two minutes throughout the day. This perpetual work overload means a third of professionals reopen their inbox to answer more emails at 10pm.

    In short, Microsoft’s telemetry of this “triple-peak” day (first thing, mid-morning and late at night) paints a vivid picture of a work rhythm that never stops.

    From an occupational psychology perspective, these statistics are more than curious trivia. They signal a cluster of psychosocial hazards.

    Boundary Theory holds that recovery depends on clear and solid boundaries – both psychologically and in terms of time – between work and the rest of life. Microsoft’s findings show those limits dissolving. This includes 29% of users checking email after 10pm.

    Similarly, a four-day diary study of Dutch professionals found that heavier after-hours smartphone use predicted poorer psychological detachment and exhaustion the next day.

    This can have wider consequences. When people are busy, rushed or harried, one of the first things to suffer is their regulation of online behaviour. Large-scale survey research shows that ambiguous or curt digital messages occur when we are depleted. These can obviously sap wellbeing in recipients.

    In a 2024 study of workers in the UK and Italy, incivility in emails between colleagues predicted work-life conflict and exhaustion via “techno-invasion”, as workers reported being exposed to an ongoing torrent of unpleasant messaging.

    So-called ‘techno-invasion’ could lead to work-life conflict and emotional exhaustion.
    fizkes/Shutterstock

    My ongoing doctoral research examines how workers respond to messages they receive, and exposes the nuance on different communication platforms. Among the 300 UK workers involved, identical messages were rated as more uncivil on email than on Teams, particularly when they were informal. Frustration on the part of a recipient (in terms of how they interpret a message) accounted for nearly 50% of perceived incivility on email, but only 30% on Teams.

    These findings suggest that choice of platform significantly influences how messages are received and interpreted. Using these insights, organisations can make informed decisions about communication channels, and potentially reduce workplace stress and improve employee wellbeing in the process.

    Microsoft suggests that AI “agent bosses” will rescue workers. These tools could summarise inboxes, draft replies and free up humans for higher-order work.

    The data, however, exposes a cultural contradiction. Managers tell staff to switch off, yet their appraisal spreadsheets tell a different story. In one set of experiments, the same bosses who praised weekend digital detoxing also ranked the detoxers as less promotable than colleagues who were glued to their inboxes.

    Little wonder Microsoft’s own data shows the same late-night peak, despite widespread wellbeing guidance to switch off after hours. Without changing how commitment is signalled and rewarded, faster tools risk accelerating the treadmill rather than dismantling it.

    What organisations can do

    1. Individual level – let people feel they have control

    Encourage “quiet hours” and teach employees to disable non-urgent notifications. Boundary-control research shows that when workers feel they have control over connectivity, it creates a buffer against fatigue caused by after-hours email.

    2. Team level – communication charters

    Teams should agree explicit norms for communication. This could include capping the numbers invited to meetings and insisting on agendas. Simple charters along these lines restore predictability for workers and cut “decision fatigue”.

    3. Organisational level – redesign metrics

    Organisations could shift from visibility (green dots and instant replies) to outcome-based metrics for productivity. This removes the incentive for workers to stay online and aligns with evidence that autonomy is a key resource.

    4. Technological level – AI for elimination, not acceleration

    Workplaces should deploy AI assistants to remove low-value tasks (for example, sorting email or drafting minutes), not just speed them up. Then they should conduct workload audits to ensure the time saved is reinvested in deep work, not simply swallowed up by extra meetings.

    The Microsoft dataset is enormous, but there are two important points to note. First, European jurisdictions with “right to disconnect” laws may be missing from the figures. Second, some metrics (for example, interruptions) are calculated on the most active fifth of users, potentially overstating a typical experience.

    But if the numbers in Microsoft’s report feel familiar, that is precisely the point. The technology designed to liberate workers is now scripting their day minute-by-minute. Occupational psychology researchers warn that without deliberate boundary setting, rising digital job demands will continue to tax wellbeing and dull performance.

    AI can be a circuit breaker, but only if it is accompanied by cultural and structural change that gives employees permission to disconnect.

    The infinite workday is not a law of nature, it is a design flaw. Fixing it will take more than faster software – it will demand a collective decision to prize focus, recovery and civility as fiercely as workers currently prize availability.


    Get your news from actual experts, straight to your inbox. Sign up to our daily newsletter to receive all The Conversation UK’s latest coverage of news and research, from politics and business to the arts and sciences.

    Marc Fullman does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    – ref. Always on, always tired, sometimes rude – how to avoid the ‘triple-peak trap’ of modern work – https://theconversation.com/always-on-always-tired-sometimes-rude-how-to-avoid-the-triple-peak-trap-of-modern-work-261514

    MIL OSI Analysis –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Canada: Saskatchewan Sees Steady Growth in Retail Trade

    Source: Government of Canada regional news

    Released on July 24, 2025

    The Province Ranks Second for Retail Trade Growth in May 2025

    Today, Statistics Canada shows Saskatchewan’s retail trade remains strong with a 6.4 per cent increase year-over-year in May 2025 over May 2024 (seasonally adjusted). This places the province above the national average of 4.9 per cent and tied for second amongst the provinces.

    “The continued growth in our retail sector reflects our province’s strong economy and is leading to more jobs and opportunities for Saskatchewan people,” Trade and Export Development Minister Warren Kaeding said. “When the province’s economy is strong, our residents get better access to the programs and services they need.”

    The total value of Saskatchewan’s retail trade reached $2.3 billion in May 2025.

    The Monthly Retail Trade Survey compiles data on sales, including e-commerce sales, and the amount of retail locations by province, territory and selected census metropolitan areas from a sample of retailers.

    Retail sales is a measure of total receipts at stores, or establishments, that sell goods and services to final consumers.

    Statistics Canada’s latest Gross Domestic Product (GDP) numbers indicate that Saskatchewan’s real GDP at basic prices reached an all-time high of $80.5 billion in 2024, increasing by $2.6 billion, or 3.4 per cent. This places Saskatchewan second in the nation for real GDP growth and above the national average of 1.6 per cent.

    Private capital investment in Saskatchewan increased last year by 17.3 per cent to $14.7 billion, ranking first among provinces. Private capital investment is projected to reach $16.2 billion in 2025, an increase of 10.1 per cent over 2024. This is the second highest anticipated percentage increase among the provinces.

    Last year, the Government of Saskatchewan unveiled its new Securing the Next Decade of Growth – Saskatchewan’s Investment Attraction Strategy. This strategy, combined with Saskatchewan’s trade and investment website, InvestSK.ca, contains helpful information for investors and outlines why Saskatchewan continues to be the best place to do business in Canada. 

    For more information, visit: InvestSK.ca.

    -30-

    For more information, contact:

    MIL OSI Canada News –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Economics: Martin Slouka to head up the Monetary and Financial Statistics Division

    Source: Czech National Bank

    Martin Slouka will become Director of the Monetary and Financial Statistics Division of the Czech National Bank’s Research and Statistics Department on 1 August 2025. The Bank Board decided on his appointment at its meeting on 24 July 2025.

    Martin Slouka graduated in statistical and insurance engineering from the Faculty of Informatics and Statistics of the Prague University of Economics and Business. He has been working at the CNB since 2005, specialising in statistics and data processing within the Monetary and Financial Statistics Division. He has held the positions of head of the Microdata Statistics Unit and Deputy Director of the Monetary and Financial Statistics Division since 2015. He has participated in numerous training courses abroad, including internships at the European Central Bank and other central banks in Europe and at the International Monetary Fund. He has represented the CNB in the ECB/ESCB working group for the development and collection of granular credit and credit risk data since 2019.

    Jakub Holas
    Director, Communications Division

    MIL OSI Economics –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Millions more appointments as more than 2,000 extra GPs recruited

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    Press release

    Millions more appointments as more than 2,000 extra GPs recruited

    Boost is part of Plan for Change to rebuild the NHS by shifting healthcare from hospitals into the community and ending the 8am scramble

    • More 2,000 extra GPs have now been hired across the country after government action to slash red tape
    • Independent survey shows progress on ending the 8am scramble, with patients finding it easier to contact GP practices
    • Plan for Change is shifting care out of hospital and into the community as government brings back the family doctor

    Millions more GP appointments are now being delivered across the country and an extra 2,000 GPs have been hired nationwide since last October, as the government’s Plan for Change brings back the family doctor.

    The average GP is responsible for 2,300 patients, and the new tranche could deliver over four million additional appointments per year.

    It comes as encouraging new figures from the Office of National Statistics (ONS) show the number of patients who found it difficult to contact their practice has fallen significantly from 18.7% in July/August 2024 to 10.6% in May/June this year.

    A total of 96.3% of patients who tried to contact their practice in the past 28 days were successful, while the number of patients who had a poor experience of their GP practice fell from 15% to 10.9% in the same period.

    In May 2025, an extra 12,000 GP appointments were delivered every working day compared to May 2024.

    The recruitment boost – which has already delivered an extra 2,000 GPs – forms part of the government’s Plan for Change, which is rebuilding the NHS by shifting healthcare out of hospitals into the community and ending the 8am scramble.

    Health and Social Care Secretary Wes Streeting said:

    We said we’d deliver 1,000 more GPs this year – and we’ve busted that target, bringing 2,000 more GPs on board. With proper investment and reform we are turning the tide on our NHS, and patients are beginning to feel the benefit.

    We still have a long road ahead, and this government is determined to keep our foot on the gas.

    Our Plan for Change will deliver this progress, creating a Neighbourhood Health Service that puts GPs at its heart and makes sure the NHS is there for everyone, whenever they need it.

    Last month the government set out its 10 Year Health Plan which outlines the reforms government is driving forwards to get the NHS back on its feet and fit for the future. The plan will train thousands more GPs and create a new Neighbourhood Health Service, so millions of patients can be treated and cared for closer to their homes by pioneering teams – some based entirely under one roof.

    When the government came into office last year, unnecessary red tape was preventing practices from hiring newly qualified GPs, meaning more than 1,000 were due to graduate into unemployment.

    At the same time, there were also 1,399 fewer fully qualified GPs than a decade prior, with years of underfunding and neglect eroding GP services.

    The government took immediate action and invested an extra £82 million to allow networks of practices to hire GPs, with the funding continuing past this year.  

    This recruitment was made possible by the tough but fair decisions the Chancellor took at the budget to fix the foundations of the NHS, enabling the government to provide almost £26 billion to get the NHS back on its feet and make it fit for the future.

    The Plan for Change is already transforming the NHS for patients and staff. Backed by the government’s major cash injection of over £102 million, more 1,000 GP surgeries will receive over £102 million to create additional space to see more patients and deliver 8.3 million more appointments each year.

    An extra 4.6 million elective appointments have been delivered since July 2024 – over double the government’s target. The upgraded NHS App will also act as a digital front door to the health service, overhauling how people get advice, manage appointments and interact with services to make their healthcare more convenient and more personalised.

    ENDS

    NOTES TO EDITORS:

    • The ONS figures on general practice can be found here.

    Share this page

    The following links open in a new tab

    • Share on Facebook (opens in new tab)
    • Share on Twitter (opens in new tab)

    Updates to this page

    Published 24 July 2025

    MIL OSI United Kingdom –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: Trader AI: This Trader AI App Sets New Standard in AI-Driven Trading with Unmatched Security and User Approval

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    New York City, NY, July 24, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Trader AI, a pioneering fintech platform specializing in AI-powered cryptocurrency trading, today announces the launch of its fully integrated trading robot tailored specifically for Canadian investors. Building on extensive development and rigorous testing, Trader AI delivers a secure, compliant, and highly automated solution designed to help both novice and experienced traders optimize returns while effectively managing risk.

    By seamlessly combining advanced machine learning algorithms, real-time market analysis, and regulatory compliance, Trader AI establishes itself as a frontrunner in the emerging landscape of AI-driven crypto trading. With the cryptocurrency market expanding rapidly—exceeding USD 50 billion in annual trading volume—investors are seeking innovative tools that simplify trading processes without compromising on security or transparency. Trader AI’s newly announced features and localized support address these needs directly, empowering Canadians to participate confidently in digital asset markets.

    Key Highlights:

    • AI-Powered Signal Generation: Proprietary machine learning models continuously scan global crypto markets to identify high-probability trade setups across major coins—including Bitcoin (BTC), Ethereum (ETH), and top altcoins—enabling swift, data-driven decision-making.
    • Fully Automated Execution: Direct API integrations with FINTRAC-registered Canadian brokerages ensure that algorithmic signals translate instantly into live orders, minimizing latency and slippage.
    • User-Centric Interface: A clean, intuitive dashboard guides users from registration to live trading in under 20 minutes, supported by a built-in demo mode for risk-free practice and an optional manual trading toggle for advanced traders.
    • Robust Risk Management: Dynamic stop-loss and take-profit mechanisms adjust automatically to real-time volatility metrics, while customizable position-sizing algorithms safeguard capital with preset risk thresholds.
    • Transparent Fee Structure: Trader AI requires a minimum deposit of USD 250 and operates commission-free—fees are embedded solely within market-standard spreads, ensuring full cost transparency.
    • Canadian-Focused Compliance: With partnerships in Ontario and British Columbia, Trader AI operates alongside regulated broker-dealers, maintains PIPEDA-aligned data practices, and offers optional KYC verification for withdrawals exceeding CAD 2,000 per month.
    • Localized Support & Education: 24/7 live chat, toll-free phone lines, region-specific webinars on taxation and compliance, and a bilingual knowledge base demonstrate Trader AI’s commitment to serving Canada’s diverse trading community.

    Visit Here to Register on the Trader AI – Select Your Country Here!!!

    Trader AI’s Mission: Democratizing Crypto Trading 

    In recent years, the cryptocurrency sector has witnessed explosive growth—often accompanied by elevated volatility, regulatory uncertainty, and a steep learning curve for newcomers. Recognizing these challenges, Trader AI was conceived to bridge the gap between sophisticated algorithmic trading and accessibility for everyday Canadians. By leveraging artificial intelligence, the platform aims to automate labor-intensive tasks such as trend analysis, technical indicator computation, and real-time order generation, freeing users from the need to monitor markets around the clock.

    How Trader AI Works: A Technical Overview

    According to official website, Trader AI’s core engine is anchored in a multi-layered AI architecture that integrates supervised learning, deep neural networks, and real-time data aggregation. Below is an outline of the platform’s operational framework:

    1. Comprehensive Market Data Aggregation
      • Trader AI continuously ingests live order book data, trade histories, volume indicators, and social sentiment inputs from over 20 global exchanges.
      • All incoming data undergoes cleaning and normalization, ensuring consistency for downstream machine learning modules.
    2. Machine Learning and Pattern Recognition
      • A combination of supervised models—trained on historical price movements from January 2017 to December 2024—and unsupervised clustering algorithms identify characteristic market patterns, such as sudden volume surges, technical divergence, and on-chain network activity that historically precedes price shifts.
      • Periodic model retraining occurs every four weeks, incorporating the most recent market data to adapt to evolving conditions.
    3. Signal Generation and Scoring
      • When the AI identifies a pattern that meets predefined confidence thresholds (typically 70–85% probability), it issues a trade signal complete with suggested entry price, stop-loss, take-profit levels, and ideal position size relative to account equity.
      • Each signal is assigned a Signal Quality Score (SQS)—a proprietary metric ranging from 0 to 100—that reflects confidence based on factors such as liquidity depth, volatility, and historical win rate for similar setups.
    4. Automated Order Execution
      • Upon user authorization (via the “Auto-Trade” toggle), signals are dispatched instantly through secure API connections to partnered Canadian brokerages and select international exchanges.
      • In live conditions, orders are executed with an average round-trip latency of under 150 milliseconds, minimizing the risk of slippage during periods of heightened volatility.
    5. Dynamic Risk Management
      • Stop-loss and take-profit parameters adjust in real-time based on Average True Range (ATR) and Bollinger Band expansions. For example, if an asset’s 24-hour volatility spikes above 8%, the AI narrows stop-loss bands by 10–15% to limit drawdown.
      • The platform’s Position Sizing Algorithm (PSA) calculates optimal trade size by referencing account balance, risk tolerance (e.g., 1–3% per trade), and portfolio diversification targets. Any deviation beyond preset risk thresholds triggers an automated alert or halts new allocations.

    Registration and Onboarding: Getting Started in Minutes

    Trader AI’s streamlined registration process has been optimized for speed, transparency, and regulatory compliance—ensuring that Canadian clients can begin trading quickly without unnecessary hurdles. The following steps outline the typical user journey from initial sign-up to live trading:

    1. Account Creation
      • Visit official website homepage, click “Sign Up,” and complete the registration form with basic information:
        • Full legal name
        • Email address
        • Country of residence (preselected as based on IP detection)
        • Phone number (for 2FA and important notifications)
      • Users must acknowledge the platform’s Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, both of which include specific disclosures regarding data handling under PIPEDA regulations.
    2. Email and Phone Verification
      • An email containing a verification link is sent immediately; clicking the link confirms the email address.
      • A one-time code (OTP) is dispatched to the registered phone number. Entering this code completes the two-step verification process.
    3. Demo Account Activation
      • Without any deposit requirement, new users receive CAD 10,000 in virtual funds to explore the platform’s features and test AI-generated signals.
      • The demo environment simulates real market conditions, including bid-ask spreads and execution latencies, enabling risk-free practice trades.
    4. Minimum Deposit and Funding Options
      • To transition from demo to live trading, a minimum deposit of USD 250 is required.
      • Canadian users may fund accounts via:
        • Interac e-Transfer: Funds clear within 1–2 business hours.
        • Credit/Debit Card (Visa/Mastercard): Instant funding up to CAD 5,000 per day for non-verified accounts.
        • Wire Transfer: Larger deposit limits (up to CAD 50,000 daily) with a 1–2 business day processing time.
      • Immediately after deposit confirmation, live trading features unlock—allowing users to choose between fully automated or manual signal execution.
    5. Optional KYC Verification
      • For withdrawals exceeding CAD 2,000 per month, users are prompted to complete Know Your Customer (KYC) verification by uploading:
        • A government-issued photo ID (e.g., driver’s license, passport)
        • Proof of address (e.g., utility bill, bank statement dated within the last 90 days)
      • KYC checks typically finalize within 24–48 hours, though urgent requests may be expedited upon user inquiry.
    6. Live Trading Activation
      • With funds deposited and (if necessary) KYC cleared, users can configure initial risk parameters—such as daily drawdown limits, maximum open trades, and preferred asset baskets.
      • The AI engine is now primed to generate signals. Traders can elect “Auto-Trade” to allow fully automated execution or opt to review and manually approve each AI recommendation.

    Core Features and Functionalities

    As per official website, Trader AI’s feature set has been refined to balance sophistication with usability—addressing the distinct needs of Canada’s diverse trading population. The following sections highlight the platform’s most compelling capabilities:

    1. AI-Powered Trade Signals

    • Proprietary Algorithms: Trader AI’s AI suite includes recurrent neural networks (RNNs) and convolutional neural networks (CNNs), which process time-series price data, order flow imbalances, and macroeconomic indicators to forecast short-term price movements.
    • Cross-Asset Analysis: Signals are not isolated to single-asset momentum. The system examines correlations between Bitcoin, major equities indices, and global macro events—such as central bank announcements—to adjust trading thresholds.
    • Signal Quality Score (SQS): Each trade recommendation includes an SQS metric (0–100) reflecting confidence based on factors like market depth, recent volatility shifts, and historical win rates for analogous setups. Users can filter signals by minimum SQS thresholds (e.g., ≥ 70) to ensure high-probability engagement.

    2. Automated Trade Execution

    • API Integrations: Trader AI maintains secure API connections with FINTRAC-registered Canadian brokerages—such as Maple Brokerage and Aurora Digital Assets—and renowned international exchanges. This reduces counterparty risk by routing orders through regulated entities rather than holding funds internally.
    • Low-Latency Order Routing: By co-locating servers near major exchange matching engines, Trader AI achieves average order round-trip times under 150 ms. This is critical during rapid price fluctuations when even small delays can erode profit margins.
    • Slippage Control: Users may elect “Maximum Slippage Tolerance” parameters (e.g., 0.1%–0.5% of trade size) to prevent orders from executing at disadvantageous prices. If slippage exceeds the user-defined threshold, orders are canceled automatically.

    3. Customizable Strategy Settings

    • Risk Tolerance Profiles: “Conservative,” “Moderate,” and “Aggressive” presets allow users to quickly adopt risk frameworks aligned with their goals. Conservative settings limit daily drawdown to 2% of account equity and cap leverage at 2x; moderate settings permit up to 4% drawdown and 5x leverage; aggressive settings enable up to 6% drawdown and 10x leverage (subject to brokerage approvals).
    • Asset Basket Creation: User-defined “Smart Baskets” group multiple cryptocurrencies—such as “Top 5 by Market Cap,” “Emerging DeFi Tokens,” or “Stablecoin Arbitrage.” The platform rebalances these baskets weekly based on performance, market capitalization changes, and liquidity metrics.
    • Volatility-Adaptive Stop-Loss: Stop-loss percentages are not static. Instead, they adjust proportionally to the 14-day Average True Range (ATR) and Bollinger Band expansions. For example, if the ATR for Bitcoin spikes from 2% to 4%, the stop-loss widens by 10–15% to avoid premature exit during heightened volatility.

    Join 125,000+ Traders Who’ve Unlocked Faster Withdrawals and Rock-Solid Security—Get Trader AI Now!

    4. Portfolio Diversification Engine

    • Balanced Allocation Recommendations: The AI provides suggested allocation percentages across multiple asset classes—e.g., 40% BTC, 25% ETH, 15% top-10 altcoins, and 20% stablecoins—based on risk-adjusted performance data and user-defined risk tolerance.
    • Correlated Asset Mitigation: By monitoring correlation coefficients between assets (e.g., BTC vs. ETH correlation of 0.85), the platform can reduce overweight positions to minimize systemic exposure. When correlation exceeds 0.9, the AI recommends temporary reallocation to lower-correlation assets.
    • Automated Rebalancing: Weekly portfolio rebalancing ensures that no single asset exceeds preset maximum exposure (e.g., 25% of total equity). If an asset’s value grows beyond this cap, the system executes partial sell orders and redistributes proceeds to underweighted categories.

    5. Comprehensive Reporting and Analytics

    • Real-Time Dashboard: The homepage features live P&L, open trade positions, daily profit percentages, and drawdown statistics. A customizable graph displays historical performance, including monthly ROI comparisons against benchmark indices like the S&P 500 and TSX Composite.
    • Sharpe Ratio & Sortino Ratio: Users can view risk-adjusted performance metrics to gauge risk efficiency. A Sharpe Ratio above 1.5 is highlighted in green, indicating favorable risk-adjusted returns. Sortino Ratio (which penalizes downside volatility) is also displayed for more precise risk assessment.
    • Trade History: A searchable log details each executed trade (entry price, exit price, timestamp, P&L, SQS). Users can filter by asset, date range, or trade outcome (win/loss). CSV export functionality enables further analysis in external tools.

    6. Security and Data Protection

    • SSL Encryption & Data Integrity: All data in transit is encrypted via AES 256-bit SSL/TLS protocols. Sensitive user information—such as login credentials and payment details—resides in encrypted databases with advanced hashing (bcrypt) and tokenization methods.
    • Two-Factor Authentication (2FA): Upon login, users must input their password followed by a one-time code generated through an authenticator app (e.g., Google Authenticator) or delivered via SMS. This two-tier verification effectively prevents unauthorized access, even if credentials are compromised.
    • Third-Party Security Audits: Leading cybersecurity firms—such as CanSecWest Security—conduct quarterly penetration tests and codebase reviews. Summary reports are shared with the Canadian Office of the Privacy Commissioner to demonstrate ongoing compliance with PIPEDA.
    • Data Residency: All Canadian user data is stored on servers located within Canada, ensuring compliance with provincial data sovereignty regulations. Backups occur daily and are encrypted with unique user-specific keys.

    Be Part of the AI Revolution—Download Trader Ai and Watch Your Portfolio Soar!

    7. Transparent Fee Structure

    • No Subscription Fees: Trader AI does not charge recurring platform fees—traders benefit from a zero-cost software model.
    • Embedded Spread-Only Costs: All trading costs are embedded in exchange spreads. For example:
      • BTC–USD: Typical spread between 0.10% and 0.20%.
      • ETH–USD: Typical spread between 0.12% and 0.22%.
      • Top Altcoins (e.g., LINK, DOT): Spreads between 0.20% and 0.40%.
    • Withdrawal Fees:
      • Interac e-Transfer (≤ CAD 1,000): Flat CAD 20 fee.
      • Interac e-Transfer (> CAD 1,000): No fee.
      • Wire Transfers: CAD 30 processing fee (waivable for account balances > CAD 10,000).
    • Currency Conversion Markup: For trades executed in USD or other foreign currencies, a transparent 0.25% conversion margin is applied—visibly displayed on the funding page prior to transaction confirmation.

    Unlock VIP-Caliber Trading Power—Visit Trader AI app and Level Up Your Game!

    Localized Support and Educational Initiatives

    Trader AI’s success in Canada is rooted in its investment in region-specific support and educational resources. Recognizing that regulatory requirements and tax implications for cryptocurrencies vary significantly from country to country, the platform has implemented multiple initiatives to guide Canadian users.

    1. Multi-Channel Customer Support

    • 24/7 Live Chat: Available directly on the website, live chat is staffed around the clock by bilingual (English/French) agents trained in both technical troubleshooting and Canadian regulatory guidelines.
    • Toll-Free Canadian Phone Lines: Operating daily from 8 AM to 8 PM ET, dedicated support lines (1-800-IMPATH1) ensure prompt resolution of urgent issues—ranging from account access difficulties to withdrawal queries.
    • Email Ticketing System: For non-urgent matters, users can submit support tickets via support@immediate-path.com. Average response time is 4–6 hours on weekdays; weekend requests are addressed within 12 hours.

    2. Dedicated Compliance Resources

    • Regulatory Updates Section: A rotating banner on the Trader AI homepage alerts users to any changes in Canadian crypto regulations—such as new FINTRAC reporting guidelines or provincial licensing requirements.
    • Tax Reporting Guides: Downloadable PDFs explain:
      • How to classify various transactions (spot trading, staking rewards, airdrops) for CRA reporting.
      • Strategies for netting gains and losses across multiple wallets and platforms—ensuring accurate portfolio-wide tax calculations.
    • AML & KYC Policy Disclosure: Users can review Trader AI’s anti-money-laundering protocols, including suspicious transaction reporting criteria and process flows for large withdrawals requiring enhanced due diligence.

    From Demo to Dollars: Transform Your Strategy with Trader AI High-Precision AI—Get Started Now

    Safety and Security

    As crypto regulatory framework continues to evolve, Trader AI remains committed to exceeding compliance standards and upholding the highest levels of security—minimizing risk for users and partners alike.

    1. Data Privacy and PIPEDA Compliance

    • PIPEDA-Aligned Privacy Policy: Trader AI’s privacy policy explicitly references the Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA), ensuring that Canadian user data is collected, processed, and stored in accordance with federal requirements.
    • Data Residency: All Canadian user data is housed on servers located within Canadian jurisdiction (Toronto and Montreal data centers), offering additional protection under provincial data sovereignty regulations (e.g., Ontario’s provincial data residency requirements).
    • User Rights: Canadians retain full control over personal information—users can request access, correction, or deletion of their data at any time by contacting privacy@immediate-path.com.

    2. Encryption and Infrastructure Security

    • End-to-End SSL/TLS Encryption: All data transmitted between user browsers and Trader AI’s servers is encrypted via AES 256-bit SSL/TLS protocols, preventing interception or tampering.
    • Hashed Password Storage: User passwords are stored using bcrypt with a work factor of 12, making brute-force compromises computationally infeasible.
    • Intrusion Detection & Multi-Tenant Segmentation: Network traffic is continuously scanned by an Intrusion Detection System (IDS). Each user’s trading environment resides within an isolated container, preventing cross-account data leaks or unauthorized lateral movement by attackers.

    Comparative Performance: Backtesting and Live Results

    Trader AI’s performance results—both in backtesting and real-world conditions—underscore its capability to navigate dynamic crypto landscape:

    Backtesting Overview (January 2020–December 2024)

    • Annualized Return (Conservative Settings): 45%
      • Parameters: Maximum daily drawdown capped at 2%, trades limited to 07:00–16:00 EST (peak liquidity hours), leverage ≤ 2x.
      • Historical drawdown: 12% during March 2020 “Corona Crash.”
    • Annualized Return (Moderate Settings): 70%
      • Parameters: Daily drawdown ≤ 4%, 24/7 trading, leverage ≤ 5x.
      • Historical drawdown: 18% during May 2021 “Altseason Correction.”
    • Annualized Return (Aggressive Settings): 95%
      • Parameters: Daily drawdown ≤ 6%, leverage ≤ 10x, full asset basket allocation including high-volatility DeFi tokens.
      • Historical drawdown: 25% during November 2021 “Crypto Winter II.”

    Metrics

    • Average Win Rate: 62%
    • Average Risk/Reward Ratio: 1:1.8
    • Maximum Drawdown (Conservative): 12%
    • Maximum Drawdown (Aggressive): 25%

    Asset Coverage and Diversification Strategies

    Trader AI supports a broad spectrum of digital assets, enabling traders to construct diversified portfolios that mitigate risk and capture growth across multiple sectors:

    1. Major Cryptocurrencies
      • Bitcoin (BTC): The flagship asset, receiving the highest allocation in most conservative and moderate baskets.
      • Ethereum (ETH): Backbone of decentralized finance (DeFi) and smart contracts, featured prominently.
      • Litecoin (LTC), Bitcoin Cash (BCH), Ripple (XRP), Cardano (ADA): Liquid, established altcoins available for core portfolio building.
    2. Emerging DeFi and Layer-1 Tokens
      • Polkadot (DOT), Solana (SOL), Avalanche (AVAX): Rapidly scaling networks with robust ecosystems—suitable for moderate-risk allocations.
      • Chainlink (LINK), Aave (AAVE), Uniswap (UNI): Leading DeFi and oracle solutions that often exhibit high volatility paired with substantial upside potential.
    3. Metaverse and NFT-Related Tokens
      • Decentraland (MANA), Axie Infinity (AXS), The Sandbox (SAND): Assets tied to virtual real estate and blockchain gaming—ideal for investors seeking exposure to Web3 trends.
    4. Stablecoin Pairs and Hedging Options
      • Tether (USDT), USD Coin (USDC), Dai (DAI): Trader AI’s AI can automatically rotate capital into these stablecoins when market volatility exceeds user-defined thresholds (e.g., 10% 24-hour price swing), preserving equity during short-term drawdowns.
    5. Sector-Specific Baskets
      • “Layer 1 Champions”: Allocation across BTC, ETH, DOT, SOL, AVAX.
      • “DeFi Innovators”: Allocation across LINK, AAVE, UNI, SUSHI, COMP.
      • “Metaverse Mavericks”: Allocation across MANA, AXS, SAND, FLOW.

    Trader AI Knows the Next Move—Be the First to Profit. Download and Trade Today!

    Payments, Fees, and Account Funding

    Trader AI’s commitment to transparency extends to its straightforward funding and fee model. Canadian users benefit from local payment options, minimal entry capital requirements, and no hidden subscription charges.

    1. Minimum Deposit Requirement

    • Base Capital: USD 250 (equivalent to approximately CAD 330 at current exchange rates).
    • Deposit Methods for Canadians:
      • Interac e-Transfer: Typical processing time of 1–2 business hours; no fees for deposits over CAD 1,000; flat CAD 20 fee for deposits ≤ CAD 1,000.
      • Credit/Debit Card (Visa, Mastercard): Instant processing with a daily limit of CAD 5,000 for non-verified accounts.
      • Wire Transfer: For larger capital needs (up to CAD 50,000 per transaction), processed in 1–2 business days; CAD 30 fee applies (waivable for initial deposits > CAD 10,000).
    • Currency Conversion: For trades executed on non-CAD pairs, an automatic 0.25% conversion margin is applied. Real-time mid-market exchange rates are displayed prior to transaction.

    2. Fee Structure

    • Software Access: No subscription or platform fees—Trader AI’s model is “software-free,” with all platform maintenance costs absorbed by the company.
    • Trading Costs (Embedded Spreads):
      • BTC–USD/CAD: Spreads between 0.10% and 0.20%.
      • ETH–USD/CAD: Spreads between 0.12% and 0.22%.
      • Major Altcoins: Spreads ranging from 0.20% to 0.40%.
      • Spread rates adjust dynamically based on overall market liquidity—tightening during high-liquidity periods and widening slightly during low-liquidity windows (e.g., weekends, public holidays).
    • Withdrawal Fees:
      • Interac e-Transfer (≤ CAD 1,000): Flat CAD 20.
      • Interac e-Transfer (> CAD 1,000): No fee.
      • Wire Transfer: CAD 30 (waived if account balance exceeds CAD 10,000 at time of withdrawal).
      • Credit/Debit Card Refunds: If a user funded via card and requests a refund to the same card, a 2% processing fee applies to cover issuer charges.
    • Overnight Funding Fees: If a user employs leverage (up to 10x for aggressive strategies), an overnight interest rate of 0.03% per day is applied—transparent line-item in the trade ticket before order execution.

    About Trader AI

    Trader AI Inc. is a AI-driven cryptocurrency trading solutions. Founded in 2023 by a team of quantitative analysts, data scientists, and seasoned software engineers, Trader AI’s mission is to democratize algorithmic trading—making advanced, data-driven strategies accessible to investors of all experience levels.

    Key Facts:

    • Established: 2023
    • Core Product: AI-powered crypto trading robot with automated and manual trading modes
    • Target Market: Crypto investors, ranging from first-time traders to institutional participants
    • Regulatory Partners: Maple Brokerage (Ontario), Victory Crypto (British Columbia)—both FINTRAC-registered

    Company Vision: Trader AI seeks to empower Canadians by providing state-of-the-art AI trading tools under a fully compliant, transparent framework. By combining deep learning, robust risk management, and localized support, Trader AI aims to elevate Canada as a global hub for safe, responsible cryptocurrency trading.

    Conclusion

    Trader AI stands at the forefront of AI-driven cryptocurrency trading, combining cutting-edge machine learning, rigorous risk management, and a deep commitment to regulatory compliance. For both newcomers and seasoned traders, the platform offers a streamlined onboarding process, transparent fee structures, and a robust suite of tools designed to optimize performance while safeguarding capital. All users benefit from local payment integrations, bilingual support, and educational resources that demystify tax reporting and compliance requirements.

    Whether you’re aiming to augment your existing strategy or take your first steps into automated crypto trading, Trader AI delivers an accessible, secure, and high-performing environment. With a proven track record of consistent returns—backed by both backtesting data and real-world results—this platform has quickly become a trusted choice for Canadian investors seeking to navigate volatile markets with confidence.

    Ready to experience the power of AI-driven trading for yourself? Sign up for a free demo account and explore Trader AI’s features with CAD 10,000 in virtual funds. When you’re ready to trade live, a minimum deposit of USD 250 (approximately CAD 330) unlocks full access to all automated and manual trading modes. Discover why thousands of Canadians are turning to Trader AI to harness smarter strategies and take control of their crypto portfolios.

    Forward-Looking Statements

    This press release contains forward-looking statements that reflect Trader AI Inc.’s expectations regarding future events, including anticipated performance, product enhancements, and regulatory developments. Forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties, and other factors that may cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed or implied. Trader AI Inc. assumes no obligation to update or revise these statements except as required by applicable law.

    Visit Here to Register on the Trader AI – Select Your Country Here!!!

    Media Contact

    Trader AI 

    50 W 4th St,
    New York, NY 10012, USA
    Email: info@traderai.ai
    Phone
    AU +61284889800
    UK +442038379676
    Website – https://traderai.ai

    General Disclaimer:
    The content provided in this article is for informational and educational purposes only. It does not constitute financial, legal, or professional advice. Readers are advised to consult a certified financial advisor, licensed loan officer, or legal professional before making any financial decisions. The information presented may not apply to every individual circumstance and is not intended to substitute professional judgment or regulatory guidance. The information provided on this website does not constitute investment advice, financial advice, trading advice, or any other sort of advice and you should not treat any of the website’s content as such. We does not recommend that any cryptocurrency should be bought, sold, or held by you. Do conduct your own due diligence and consult your financial advisor before making any investment decisions.
    Trading Disclaimer:
    Trading cryptocurrencies carries a high level of risk, and may not be suitable for all investors. Before deciding to trade cryptocurrency you should carefully consider your investment objectives, level of experience, and risk appetite. The possibility exists that you could sustain a loss of some or all of your initial investment and therefore you should not invest money that you cannot afford to lose. You should be aware of all the risks associated with cryptocurrency trading, and seek advice from an independent financial advisor. ICO’s, IEO’s, STO’s and any other form of offering will not guarantee a return on your investment.
    HIGH RISK WARNING: Dealing or Trading FX, CFDs and Cryptocurrencies is highly speculative, carries a level of non-negligible risk and may not be suitable for all investors. You may lose some or all of your invested capital, therefore you should not speculate with capital that you cannot afford to lose. Please refer to the risk disclosure below. Trader AI does not gain or lose profits based on your activity and operates as a services company. Trader AI is not a financial services firm and is not eligible of providing financial advice. Therefore, Trader AI shall not be liable for any losses occurred via or in relation to this informational website.
    SITE RISK DISCLOSURE: Trader AI does not accept any liability for loss or damage as a result of reliance on the information contained within this website; this includes education material, price quotes and charts, and analysis. Please be aware of and seek professional advice for the risks associated with trading the financial markets; never invest more money than you can risk losing. The risks involved in FX, CFDs and Cryptocurrencies may not be suitable for all investors. Trader AI doesn’t retain responsibility for any trading losses you might face as a result of using or inferring from the data hosted on this site.
    LEGAL RESTRICTIONS: Without limiting the above mentioned provisions, you understand that laws regarding financial activities vary throughout the world, and it is your responsibility to make sure you properly comply with any law, regulation or guideline in your country of residence regarding the use of the Site. To avoid any doubt, the ability to access our Site does not necessarily mean that our Services and/or your activities through the Site are legal under the laws, regulations or directives relevant to your country of residence. It is against the law to solicit US individuals to buy and sell commodity options, even if they are called “prediction” contracts, unless they are listed for trading and traded on a CFTC-registered exchange unless legally exempt. The UK Financial Conduct Authority has issued a policy statement PS20/10, which prohibits the sale, promotion, and distribution of CFD on Crypto assets. It prohibits the dissemination of marketing materials relating to distribution of CFDs and other financial products based on
    Cryptocurrencies that addressed to UK residents. The provision of trading services involving any MiFID II financial instruments is prohibited in the EU, unless when authorized/licensed by the applicable authorities and/or regulator(s). Please note that we may receive advertising fees for users opted to open an account with our partner advertisers via advertisers websites. We have placed cookies on your computer to help improve your experience when visiting this website. You can change cookie settings on your computer at any time. Use of this website indicates your acceptance of this website. Please be advised that the names depicted on our website, including but not limited to Trader AI, are strictly for marketing and illustrative purposes. These names do not represent or imply the existence of specific entities, service providers, or any real-life individuals. Furthermore, the pictures and/or videos presented on our website are purely promotional in nature and feature professional actors. These actors are not actual users, clients, or traders, and their depictions should not be interpreted as endorsements or representations of real-life experiences. All content is intended solely for illustrative purposes and should not be construed as factual or as forming any legally binding relationship
    RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH FUTURES TRADING
    Futures transactions involve high risk. The amount of the initial margin is low compared to the value of the futures contract, so that transactions are “leveraged” or “geared”. A relatively small market movement has a proportionately larger impact on the funds that you have deposited or have to pay: this can work both for you and against you. You may experience the total loss of the initial margin funds as well as any additional funds deposited in the system. If the market develops in a way that is contrary to your position or if margins are increased, you may be asked to pay significant additional funds at short notice to maintain your position. In this case it may also happen that your broker account is in the red and you thus have to make payments beyond the initial investment.
    RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH ELECTRONIC TRADING
    Before you begin carrying out transactions with an electronic system, you should carefully review the rules and provisions of the stock exchange offering the system, or of the financial instruments listed that you intend to trade, as well as your broker’s conditions. Online trading has inherent risks due to system responses/reaction times and access times that may vary due to market conditions, system performance and other factors, and on which you have no influence. You should be aware of these additional risks in electronic trading before you carry out investment transactions.
    Accuracy Disclaimer:
    All information included in this article is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate at the time of writing. However, no representations or warranties are made regarding the completeness, accuracy, reliability, or timeliness of any information presented. Any reliance placed on such information is strictly at the reader’s own risk. The publisher does not accept responsibility for typographical errors, outdated information, or changes to products, terms, or policies after publication.
    Regulatory and Jurisdictional Disclaimer:
    Lending laws vary by jurisdiction, and not all services described in this article may be available in every state or region. It is the responsibility of the reader to understand and comply with local laws and regulations. The platforms mentioned are independently operated and are not controlled or endorsed by the publisher.
    Third-Party Liability Waiver:
    The publisher, its writers, editors, affiliates, and syndication partners shall not be held liable for any direct or indirect loss, damages, or legal claims arising from the use of this content or from reliance on any third-party services, platforms, or products mentioned herein. All loan agreements, terms, and disputes are strictly between the borrower and the lender or service provider.
    Syndication Partner Use:
    This content may be republished or syndicated by authorized partners under existing licensing or distribution arrangements. All syndication partners are free from liability regarding the editorial stance, financial suggestions, or any user outcome resulting from the reading or application of this content.

    Attachment

    The MIL Network –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Submissions: As Mexico’s LGBTQ+ community battles for inclusion, two drag performers have become internet stars – with more than 2 million TikTok followers

    Source: The Conversation – USA (2) – By Francisco Tijerina, PhD Candidate in Hispanic Studies, Washington University in St. Louis

    Turbulence Queen, left, and Burrita Burrona perform at the Mexico City Pride Parade in June 2024. Jaime Nogales/Medios y Media via Getty Images News

    In January 2022, Erick Martínez, also known as Turbulence Queen, introduced a guest on his YouTube channel: Ivan “Momo” Guzmán, with the stage name Burrita Burrona, a drag performer wearing a cartoonish donkey costume topped by a wig.

    During their interview, Turbulence and Burrita shared stories, gossiped and threw shade at Mexican actors, newscasters and performers. Soon after, their careers took off.

    Before Burrita’s first appearance, Turbulence’s YouTube channel had fewer than 5,000 subscribers. Now, after the rebranding of the show to include Burrita’s name, their channel has about 375,000. More than 2 million subscribe to them on TikTok – Turbulence, with 600,000 followers and 16 million likes; Burrita with 1.5 million followers and 28 million likes. Their “El Podcast del Momento” has more than 225,000 subscribers.

    The two proved so popular that corporate sponsors started getting in on the action. Soriana, a large supermarket chain in Mexico, splashed their images on a line of cakes. Netflix Latin America had them hosting a series of videos promoting its new South Korean dramas. The media giant Televisa included Turbulence and Burrita as part of their comedic coverage of the 2024 Paris Olympics.

    Over the past 3 ½ years, the YouTube show has added some new characters, including Burrita’s mom and an on-and-off love interest, a butch lesbian wolf. Along with the interviews, the characters do comedic cooking segments and sketches. Even in today’s fragmented and cluttered media environment, the program regularly gets around 250,000 views, with some episodes reaching more than 1 million.

    While drag performers are not new in Mexico, Burrita is something of a novelty: a drag mascot. Although long a part of Mexico’s commercial culture – mascots promote everything from soccer teams to pharmacies and are a staple at children’s birthday parties – Burrita is the first to do it in drag.

    A clip from an episode of ‘El Podcast del Momento.’

    Discrimination and violence

    As a Mexican scholar who specializes in the study of gender and sexuality, I’m struck by how these LGBTQ+ characters have become enormously popular in what I consider a relatively conservative and deeply religious country. However, that too is changing: Today’s Mexico is sometimes called a conservative country with liberal laws. Still, in a country where about 5% of the population self-identify as LGBTQ+, the battle for inclusion – and more diverse representation of gender and sexuality – is far from over.

    In 2023, conservative groups pressured the International Book Fair of Monterrey to cancel a public short-story reading by drag queens. In 2024, a social media influencer’s misogynistic, homophobic and transphobic remarks ran live on national television. Also in 2024, San Nicolás de los Garza, a city of more than 400,000 people, banned public performances by drag queens. Ironically, San Nicolás is in the state of Nuevo Leon, which has one of the largest LGBTQ+ populations in Mexico.

    Indeed, national policies protecting the LGBTQ+ community don’t always apply equally; some states are more restrictive than others. For example, although Mexico’s Supreme Court legalized same-sex marriage in 2015, three states have yet to ratify it in their state constitutions.

    Turbulence Queen is interviewed on local TV at a 2023 red carpet event in Mexico.
    Jaime Nogales/Medios y Media via Getty Images Entertainment

    In May 2025, Mexico’s National Institute of Statistics and Geography reported these findings: 60% of the LGBTQ+ community say they’ve been subjected to some form of violence. Nearly 30% have had suicidal thoughts or have attempted suicide. Just over 37% say they experienced some form of discrimination during the past year. From 2020 to 2025, 25% said they were denied access to health care, education or social support. Hate crimes are on the rise, with 672 reported over a five-year period, including 141 in 2024, a significant jump from the 92 reported in 2023. The 2024 statistic includes 55 murders of transgender women.

    Taking off the mask

    Turbulence and Burrita’s swift success is impressive, but not all LGBTQ+ citizens in Mexico enjoy the same level of recognition and privilege. And as the fight for equal treatment continues, the country’s politics over the past decade has shifted. In 2018, leftist Andrés Manuel López Obrador was elected president. His successor, Claudia Sheinbaum, a climate scientist and a close ally of López Obrador’s, was elected in 2024.

    But although both López Obrador and Sheinbaum are more progressive than previous administrations, neither has been particularly vocal about their support for the LGBTQ+ community. For instance: Although Sheinbaum, Mexico’s first female and Jewish president, mentioned her support for the LGBTQ+ community during her campaign, she has largely ignored LGBTQ+ issues since taking office.

    Until recently, there were few openly LGBTQ+ people pitching products or appearing on television. But Guzmán, who’s the first mascot to perform in drag, is not hiding his sexuality, despite the costume. Rather, he can be read as a symbol of Mexico’s ongoing pursuit of equality. And perhaps his character’s visibility will allow more in the community to be able to shed their masks and come out.

    Francisco Tijerina does not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organization that would benefit from this article, and has disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    – ref. As Mexico’s LGBTQ+ community battles for inclusion, two drag performers have become internet stars – with more than 2 million TikTok followers – https://theconversation.com/as-mexicos-lgbtq-community-battles-for-inclusion-two-drag-performers-have-become-internet-stars-with-more-than-2-million-tiktok-followers-241552

    MIL OSI –

    July 25, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Africa: Nelson Mandela Bay, UNISA forge groundbreaking library partnership

    Source: Government of South Africa

    The Nelson Mandela Bay Municipality has launched a pioneering partnership with the University of South Africa (UNISA) to dramatically expand access to library services for students and the broader public within the metro.

    Launched on Tuesday at New Brighton Library, the collaboration aims to enhance educational opportunities by transforming municipal libraries into resource hubs that support both UNISA students and lifelong learners.

    Under the agreement, municipal libraries will provide free internet and computer access, designated study spaces, and serve as convenient delivery and collection points for UNISA library materials.

    Through this collaboration, the municipality’s libraries will offer internet and computer facilities, provide study spaces, and serve as convenient delivery and collection points for UNISA library materials.

    As part of the agreement, the following areas of collaboration were outlined:
    •    Reciprocal participation in annual events and programmes.
    •    ICT training and support, primarily facilitated by UNISA.
    •    Distribution of UNISA brochures, posters, and event announcements in municipal libraries, and vice versa.
    •    Free internet access and usage of electronic resources for students, including Wi-Fi, databases, electronic reserves, journals, and books.
    •    Collaboration on courier services and information dissemination.
    •    Provision of study spaces for UNISA students.
    •    Joint efforts in marketing and communication to assess student satisfaction.
    •    Collaboration on sponsorships, such as provision of computers.
    •    Sharing of reports, statistics, and information.

    Nelson Mandela Bay Municipality Executive Mayor, Babalwa Lobishe, hailed the initiative as a transformative moment for the metro’s education agenda.

    “We are not only opening library doors, but we are opening pathways to opportunity, to education, and to a better future for all. By extending the access to knowledge and technology, especially in our undeserved communities, we are affirming that education is the foundation of dignity, progress, and equality. This fits well in our efforts to build a people-centred and inclusive metro,” Lobishe said.

    UNISA Executive Director for Library Services, Professor Mpho Ngoepe echoed the mayor’s sentiments, saying the initiative marks the beginning of a journey and contributing to closing the inequality gap that leads to poverty, through knowledge and empowerment.

    “In this digital era, libraries must take intentional steps to reach users where they are. We are moving towards a time when UNISA library services will be accessible to everyone, including those who are not enrolled with UNISA.

    “This is the end of the era where universities were seen as inaccessible ivory towers. Through this partnership, we will also explore the dissemination of research outputs,” Ngoepe said.

    Member of the Mayoral Committee for Sport, Recreation, Arts and Culture, Sinesipho Kwatsha, emphasised the broader social impact of the initiative.

    “This partnership is about more than logistics, it is a social contract and a clear commitment that every learner matters, “no matter where they come from. Through this collaboration, learners from disadvantaged communities, who might not otherwise have access to conducive learning spaces and resources, will now be supported through our network of municipal libraries across the metro,” Kwatsha said. – SAnews.gov.za
     

    MIL OSI Africa –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-Evening Report: Reserve Bank says unemployment rise was not a shock, inflation on track

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By John Hawkins, Head, Canberra School of Government, University of Canberra

    Reserve Bank Governor Michele Bullock has fleshed out the central bank’s thinking behind its surprise decision to keep interest rates on hold this month.

    In a speech today to the Anika Foundation, Bullock said there has been:

    meaningful progress in bringing inflation down.

    But the Reserve Bank is waiting for confirmation that underlying inflation has actually moved back towards the mid-point of its 2% to 3% target band:

    We still think it will show inflation declining slowly towards 2.5%, but we are looking for data to support this expectation.

    The governor was pleased to see the progress on inflation did not come at the cost of jobs growth. Employment has remained around an all-time high as a proportion of the population. Comparable countries have not managed as well as this.

    The Reserve Bank has cut interest rates twice this year, and said policy is leaning towards further cuts by the end of the year.

    The dual mandate

    The Reserve Bank’s 2-3% inflation target is well known. But it is not the sole focus of policymakers. The bank actually has a dual mandate of inflation and employment, which was the topic of Bullock’s annual speech to Sydney’s financial community.

    The Reserve Bank Act charges the bank’s monetary policy board with setting monetary policy:

    in a way that, in the Board’s opinion, best contributes to:

    (i) price stability in Australia; and

    (ii) the maintenance of full employment in Australia.

    Full employment has been enshrined in legislation as a goal of the central bank since the 1940s.

    Last week, the monthly employment report unexpectedly showed a jump in unemployment to 4.3% in June after five months as 4.1% as more people looked for work.

    In her speech, Bullock said while some of the coverage suggested the increase was a shock, the employment figures over the whole of the June quarter were in line with the bank’s forecasts.

    She did not think it would have meant a different decision at the last board meeting if it had been known then.

    Are the twin goals in conflict or complementary?

    Some other central banks, such as the US Federal Reserve, also have dual mandates.

    In the long run, there is no conflict between these goals. In the governor’s words:

    Low and stable inflation – or price stability – is a prerequisite for strong and sustainable employment growth because it creates favourable conditions for households and businesses to plan, invest and create jobs without having to worry about inflation.

    Even in the short run, the two goals often involve no conflict. When the economy is overheating, inflation is high and unemployment low, so it is clear interest rates should be raised. During a recession, inflation is low and unemployment high, so it is clear interest rates should be lowered.

    But there are times when the implications from the two goals clash. A surge in oil prices, for example, could lead to both higher inflation (suggesting interest rates should be raised) and weaker economic activity (suggesting interest rates should be lowered).

    The governor said the bank’s response may depend on the likely longevity of such a shock:

    If a supply disruption is temporary and modest, monetary policy should mostly ‘look through’ it. Raising interest rates makes little sense if inflation is expected to ease once temporary supply disruptions are resolved – it would only weaken the job market.

    By contrast, when a supply shock is likely to have a longer lasting effect on the economy and inflation there may be stronger grounds for monetary policy to respond.

    The outlook

    In its latest published forecasts, in May, the bank said that if, as markets expected, it lowers its cash rate target to 3.4% by the end of the year, then unemployment would rise marginally, to 4.3%, while its preferred measure of underlying inflation drops to 2.6%.

    The Reserve Bank will release its updated forecasts after its next policy meeting on August 12, when it is also expected to cut interest rates.

    Better monthly inflation data on the way

    The Reserve Bank governor has made clear she regards the quarterly inflation series as a better guide than the current monthly series. At her May press conference she said:

    We get four readings on inflation a year.

    The Australian Bureau of Statistics has announced it is upgrading the monthly consumer price index (CPI) with effect from the October 2025 reading. It will then have the same coverage as the current quarterly CPI. But it will still be a more volatile measure than the quarterly.

    The bank will go through a learning experience becoming familiar with the new monthly series.




    Read more:
    Australia’s inflation rate is to go monthly. Be careful what you wish for


    John Hawkins was formerly a senior economist at the Reserve Bank.

    – ref. Reserve Bank says unemployment rise was not a shock, inflation on track – https://theconversation.com/reserve-bank-says-unemployment-rise-was-not-a-shock-inflation-on-track-261759

    MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Asia-Pac: Waste Generation Rate Continues To Trend Downwards In 2024

    Source: Government of Singapore

    Per capita daily domestic waste decreased by more than 20 per cent over the past decade; per billion dollar GDP daily non-domestic waste decreased by more 30 per cent over the same period. The recycling rate continues to hover around 50 per cent. 

    Singapore, 23 July 2025 – Singapore continued to see a decrease in waste generation rate in 2024. The daily domestic waste generated per capita decreased from 0.88 kg in 2023 to 0.85 kg in 2024. The daily non-domestic waste  generated per billion dollar Gross Domestic Product (GDP) decreased from around 25 tonnes in 2023 to around 23 tonnes in 2024. This reflects the sustained reduction and reuse efforts by households and businesses in 2024.

    Per capita and per billion dollar GDP waste generated decreased in past decade

    2          Over the past decade, daily domestic waste generated per capita decreased by more than 20 per cent, and daily non-domestic waste generated per billion dollar GDP decreased by more than 30 per cent.

    Fig. 1. Chart on the daily domestic waste generated per capita from 2014 to 2024.

    Fig. 2. Chart on the daily non-domestic waste generated per billion dollar GDP from 2014 to 2024.

    Recycling rate continues to hover at around 50 per cent

    3          Overall recycling rate continues to hover at around 50 per cent (refer to Table 1 in 

    Annex). The recycling rate of paper/cardboard, food, and plastics remained similar. The slight reduction in recycling rate is driven largely by the reduction in the amount of Construction & Demolition (C&D) waste (by 122,000 tonnes) and used slag (by 63,000 tonnes) generated, which are almost completely recycled. This resulted in a corresponding reduction in overall recycling volume. Additionally, there was a reduction in the amount of wood waste recycled, by 49,000 tonnes, due to a short-term reduction in wood waste processing capacity in 2024 as a result of the closure of one biomass plant and prolonged maintenance of another.

    10-year Recycling Trends

    4          Over the past decade, the recycling rate dropped from 60 per cent in 2014 to 50 per cent in 2024 (refer to Table 2 in Annex). This is driven by two factors.

    a.     There was a 44 per cent and 69 per cent decrease in the volume of C&D waste and used slag generation, respectively. As C&D waste and used slag are almost fully recycled, the decrease in volume generated and consequently recycled led to a significant reduction (7 percentage points) in the overall recycling rate (refer to Chart 1 and Chart 2 in Annex). This is due to the reduction in C&D waste volume generated from demolition projects in recent years, while the lower amount of used slag generated is due to a reduction in steel smelting activities in Singapore. 

    b.     The amount of paper/cardboard waste generated has been similar between 2014 and 2024, although paper waste generated had been on a downtrend from 2014 to 2019, before rising again post-2019 driven in part by e-commerce packaging. However, there has been a steep reduction in the paper recycling rate, from 52 per cent to 32 per cent (refer to Chart 3 in Annex). The decline is driven by factors such as the cost of collecting and freight as well as commodity prices.

    Upcoming efforts to improve recycling of key waste streams

    5          NEA will continue to partner the community and businesses to encourage the reduction of waste generated and to increase recycling efforts. Our efforts will be focused on food, paper, and plastics as these make up the largest amount of waste that is not recycled.

    a.     The recycling rate for food waste increased from 13 per cent in 2014 to 18 per cent in 2024. To drive the reduction and recycling of food waste, all new large commercial and industrial food waste generators have been required since March 2024 to segregate, treat and report their food waste. In addition, we will progressively extend these requirements to existing large commercial and industrial food waste generators in tandem when the Food Waste Treatment Facility becomes operational, as we progressively complete the Integrated Waste Management Facility (IWMF) from 2027 onwards.

    b.     To encourage reduction in paper/cardboard waste and improve recycling rates, NEA supported the development of a set of Guidelines on Sustainable E-commerce Packaging in March 2025. The guidelines offer practical 3R (Reduce, Reuse, Recycle) strategies tailored to common types of e-commerce packaging, including cardboard boxes. Furthermore, NEA is looking to strengthen support for paper recycling, working together with waste collectors, recycling companies, and the community.

    c.     We will also increase plastic recycling through initiatives such as the beverage container return scheme, which will take effect next year. Under the scheme, a 10-cent deposit will be fully refunded when consumers return the empty beverage containers at designated return points such as reverse vending machines. The scheme will aggregate clean and high-quality plastic recyclables, which can be made into new products. NEA is working with the licensed scheme operator, Beverage Container Return Scheme Ltd. (BCRS Ltd.) on the return point network and deposit refund options to provide a convenient return and refund journey for consumers, when the scheme rolls out on 1 April 2026.

    Waste Disposed of

    6          Our combined commitment to reducing the amount of waste generated and improving recycling efforts is reflected in the waste disposed of at our waste-to-energy plants and Semakau Landfill. While the waste disposal rate has similarly trended downwards in the last decade, the total amount of waste disposed of has increased from 3.04 million tonnes in 2014 to 3.33 million tonnes in 2024. This is due to the recycling amount declining faster than the total amount of waste generated. Hence, the net effect is an increase in the total amount of waste disposed of. When everyone plays their part to reduce, reuse, and recycle, we avoid sending waste for disposal, thus reducing our environmental footprint and extending the lifespan of Semakau Landfill.

    7          The latest waste and recycling statistics can be accessed at go.gov.sg/waste-statistics-and-overall-recycling.

     

    ——————

    [1] Domestic waste is waste collected from households and trade premises (e.g., shophouses, educational institutions, petrol stations, hawker centres and places of worship).

    [2] Non-domestic waste is waste generated at industrial and commercial premises.

     

    ~~ End ~~

    For more information, please submit your enquiries electronically via the Online Feedback Form or myENV mobile application.

     

    MIL OSI Asia Pacific News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-Evening Report: Jet ski accidents are tragic but preventable. Here’s how to reduce the risk

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Milad Haghani, Associate Professor & Principal Fellow in Urban Risk & Resilience, The University of Melbourne

    Richard Hamilton Smith/Getty

    Two teenage boys were thrown from a jet ski during a ride on the Georges River in Sydney’s south this week. One died at the scene. The other lost an arm, and was rushed to hospital in a serious condition.

    The exact cause of the crash is being investigated and a report will be prepared for the coroner.

    Sadly, this tragic incident is not isolated. While fatal jet ski crashes are relatively rare, serious injuries are not.

    Here’s what we know about jet ski accidents, who’s at risk, and how to prevent them.

    Jet skis are now more common

    Jet skis have become a familiar sight on Australian waterways, with sales peaking during the early years of the COVID pandemic. There are now almost 100,000 registered jet skis nationwide.

    So what was once a niche summer thrill has become a more mainstream recreational activity, particularly for young Australians.

    As the number of jet skis on our waterways grows, so too will the risks.

    How often do accidents happen?

    Most jet ski crashes occur in daylight hours, are twice as likely on weekends, and tend to spike during warmer months. Injuries typically happen close to shore (often within 50 metres) where crowded conditions increase the risk of colliding with other vessels, swimmers or fixed obstacles.

    Fatal jet ski accidents in Australia have claimed the lives of riders, passengers, swimmers and kayakers.

    Across New South Wales, Queensland and Victoria, there are up to three deaths per 100,000 licence holders. There are an estimated 19–26 serious injuries per 100,000 licence holders, depending on the state.

    But these figures likely understate the true picture as many non-fatal injuries go unreported unless hospitalised.

    For example, data from research sponsored by the United States Coast Guard suggest that for every moderate injury captured in accident reports, more than 30 actually occur. For every severe injury, it’s likely 1.65 actually occur.

    Who is at risk?

    Global jet ski statistics indicate about 85% of jet ski injuries involve male riders.

    Risk-taking behaviour and being an inexperienced rider are also risk factors, with young adults dominating injury statistics.

    One review found about 60% of jet ski crashes involved the rider drinking alcohol.

    What types of injuries?

    Recreational riders often typically travel at 60–80 kilometres per hour. But these machines can reach speeds above 100km/h. This can generate immense force in the event of a collision.

    In a crash, riders are ejected from the jet ski or collide directly with water, the craft, another vessel or fixed objects. So the leading causes of death and serious injury on jet skis are from these traumatic impacts.

    A study from a US trauma centre looked at 127 people injured in jet ski incidents and found most injuries involved broken bones. The legs were most commonly affected, followed by arms, spine and hips.

    Hitting the handlebars was a major cause of open fractures (when a broken bone pierces the skin), some of which later became infected.

    Women and children face particular risks

    However, there is a distinct and concerning injury pattern for female passengers.

    Women riding on the back of a jet ski (as a passenger) are especially at risk of serious injuries to the genital and anal area. This can happen if they fall off backwards and land directly on the powerful stream of water coming from the jet nozzle.

    Case reports describe incidents of vaginal lacerations, rectal injuries and pelvic floor damage. Such injuries are rare but can be devastating and life-threatening. Sometimes there are permanent complications, such as the risk of infertility or incontinence.

    Children also face unique and often severe risks. A US study looked at 66 children hospitalised in jet ski accidents. It found most were boys with the average age of around 12 years old, and nearly three-quarters operated the jet ski themselves. About 70% of injuries involved collisions with another vessel or object. Four children died, all from head trauma after crashing into stationary objects. More than 40% were left with some degree of disability.

    What now?

    The risks from jet skis are real and too often underestimated. But many injuries can be prevented:

    • we need public education campaigns to remind riders of the risks and to promote better behaviour. This would remind riders to slow down in congested areas, avoid reckless turns, and be especially careful with passengers. As alcohol is a common factor in crashes, drinking in moderation before riding should also be stressed

    • women are recommended to wear neoprene protective shorts, or wetsuits, instead of ordinary swimwear. A growing number of medical professionals are now backing this as essential safety gear, not optional, to reduce the risk of perineal injuries from water jets

    • manufacturers can redesign handlebars to reduce the severity of impact injuries. They can also build in safeguards that reduce jet pressure when no one is seated at the rear (to safeguard the health of a passenger who falls off backwards)

    • states also need consistent rules on minimum rider age, training and licensing. The laws vary widely. These inconsistent regulations create confusion and loopholes, especially when riders cross borders.

    The authors do not work for, consult, own shares in or receive funding from any company or organisation that would benefit from this article, and have disclosed no relevant affiliations beyond their academic appointment.

    – ref. Jet ski accidents are tragic but preventable. Here’s how to reduce the risk – https://theconversation.com/jet-ski-accidents-are-tragic-but-preventable-heres-how-to-reduce-the-risk-261746

    MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI USA: Senator Murray, British Columbia Premier Eby, WA Small Businesses Speak Out About How Trump’s Reckless Trade War with Canada is Creating Chaos, Hurting Business, and Raising Costs

    US Senate News:

    Source: United States Senator for Washington State Patty Murray

    ICYMI: Senator Murray Hears from Mayors and Business Leaders About How Trump’s Trade War is Hurting Border Communities in Northwest Washington

    AP: Trump’s 35% Canada tariff plan deepens a rift between the neighbors

    ***WATCH HERE; DOWNLOAD HERE***

    Washington, D.C. –  Today, U.S. Senator Patty Murray (D-WA), Vice Chair of the Senate Appropriations Committee, held a virtual press conference with British Columbia Premier David Eby and Washington state business leaders to sound the alarm on how President Trump’s trade war with Canada is driving down business and creating chaos for families, small businesses, and economies on both sides of the border.

    Canada is the second-largest export market for Washington state, exporting $7.9 billion in goods and $2.2 billion in services annually. Washington state imports $17.8 billion in goods from Canada each year, with energy imports accounting for 54 percent of that total. 608 Canadian-owned companies employ 25,050 workers in Washington state. Canada is also the largest source of international visitors to the U.S., accounting for 20.4 million visits and $20.5 billion in spending in 2024. The Bureau of Transportation Statistics reported a 35 percent drop in border crossings into the U.S. through the Peace Arch and Pacific Highway Crossings in Washington state this May, compared to the same month last year. Additional data on trade between Washington state and Canada is available HERE.  

    President Trump recently announced a plan to impose 35 percent tariffs across-the-board on imports from Canada beginning August 1st. This comes after Trump has already applied 50 percent tariffs on steel and aluminum—of which Canada is the largest exporter to the United States—and 25 percent duties on cars, excluding U.S. made parts. Yesterday, after a meeting with Canada’s political leaders—including Premier Eby—Prime Minister Mark Carney downplayed the chances of success in talks aimed at reaching a trade deal with President Trump.

    “Canada isn’t just a trading partner for us—it is our ally, and they are our neighbor. We have friends, and families that span that northern border. We have supply lines and businesses that depend on the open flow of trade, tourism, and goodwill between our countries,” Senator Murray said at the press conference today. “Canada is one of our largest trading partners—accounting for, every year, nearly $8 billion in exports including our seafood, apples, and airplane parts and more than $2 billion in cross-border tourism and business. Not to mention we actually import nearly $18 billion in goods from Canada each year. So, for us, having Trump throw a tantrum with these tariffs is really throwing a wrench into our businesses that have operated for decades, and throwing communities on both sides of the border into chaos, and really throwing our neighborly way of life into jeopardy.”

    “Here’s what Trump needs to understand: this is not reality TV. It is actual reality,” Senator Murray continued. “These aren’t people playing ‘businessman’—they are trying to run actual businesses, that employ actual Americans. Unlike him, they don’t thrive on outrage. And they do not want any drama, they need certainty, they need common sense. And they need policies that bring in customers, not drive them away, and bring prices down, not drive them up. So, I want you all to know I am going to keep fighting in Congress to put an end to these pointless tariffs that are making life harder for people on both sides of our border. And I will keep pushing for legislation to reassert Congress’s power over tariff policy. It is beyond clear we cannot entrust this responsibility to a President who is toggling economic policies on and off like a kid with a joystick.”

    “We have a long and happy relationship with the American people; they’re our friends, our family members and coworkers. President Trump’s actions have broken our trust with his government, but they’ll never shake our relationship with our closest neighbours. I am grateful for Senator Murray’s leadership at this time in calling out a President that ran on an affordability agenda and is now bringing in tariffs that are raising the price of everyday goods for hard working families,” said David Eby, Premier of British Columbia.  

    “President Trump seems to have created the 51st state that he was talking about, which is the great state of uncertainty. And this is affecting all of us and that we predict that in 2025 alone, that tariffs will cost SEL $100 million in unanticipated federal taxes. These $100 million, divided by our 7000 owners, is a hit of $14,000 per employee around the world. And I agree so much with Senator Murray that the best thing we can do is to support the efforts by Democrats and Republicans in both the House and the Senate to restore congressional control over tariffs and block this President and future ones from abusing executive orders, especially here in the case of free trade,” saidDr. Ed Schweitzer, founder of Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories in Pullman.

    “Maintaining good relations with our northern neighbors is paramount to our maritime industry. Along with being a key supplier for vital parts of the industry, our relations also impact negotiations, such as the Pacific Salmon Treaty being negotiated right now. These negotiations and trade rely on goodwill and good relations, and we cannot state enough how much we value our Canadian partners in all sectors of our maritime industry here in the United States,” said Dan Tucker, Executive Director of the Whatcom Working Waterfront Coalition.

    Washington state has one of the most trade-dependent economies of any state in the country, with 40 percent of jobs in the state tied to international commerce. Washington state is the top U.S. producer of apples, blueberries, hops, pears, spearmint oil, and sweet cherries—all of which risk losing vital export markets due to retaliatory tariffs from key trading partners including Canada. Additionally, more than 12,000 small and medium-sized companies in Washington state export goods and will struggle to absorb the impact of retaliatory tariffs. Trump’s tariffs during his first term were extremely costly for Washington state—for example, India imposed a 20 percent retaliatory tariff on U.S. apples, causing Washington apple shipments to India to fall by 99 percent and growers to lose hundreds of millions of dollars in exports.

    Senator Murray has been a vocal opponent of Trump’s chaotic trade war and has been constantly lifting up the voices of people in every corner of Washington state who are being harmed by this administration’s approach to trade. Senator Murray continues to call on Republicans to end Trump’s trade war—which Congress has the power to do—and take back Congress’ Constitutionally-granted power to impose tariffs. Earlier this year—among many other events—Senator Murray brought together leaders across Washington state to highlight how Trump’s ongoing trade war is already a devastating hit to Washington state’s economy, businesses, and our agriculture sector, and held a roundtable discussion in Blaine on how Trump’s chaotic trade war and senseless tariffs are specifically hurting Washington state’s border communities and local businesses. Senator Murray has also taken to the Senate floor to lay out how Trump’s chaotic trade war is seriously threatening our economy, American businesses, families’ retirement savings, and so much else.

    Senator Murray’s full remarks, as delivered, are below and video is HERE:

    “Thank you everyone for joining us today.

    “You know for a so-called businessman, President Trump doesn’t seem to know the first thing about running a business—then again, maybe that explains his six bankruptcies. But besides that, every time Trump opens his mouth, he is demonstrating that he doesn’t understand how tariffs work and doesn’t care if his absurd tax hikes are hurting our economy and our small businesses. The reality is plain as day. Especially in places like Washington state where we are on the front line of a trade war with our neighbors that nobody asked for.

    “Canada isn’t just a trading partner for us—it is our ally, and they are our neighbor. We have friends, and families that span that northern border. We have supply lines and businesses that depend on the open flow of trade, tourism, and goodwill between our countries.

    “Canada is one of our largest trading partners—accounting for, every year, nearly $8 billion in exports including our seafood, apples, and airplane parts and more than $2 billion in cross-border tourism and business. Not to mention we actually import nearly $18 billion in goods from Canada each year.  

    “So, for us, having Trump throw a tantrum with these tariffs is really throwing a wrench into our businesses that have operated for decades, and throwing communities on both sides of the border into chaos, and really throwing our neighborly way of life into jeopardy.

    “How are farmers supposed to stay afloat when Trump just jacked up the cost of the supplies they need, at the same time that he is driving some of their best customers away?

    “How are businesses and factories supposed to keep the lights on when their supply chains are being disrupted, and their inputs—like energy, and steel, and aluminum—keep getting more expensive?

    “How are hotels and towns that are fueled by tourism supposed to keep their doors open, when cancellations are going up, bookings are going down, and 75 percent of Canadian travelers who weregoing to visit the U.S. are deciding they’d now rather go somewhere the President doesn’t constantly attack?

    “So, let’s be clear, these aren’t hypothetical questions. They are the cold, hard realities Trump is forcing onto our communities. It doesn’t take much imagination to see how hard Trump’s trade war is making life for people—especially for our border communities.

    “All you have to do is listen. Talk to ferry operators, who are feeling the squeeze of reduced travel. Talk to community leaders in Bellingham and Whatcom County, where 12 percent of taxable retail sales came from Canadians. Talk to business owners in Point Roberts, which just completely depends on Canadian trade and tourism.

    “I have been telling this over and over to my colleagues and anyone who will listen. If you want to understand the real cost of what is happening, come to Washington state, talk to people on the front lines of this pointless, painful trade war.

    “And that’s exactly why we are having this call today. To put a spotlight on what we are seeing on both sides of the border; to make more of these voices heard; to raise the alarm; and maybe even offer a little economics lesson to Trump—since he appears to need it.

    “When you raise the costs for small businesses—which is exactly what tariffs do, when you drive away loyal customers, and trading partners—which is exactly what happens when you toss up barriers and toss out insults—you make life harder, and you raise costs for everyday Americans. It is very clear that President Trump wants to treat tariffs like a reality TV show, constantly playing up the outrage and the uncertainty of the ‘Will he? Won’t he?’ drama that he seems to like living in. But the questions that I am hearing when I talk to folks home in Washington state, are more like, ‘Why on Earth would he do this?’ and ‘What the heck is he thinking?’ and ‘How am I going to be able to afford this?’

    “Because here’s what Trump needs to understand: this is not reality TV. This is actual reality. These aren’t peopleplaying ‘businessman’—they are trying to run actual businesses, that employ actual Americans. Unlike him, they don’t thrive on outrage. And they do not want any drama, they need certainty, they need common sense. And they need policies that bring in customers, not drive them away, and bring prices down, not drive them up.

    “So, I want you all to know I am going to keep fighting in Congress to put an end to these pointless tariffs that are making life harder for people on both sides of our border. And I will keep pushing for legislation to reassert Congress’s power over tariff policy.

    “It is beyond clear we cannot entrust this responsibility to a President who is toggling economic policies on and off like a kid with a joystick.

    “We have got to keep talking about this, which is why we are having this call today, until more of my Republican colleagues get the message. And I thank everybody who’s participating in this today to talk about what you are seeing.

    “So, I’m joined on this call by British Columbia Premier David Eby, he will be speaking next. As I’ve told him in the past, I appreciate our relationship and thank you for working with us on this. It’s a joy to have you on this call.”

    MIL OSI USA News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI Russia: Analysis of China’s Economic Growth Drivers for the First Half of the Year

    Translation. Region: Russian Federal

    Source: People’s Republic of China in Russian – People’s Republic of China in Russian –

    An important disclaimer is at the bottom of this article.

    Source: People’s Republic of China – State Council News

    On July 15, the National Bureau of Statistics (NBS) of China released data showing that China’s gross domestic product (GDP) for the first half of 2025 was 66.0536 trillion yuan. In terms of constant prices, the year-on-year growth reached 5.3%. NBS Deputy Director Sheng Laiyun noted that since the beginning of this year, the national economy has withstood the pressure and, despite the difficulties, continues to develop steadily, accumulating new driving forces for growth and improving the circulation of economic processes.

    As the data show, in the first half of the year, the contribution of final consumption expenditure to economic growth was 52%, gross capital formation was 16.8%, and net exports of goods and services was 31.2%. Of these “three driving forces” of the economy, consumption remains the main factor in GDP growth.

    According to Wang Xiaosong, professor at the Institute of Economics at Renmin University of China, the data for the first half of the year show that the Chinese economy is developing steadily while maintaining stability, demonstrating its high resilience and potential for future growth. This is mainly due to China’s solid industrial base – both the manufacturing and service sectors have made significant progress in recent years. The indicators for the first half of the year show that added value and investment in machinery are growing rapidly, demonstrating the high resilience and potential for development of the Chinese economy. In addition, the government has taken a number of measures to stabilize growth. Both fiscal policy and targeted monetary policy have had a very positive effect.

    In the first half of the year, the consumer market continued to gain momentum, and the potential of the super-large Chinese market was steadily unleashed, demonstrating the dynamism of the Chinese economy. In terms of market sales, the total retail sales volume of consumer goods in the first half of the year was 24.55 trillion yuan, up 5% year-on-year.

    According to Qi Yunlan, deputy department director and research fellow at the Institute of Market Economy, Development Research Center of the State Council, this year, with the effective combination of policies to actively support consumption and the continued optimization of the consumption structure, the domestic consumer market has improved significantly. The trade-in program has been expanded and improved, which has stimulated the acceleration of growth in commodity consumption.

    According to statistics, in the first half of this year, China’s industrial production rapidly gained momentum, and the machinery and high-tech manufacturing industries showed good growth dynamics. The added value of machinery increased by 10.2% compared with the same period last year, and that of high-tech manufacturing by 9.5%. From January to May, the number of applications for valid invention patents in China approached 5 million, up 12.8% year-on-year.

    According to Lian Ping, chairman of the China Forum of Chief Economists and director of the Guangkai Institute of Industrial Research, the economic performance in the first six months generally exceeded market expectations, with the main feature being the release of pent-up demand and the improvement of the economic structure. Consumption growth was higher than market expectations and significantly recovered from the previous year. In addition, production and investment in the manufacturing industry showed steady positive dynamics, especially in areas related to new-quality productive forces, where the growth rate exceeded the double-digit threshold.

    In the first half of the year, the total volume of import and export trade was 21.7876 trillion yuan, up 2.9% year-on-year. Machinery exports grew by 9.5% to account for 60% of total exports.

    Qin Tai, deputy director and chief macroeconomic analyst at Huafu Securities Research Institute, said that two key factors played a decisive role in the first half of the year. First, financial subsidies for durable goods provided a significant stimulus effect. Second, China’s industrial chain, with its integrity, advanced technology and resilience, performed well.

    Sheng Laiyun said that the economy as a whole performed steadily in the first half of the year, showing positive dynamics while maintaining stability, which is a very valuable achievement. Since the beginning of this year, China has been implementing more active and effective macroeconomic policies, which has played an important role in maintaining stability. According to the instructions of the central government, relevant departments will speed up the implementation of a set of measures for the second half of the year in the near future, and they will continue to play a key role in ensuring the stable functioning of the economy.

    Please note: This information is raw content obtained directly from the source of the information. It is an accurate report of what the source claims and does not necessarily reflect the position of MIL-OSI or its clients.

    .

    MIL OSI Russia News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI USA: $36 Million for Law Enforcement to Fight Gun Violence

    Source: US State of New York

    [embedded content]

    [embedded content]

    New York State Division of Criminal Justice Services Commissioner Rossana Rosado said, “Thanks to Governor Hochul’s unwavering commitment to public safety, New York continues to see record reductions in gun violence. This funding ensures that our local law enforcement agencies and community organizations can build on the strategies that are working, saving lives, strengthening communities, and restoring trust. I am so proud of my DCJS team members who provide our partners across the state with the tools, training, and resources that allow them to sustain this progress.”

    New York State Police Superintendent Steven G. James said, “The GIVE initiative continues to produce results that matter. Thanks to Governor Hochul’s ongoing commitment and the leadership of the Division of Criminal Justice Services, law enforcement agencies across the state are better equipped to target and reduce gun violence. This funding supports the critical work being done on the ground, providing local agencies with the tools, training, and resources they need to keep their communities safe. The New York State Police is proud to support our partners in this effort and remains committed to doing everything we can to protect the people of New York.”

    Senate Majority Leader Andrea Stewart-Cousins said, “This funding is a vital investment in the safety and well-being of New Yorkers. By directing this funding to local law enforcement and public safety partners through the GIVE initiative, we are reinforcing evidence-based strategies that are driving down gun violence and saving lives. Our communities throughout the state have made tremendous progress, and this continued investment ensures that momentum continues. I was proud to work with Governor Hochul, Speaker Heastie, and my Senate Majority colleagues to deliver $347 million in this year’s budget to support GIVE and other gun violence prevention efforts across the state.”

    State Senator Monica Martinez said, “When it comes to protecting our streets from gun violence, we must ‘GIVE’ law enforcement agencies the funding they need to succeed. These grants help make Suffolk County and other recipient communities safer, as proven by the double-digit declines in shooting-related incidents with injury and shooting deaths. I thank Governor Hochul and the Division of Criminal Justice Services for prioritizing this investment in safer neighborhoods across New York.”

    State Senator Siela Bynoe said, “Gun violence is a public health crisis in New York State, and I am grateful to Governor Hochul for taking action to reduce the number of individuals injured or killed in this epidemic. Community-based solutions like the GIVE initiative, which supports Nassau’s law enforcement in their mission to combat gun violence in our neighborhoods, are critical to maintaining statewide progress in reducing shooting incidents. While Nassau County has an extraordinary safety record, there is more work to be done, and this initiative proves to be an invaluable resource.”

    Assembly Deputy Speaker Phil Ramos said, “New York continues to lead the nation with bold, innovative strategies that combine precision policing with community-driven public safety. This record-level investment of $36 million underscores our state’s unwavering commitment to real solutions to reduce gun violence. This investment builds on the progress New York has made in saving lives, curbing illegal firearms, and empowering the communities we serve. As a former Detective and Police Officer, I’ve seen firsthand how funds like these provide the necessary resources, focused training, modern technology, and data-driven strategies that produce tangible, measurable results. The numbers speak for themselves: fewer shootings, fewer victims, and safer communities. I commend Governor Hochul for her continued partnership and leadership in ensuring that Long Island and New York State continue to be a safe and prosperous places to live, work, and visit.”

    Assemblymember Charles Lavine said, “Since being sworn-in, Governor Hochul has remained laser-focused on fighting crime through all means at her disposal. This includes providing financial support for local law enforcement to ensure it has the necessary resources to do its job and enacting legislation, like my ghost guns bill, designed to keep dangerous firearms off the streets. I am proud of the great progress made so far and look forward to continuing to work with her to prevent senseless violence from occurring and keeping our communities as safe as possible.”

    Public safety is my top priority, and since taking office, my administration has been laser focused on working with local law enforcement to drive down gun violence across New York.”

    Governor Hochul

    Assemblymember Judy Griffin said, “Reducing gun violence is directly linked to public safety. I am proud to live in a state where our constituents know this and demand that we continue to take action. This vital funding will ensure that our local police departments have the equipment and technical assistance needed to continue their fight. Public safety is a top priority for my constituents, and I thank the Governor for designating a portion of this funding to police agencies that serve Nassau County residents.”

    Assemblymember Rebecca Kassay said, “Thank you to Governor Hochul for these funds that will provide essential support to our local law enforcement as they work to reduce gun violence, and strengthen safety in our neighborhood. State investments like the GIVE initiative help ensure officers have the training and tools they need to stay safe, protect the public, and build trust within the community.”

    Assemblymember Tommy John Schiavoni said, “I would like to thank Governor Hochul for her leadership and steadfast commitment to keeping our communities safe. Governor Hochul’s continued investment in the GIVE initiative is saving lives and making our communities safer. This targeted support for law enforcement and evidence-based violence prevention strategies has produced real, measurable results. I am especially grateful for the funding directed to Long Island, where local agencies are working tirelessly to reduce gun violence and improve public safety for all residents.”

    Assemblymember Kwani O’Pharrow said, “Together, we invest in safer streets and stronger communities as we tackle gun violence head on with unwavering support and commitment from our Governor.”

    Suffolk County Executive Ed Romaine said, “Thank you to Governor Hochul for providing Suffolk County with vital resources to address gun violence and domestic abuse in our communities. These grants help ensure that our law enforcement officers have the tools they need to protect our families, support survivors, and build safer neighborhoods for everyone who calls Suffolk home.”

    Suffolk County Police Department Commissioner Kevin Catalina said, “The grant money builds upon our success in fighting gun violence, providing funds to focus on enforcement and community outreach efforts. The SCPD extends our gratitude to Governor Hochul for the GIVE grant funding which enhances our public safety efforts in Suffolk County.”

    Embedded Flickr Album

    Suffolk County Sheriff Errol D. Toulon, Jr. said, “The GIVE grant has been a critical tool in our efforts to reduce gun violence by funding key personnel and supporting programs that reach at-risk youth before trouble does. This is what real collaboration looks like, and we’re proud to continue this vital work together. I want to thank Governor Hochul for her investment in this initiative to help keep Suffolk County and our communities safe.”

    Suffolk County Legislator Rebecca Sanin said, “It is devastating and unacceptable that gun violence is still the leading cause of death for children in the United States. I deeply commend the Governor for taking action—investing in law enforcement and delivering the tools our county needs to safeguard our children. Today marks a significant step forward in our fight to keep our kids safer in Suffolk County, ensuring that their future is not defined by the fear of violence but rather the promise of hope and possibility.”

    Scott J. Beigel Memorial Fund Founder Linda Beigel Schulman said, “I thank Governor Hochul for her visit to Suffolk County and her steadfast support to prevent gun violence. I worked closely with her to make red flag laws in New York a reality. Her commitment to better funding for community policing is crucial to deterring crime. We must always do more, and I know the governor is committed to progress.”

    GIVE data for each of the 28 police departments and an interactive dashboard featuring current year and annual historical data are available on the Statistics page of the state Division of Criminal Justice Services (DCJS) website.

    View the breakdown of funding awarded to GIVE police departments, and district attorneys’ offices, probation departments, and sheriffs’ offices in 21 counties outside of New York City for the contract period July 1, 2025, through June 30, 2026: Albany, Broome, Cayuga, Chautauqua, Chemung, Dutchess, Erie, Jefferson, Monroe, Nassau, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga, Orange, Rensselaer, Rockland, Schenectady, Suffolk, Tompkins, Ulster, and Westchester. DCJS administers GIVE grants and provides training and technical assistance to partner agencies through the program, which requires agencies to use evidence-based strategies to reduce shootings, save lives and combat violent crime.

    The FY26 Enacted Budget sustained unprecedented funding secured by Governor Hochul, including $347 million for GIVE and other gun violence prevention programs, as well as additional initiatives to improve public safety, expand support for victims and survivors of crime, and strengthen communities.

    The Division of Criminal Justice Services provides critical support to all facets of the state’s criminal justice system, including, but not limited to: training law enforcement and other criminal justice professionals; overseeing a law enforcement accreditation program; ensuring Breathalyzer and speed enforcement equipment used by local law enforcement operate correctly; managing criminal justice grant funding; analyzing statewide crime and program data; providing research support; overseeing county probation departments and alternatives to incarceration programs; and coordinating youth justice policy. Follow DCJS on Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn and X (formerly Twitter).

    MIL OSI USA News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI China: China calls for opposition to unilateral tariffs, defense of multilateral trading system at WTO

    Source: People’s Republic of China – State Council News

    China has called for opposition to unilateral tariff actions and the defense of the multilateral trading system at a two-day meeting of the World Trade Organization’s (WTO) General Council, which concluded on Wednesday.

    In a statement presented at the meeting, the Chinese delegation noted that global trade turbulence is intensifying, marked by rising uncertainty and increased risks of fragmentation.

    In recent months, new unilateral tariff measures have continued to emerge, and the volume of trade affected by restrictive measures has reached 2.7 trillion U.S. dollars, the highest level since statistics became available in 2009, the delegation said.

    Against this backdrop, the delegation called on WTO members to strengthen solidarity and cooperation, and to more effectively support the multilateral trading system.

    The delegation elaborated on a three-pronged “SDR” framework previously proposed by China, namely “Stability as the cornerstone, Development as the priority, and Reform as the pathway,” noting that the proposed efforts include jointly upholding WTO principles such as the most-favored-nation (MFN) treatment and non-discrimination, supporting the integration of developing members into the multilateral trading system, and advancing in-depth WTO reform.

    The delegation stressed that bilateral agreements reached or related measures taken by relevant members to ease trade tensions must comply with WTO rules.

    The delegation also suggested that the WTO Secretariat strengthen its monitoring and analysis of unilateral measures and bilateral agreements, and promptly inform members of their impact, especially the potential negative spillover effects on third-party members.

    Brazil, the European Union, Australia, New Zealand, Russia, Venezuela and other WTO members stated at the meeting that escalating trade turbulence is not in the common interest of members. Unilateral tariff measures, they noted, undermine the foundation of multilateral rules, significantly raise costs for businesses and consumers, and particularly hinder the economic growth and social development of vulnerable developing members.

    Given the current circumstances, they emphasized that upholding the multilateral trading system has become more critical than ever. 

    MIL OSI China News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: expert reaction to two papers assessing off-the-shelf health tests sold in UK shops

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    July 23, 2025

    A study published in The BMJ assesses direct-to-consumer self-tests sold in the UK.

    Prof Amitava Banerjee, Professor of Clinical Data Science and Honorary Consultant Cardiologist, Institute of Health Informatics, UCL, said:

    “Direct-to-consumer, self-tests are increasingly used by people with and without disease for screening and are widely available from high street vendors.  In these rigorous, real-world studies led by the University of Birmingham, we see two main findings.  First, across 30 self-tests in 19 conditions from infertility and menopause to raised cholesterol and anaemia, there is a not enough information for consumers to judge when and why to do the test, and how to interpret or how to act on the results.  Second, the evidence and the support from clinical guidelines to use these tests is often lacking, suggesting that regulatory oversight needs to be improved.

    “Sometimes people use self-tests because they “feel it is better to know” and they are trying to inform their health and healthcare decisions.  This research shows that these self-tests are often not providing relevant knowledge or information and they are not informing decisions in the right way.  Therefore, all stakeholders need to consider the quality of self-tests and information available to members of the public or health professionals before recommending their use, whether in the health and wellness space or in diagnosis, treatment and prevention of disease.”

    Rachel Richardson, Acting Head of Methods Support, Evidence Production and Methods Directorate, The Cochrane Collaboration, said:

    “This well-conducted research shines a welcome light on an area of healthcare which appears to be inadequately regulated.”

    Prof Kevin McConway, Emeritus Professor of Applied Statistics, The Open University, said:

    “I think the findings of these new studies on self-tests for health conditions, available (at a cost) in supermarkets, high street chemists and online, are scary and concerning.  I don’t doubt the findings of the researchers, that many of the available tests don’t make it clear who could make good use of them, how accurate the results might be, or what someone should do in the light of their results.

    “These are good studies in my view.  The researchers do list some limitations in the discussion sections of the papers, in particular that their samples of tests were obtained two years ago and were not specifically intended to be a sample of what was available across the country, but given what they do say about where they got the tests, I’d be surprised if they aren’t pretty much the same anywhere nowadays.  Also, the researchers didn’t check with representatives of the public whether the instructions were as unhelpful to understanding as they believe they were, but I don’t think this affects their conclusions.

    “I’m certainly not saying that tests like this should be banned, or even radically discouraged.  The authors of these research papers aren’t saying that either.  Experience during the heights of the Covid pandemic showed how useful home testing could be, particularly when access to other information about one’s health might not be easily available (as can still be the case at some GP practices, for instance).  And, generally as a default position, I don’t like telling people they can’t do something that they want to do – though only in the light of clear, transparent and easily available information on the pros and cons, and in the presence of adequate regulation.  These studies make it clear that users of many self-tests aren’t given easy access to relevant information, and that the regulation isn’t appropriate at present.

    “I’ll just mention one particular aspect, because it’s one that I have studied and written about myself.  This is about why the findings are important, not about the quality of the research.  No diagnostic or screening test for a health condition can be 100% accurate.  There will inevitably be false positives – people with a positive test result for the condition who actually don’t have the condition – and false negatives – people with a negative test result for a condition who actually do have the condition.  These are aspects of accuracy, though discussions of that word don’t always make it clear enough that there are two different ways in which a test result can be wrong.

    “You probably recall some of the interest and media discussion about these things in relation to Covid testing.  Not all of the discussion was logical or well argued, but it clearly and correctly drew attention to the fact that test results can be wrong sometimes.

    “Fewer than half of the self-tests examined by the researchers gave any information at all on the box about accuracy of the results.  Even when they did give information about accuracy on the box or in the instructions inside, the information was sometimes itself not accurate, or was based on the results of laboratory studies under careful conditions, not on findings on use of the tests by people who are not health professionals.

    “But even if all the tests had given information about accuracy, and all that information was reliable, there can still be problems. I’ll describe how.

    “Because there are two kinds of wrong results from tests – false positives and false negatives – we need to look at two aspects of the chance of making an error.  One common way of doing this, that was used in some of the self-test instructions, is as follows.  Findings from the development and use of the test can estimate the probability that someone, who is known to have the health condition in question, will have a true positive test result rather than a false negative result.  (In the jargon, that probability is called the test sensitivity – but trust me, knowing the jargon doesn’t help understanding.)  Another finding from test development and use is an estimate of the chance that a person, who is known not to have the condition on question, will have a true negative test result rather than a false positive result.  (That’s called the test specificity.)

    “The trouble is that these two probabilities are the probability of the person having a positive or a negative test result, in the position where we know whether they really have the health condition.  But you don’t do these tests if you know already whether you have the health condition.  So these probabilities are the wrong way round.  What people (and health professionals) want to know is, for example, if we know someone has a positive test result, what’s the chance that they really have the health condition that is being tested for.  Or, if we know someone has a negative test result, what’s the chance that they really don’t have the health condition?  (There are jargon names for those too – the positive predictive value and the negative predictive value, but again I don’t think those names help much, as there’s too much risk of confusion.)  And I’m sure that’s the kind of thing someone would want to know if they buy a self-test and see what result it gives for them.

    “However, the first lot of probabilities, the sensitivity and specificity, are different from the second lot, the predictive values.  If I tell you that the chance that a person, known already to have the health condition, will have positive test result is 98%, that doesn’t tell you what the chance is that a person, who has a positive test result, actually has the health condition.  That second probability is almost certainly not 98%, and in many circumstances it would be very much less than 98%.  To get from one set of probabilities to the other, you would need more information, such as how likely it is that the person has the condition if we don’t yet know the test result.

    “Just to rub in that these two probabilities aren’t the same, consider the following silly story.  You find a man in the street in London.  You happen to know he is the Pope.  What’s the chance that he is a Roman Catholic?  Obviously, 100%.  But now suppose the thing you know ,and the thing you want to know the chance of, are the other way round.  You know, somehow, that a different man in the London street is a Roman Catholic.  What’s the chance that he is the Pope?  Well, very much less than 100%.  It matters, a lot, which thing you already know and which thing you want the probability for.

    “So, in testing you get different probabilities if you know whether the person being tested has the health conditions, and want the probability that the test will be positive, from if you know what the person’s test result is, and want the probability that they have the health condition.  And only one of these probabilities – the second one – tells you what a test result is really saying about the chance of having the health condition.

    “There has been a lot of research in the past on how people, including health professionals and also non-professionals that might buy one of these self-tests, understand the findings, when they are given some information about the probabilities.  Several studies, for instance, found that many doctors and health professionals weren’t using the information on probabilities when the person’s health status is already known (the sensitivity and specificity) properly in trying to answer the question of how likely it is that someone, with a positive test result, actually has the health condition.  And if doctors might not be getting it right, how could a non-expert be expected to interpret their own test results properly?

    “The position on that maybe isn’t as grim as it sounds, though.  Other research has indicated that there are ways of getting the information across so that it’s useable by non-experts.  That has been done by several groups, including the Winton Centre for Risk and Evidence Communication in Cambridge (which has now closed, though its findings are still available), groups led by the psychologist Gerd Gigerenzer in Berlin, and many others.  Somehow, those communication findings need to be incorporated, as well as they can be, in the instructions for these tests.  But that will require more and better regulation.

    “Also, some doctors in primary health, including Jessica Watson and Margaret McCartney, who wrote the editorial accompanying these two new research papers in the BMJ, have worked on ways of helping people to understand test results – though you’d need to ask them how much of their findings could transfer easily to something that could be written clearly in test instructions rather than used in direct communication between health professionals and patients.”

    Paper 1: ‘Direct-to-consumer self-tests sold in the UK in 2023: cross sectional review of information on intended use, instructions for use, and post-test decision making’ by Clare Davenport et al. was published in the BMJ at 23:30 UK time on Wednesday 23 July 2025. 

    DOI: 10.1136/bmj-2025-085546

    Paper 2: ‘Direct-to-consumer self-tests sold in the UK in 2023: cross sectional review of regulation and evidence of performance’ by Bethany Hillier et al. was published in the BMJ at 23:30 UK time on Wednesday 23 July 2025. 

    DOI: 10.1136/bmj-2025-085547

    Declared interests

    Prof Amitava Banerjee: “AB declares no relevant conflicts of interest.”

    Prof Kevin McConway: “I have no conflicts of interest to declare.”

    Rachel Richardson: “I have no interests to declare.”

    This Roundup was accompanied by an SMC Briefing. 

    MIL OSI United Kingdom –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI United Kingdom: Papers assessing off-the-shelf health tests sold in UK shops

    Source: United Kingdom – Executive Government & Departments

    July 23, 2025

    Scientists from the University of Birmingham have reviewed a number of direct-to-consumer health tests that are available for members of the public to buy from supermarkets, pharmacies and shops in the UK, such as tests for vitamin deficiency, blood cholesterol and the menopause.

    The scientists assessed the evidence available for the basis of levels of accuracy, sensitivity and specificity that the tests reported. They also looked at how useable the tests were in terms of equipment, instructions and interpretation of the results.

    They published their findings in two papers in the BMJ.

    Journalists came to this briefing to hear some of the authors of the papers discuss their findings, and to ask their questions.

    Speakers included:

    Prof Jon Deeks, Professor of Biostatistics and head of the Biostatistics, Evidence Synthesis and Test Evaluation Research Group, University of Birmingham

    Dr Clare Davenport, Clinical Associate Professor, University of Birmingham (joining online)

    Prof Alex Richter, Professor of Clinical Immunology and Director of the Clinical Immunology Services, University of Birmingham

    Bethany Hillier, Medical Statistician, University of Birmingham

    This Briefing was accompanied by an SMC Roundup of comments. 

    MIL OSI United Kingdom –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: University Research – It’s time to rethink scare tactics in health ads – study

    Source: University of Auckland (UoA)

    Gruesome smoking warnings and frightening obesity statistics use fear to drive behaviour change. But a University of Auckland researcher says it might be time to try a different approach.

    Marketing lecturer Dr Saira Raza Khan, whose work focuses on consumer well-being and meaningful consumption, says gratitude can be more effective than fear when it comes to promoting healthier choices.

    “I don’t think fear in advertising is beneficial for people’s mental health and well-being,” says Khan. “We’re already going through negative emotions in relation to other elements of our lives – the news, work stress, etc. Why not use emotions in health advertising that promote well-being?”

    Her article, published in the Journal of Advertising Research, examines how different emotional appeals (fear and gratitude) influence people’s responses to diet-related messages.

    “Fear t

    MIL OSI New Zealand News –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: Origin Bancorp, Inc. Reports Earnings for Second Quarter 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    RUSTON, La., July 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Origin Bancorp, Inc. (NYSE: OBK) (“Origin,” “we,” “our” or the “Company”), the holding company for Origin Bank (the “Bank”), today announced net income of $14.6 million, or $0.47 diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, compared to net income of $22.4 million, or $0.71 diluted earnings per share, for the quarter ended March 31, 2025. Pre-tax, pre-provision (“PTPP”)(1) earnings were $21.5 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, compared to $32.0 million for the linked quarter.

    “During the second quarter, we continued to successfully execute on Optimize Origin, our plan to deliver elite level financial performance for Origin and our shareholders,” said Drake Mills, chairman, president and CEO of Origin Bancorp, Inc. “Throughout the first half of the year, we have created efficiencies within our branch network, improved the overall profitability of our commercial banking team, restructured our mortgage business, and taken multiple actions to optimize our balance sheet. As we head into the back half of 2025, we are well-positioned in the nation’s most dynamic growth markets; and I have full confidence that our employees will continue delivering exceptional value to our customers, communities, and shareholders.”

    (1) PTPP earnings is a non-GAAP financial measure, please see the last few pages of this document for a reconciliation of this alternative financial measure to its most directly comparable GAAP measure.

    Optimize Origin

    • In January 2025, we announced our initiative to drive elite financial performance and enhance our award-winning culture.
    • Built on three primary pillars:
      • Productivity, Delivery & Efficiency
      • Balance Sheet Optimization
      • Culture & Employee Engagement
    • Established near term target of greater than a 1% ROAA run rate by 4Q25 and an ultimate target of top quartile ROAA.
    • Near term target is being achieved in part by branch consolidation, headcount reduction, securities optimization, capital optimization, cash/liquidity management, mortgage restructuring, as well as other opportunistic efficiency optimizations throughout the organization.
    • We believe the actions we have taken will drive earnings improvement of approximately $34.2 million annually on a pre-tax pre-provision basis – an increase of approximately $10.8 million since the last quarterly update, due to additional benefits from increasing our Argent Financial ownership and further securities portfolio optimization.
             

    Financial Highlights

    • Net interest income was $82.1 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, reflecting an increase of $3.7 million, or 4.7%, compared to the linked quarter and is at its highest level in the previous nine quarters.
    • Our fully tax equivalent net interest margin (“NIM-FTE”) expanded 17 basis points to 3.61% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, compared to the quarter ended March 31, 2025. The increase was primarily driven by an eight-basis point increase in the yield earned on average interest-earning assets and a five-basis point decline in the rate paid on average interest-bearing liabilities.
    • As part of our bond portfolio optimization strategy, we sold available-for-sale investment securities with a book value of $215.8 million and realized a loss of $14.4 million during the quarter ended June 30, 2025. This transaction, net of the increase in interest income, negatively impacted diluted EPS by $0.35, but contributed approximately two basis points to our NIM-FTE for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, with an estimated twelve-month total positive impact to NIM-FTE of six basis points.
    • Total loans held for investment (“LHFI”) were $7.68 billion at June 30, 2025, reflecting an increase of $98.9 million, or 1.3%, compared to March 31, 2025. LHFI, excluding mortgage warehouse lines of credit (“MW LOC”), were $7.11 billion at June 30, 2025, reflecting a decrease of $71.7 million, or 1.0%, compared to March 31, 2025.
    • During the quarter ended June 30, 2025, we repurchased 136,399 shares of our common stock at an average price of $31.84 per share. Also, in July 2025, our board of directors approved a stock repurchase program authorizing the purchase of up to $50.0 million of the Company’s outstanding common stock over the next three years, replacing the existing plan which expires this month.
    • Book value per common share was $38.62 at June 30, 2025, reflecting an increase of $0.85, or 2.3%, compared to March 31, 2025 and $3.39, or 9.6%, compared to June 30, 2024. Tangible book value per common share(1) was $33.33 at June 30, 2025, reflecting an increase of $0.90, or 2.8%, compared to March 31, 2025 and $3.56, or 12.0%, compared to June 30, 2024.
    • As part of our Optimize Origin initiatives, we purchased additional shares of Argent Financial on July 1, 2025, which allowed us to reach the 20% ownership threshold. This will change our accounting methodology on this investment to the equity method, which will result in an increase in noninterest income.

    (1) Tangible book value per common share is a non-GAAP financial measure, please see the last few pages of this document for a reconciliation of this alternative financial measure to its most directly comparable GAAP measure.

    Results of Operations for the Quarter Ended June 30, 2025

    Net Interest Income and Net Interest Margin

    Net interest income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, was $82.1 million, an increase of $3.7 million, or 4.7%, compared to the quarter ended March 31, 2025. The increase was primarily driven by a $4.1 million increase in interest income earned on LHFI and decreases of $1.6 million and $1.1 million in interest expense paid on interest-bearing deposits and subordinated debentures, respectively, partially offset by a $3.0 million decrease in interest income earned on interest-earning balances due from banks and a $1.1 million increase in interest expense on FHLB advances and other borrowings.

    The increase in average LHFI principal balances and the impact of one more calendar day during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, resulted in interest income increases of $3.1 million and $1.3 million, respectively, when compared to the quarter ended March 31, 2025. The increase in average LHFI principal balances was primarily driven by increases of $191.1 million and $64.1 million in MW LOC and commercial and industrial loans, respectively, partially offset by a decrease of $77.1 million in total average real estate loan balances.

    The $1.6 million decrease in interest expense on interest-bearing deposits was mainly due to a $232.8 million decrease in average interest-bearing deposits balance, during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, when compared to the quarter ended March 31, 2025. Due primarily to the seasonality of the deposits, interest-bearing public fund average deposit balances decreased $163.5 million during the quarter ended June 30, 2025.

    The $1.1 million decrease in interest expense on subordinated debentures was primarily driven by the redemption of $70.0 million in subordinated debentures during the quarter ended March 31, 2025, in conjunction with our Optimize Origin initiatives.

    The $3.0 million decrease in interest income earned on average interest-earning balances due from banks was primarily driven by a $267.4 million decrease in average interest-earning balances due from banks.

    The $97.8 million increase in average FHLB advances and other borrowings balance contributed $664,000 to the total $1.1 million increase in interest expense on FHLB advances and other borrowings during the quarter ended June 30, 2025. The remaining increase was primarily driven by an increase in the average rate paid on FHLB advances and other borrowings rising to 4.36% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, from 2.75% for the quarter ended March 31, 2025. The average short-term FHLB balances were $98.4 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, compared to zero for the quarter ended March 31, 2025.

    The Federal Reserve Board sets various benchmark rates, including the federal funds rate, and thereby influences the general market rates of interest, including the loan and deposit rates offered by financial institutions. On September 18, 2024, the Federal Reserve reduced the federal funds target rate range by 50 basis points, to a range of 4.75% to 5.00%, marking the first rate reduction since early 2020. Subsequently, it implemented two additional reductions, with the current federal funds target range set to 4.25% to 4.50% on December 18, 2024. In total, the federal funds target range has decreased 100 basis points from its recent cycle high.

    Our NIM-FTE was 3.61% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, representing 17- and 44-basis-point increases compared to the linked quarter and the quarter ended June 30, 2024, respectively. The yield earned on interest-earning assets for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, was 5.87%, an increase of eight basis points compared to the linked quarter and a decrease of 17 basis points compared to the quarter ended June 30, 2024. The average rate paid on total interest-bearing liabilities for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, was 3.25%, representing a decrease of five- and 73-basis points compared to the linked quarter and the quarter ended June 30, 2024, respectively. Additionally, total loans represented 83.6% of average interest-earning assets during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, up from 80.8% during the quarter ended March 31, 2025, providing a favorable shift in the asset mix that contributed to the margin improvement.

    During the quarter ended June 30, 2025, we executed a bond portfolio optimization strategy aimed at enhancing long-term yields and improving overall portfolio performance. This strategy involved selling lower-yielding available-for-sale investment securities and using the proceeds to purchase higher-yielding available-for-sale investment securities. As a result, we replaced securities with a total book value of $215.8 million and a weighted average yield of 2.60% with new securities totaling $201.8 million with a weighted average yield of 5.23%, realizing a loss of $14.4 million. The weighted average duration of the securities portfolio increased to 4.52 years as of June 30, 2025, compared to 4.10 years as of March 31, 2025. As part of the strategy, we also entered into interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges on seven of these purchased securities with a total book value of $41.3 million, to help reduce potential volatility in the fair value of these securities due to changes in market rates. While this transaction resulted in a $0.35 negative impact to diluted EPS during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, due to the realized loss net of the increase in interest income, we believe the trade-off in yield represents an attractive opportunity. This transaction is expected to generate an estimated annual increase in net interest income of $5.6 million, with an estimated earn-back period of 2.6 years and an estimated twelve-month total positive impact to NIM-FTE of six basis points. We will continue to evaluate and identify any additional opportunities that may present themselves to maximize our return on our securities portfolio.

    Credit Quality

    The table below includes key credit quality information:

      At and For the Three Months Ended   Change   % Change
    (Dollars in thousands, unaudited) June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      June 30,
    2024
      Linked
    Quarter
      Linked
    Quarter
    Past due LHFI(1) $ 67,626     $ 72,774     $ 66,276     $ (5,148 )   7.1 %
    Past due 30 to 89 days and still accruing   12,495       42,587       17,080       (30,092 )   70.7  
    Allowance for loan credit losses (“ALCL”)   92,426       92,011       100,865       415     0.5  
    Classified loans   127,637       127,676       118,254       (39 )   —  
    Total nonperforming LHFI   85,315       81,368       75,812       3,947     4.9  
    Provision for credit losses   2,862       3,444       5,231       (582 )   16.9  
    Net charge-offs   2,300       2,728       2,946       (428 )   15.7  
    Credit quality ratios(2):                  
    ALCL to nonperforming LHFI   108.33 %     113.08 %     133.05 %   (4.75) %   N/A
    ALCL to total LHFI   1.20       1.21       1.27       (0.01 )   N/A
    ALCL to total LHFI, adjusted(3)   1.29       1.28       1.34       0.01     N/A
    Classified loans to total LHFI   1.66       1.68       1.49       (0.02 )   N/A
    Nonperforming LHFI to LHFI   1.11       1.07       0.95       0.04     N/A
    Net charge-offs to total average LHFI (annualized)   0.12       0.15       0.15       (0.03 )   N/A

    ___________________________

      N/A = Not applicable.
    (1) Past due LHFI are defined as loans 30 days or more past due and includes past due nonperforming loans.
    (2) Please see the Loan Data schedule at the back of this document for additional information.
    (3) The ALCL to total LHFI, adjusted, is calculated by excluding the ALCL for MW LOC loans from the total LHFI ALCL in the numerator and excluding the MW LOC loans from the LHFI in the denominator. Due to their low-risk profile, MW LOC loans require a disproportionately low allocation of the ALCL.
       

    Loans past due 30-89 days and still accruing decreased $30.1 million for the current quarter compared to the linked quarter. The decrease was primarily driven by three loan relationships totaling $10.7 million that were paid off in the current quarter. Also contributing to the decrease in loans 30-89 days past due and still accruing were three loan relationships that are now over 90 days past due and nonperforming totaling $10.6 million and two loan relationships that are now no longer past due totaling $3.0 million.

    Nonperforming LHFI increased $3.9 million for the current quarter compared to the linked quarter, evidenced by an increase in the percentage of nonperforming LHFI to LHFI to 1.11% compared to 1.07% for the linked quarter. The increase in nonperforming loans was primarily driven by four relationships totaling $12.9 million at June 30, 2025. The increase was partially offset by $3.6 million in payments from two relationships and further reduced by total charge-offs of $2.9 million.

    Our results included a credit loss provision expense of $2.9 million during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, which includes a $2.7 million provision for loan credit losses, compared to provision for loan credit losses of $3.7 million for the linked quarter. Net charge-offs decreased $428,000 for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, when compared to the quarter ended March 31, 2025, primarily due to total charge-offs of $4.8 million in the linked quarter, consisting primarily of two commercial and industrial loan relationships with charge-offs totaling $2.6 million, with no comparably sized charge-offs during the current quarter.

    Noninterest Income

    Noninterest income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, was $1.4 million, a decrease of $14.2 million, or 91.2%, from the linked quarter, primarily driven by a $14.4 million loss on sales of securities, net, and a $1.3 million decrease in insurance commission and fee income, respectively, in the current quarter. These decreases were partially offset by an increase of $902,000 in swap fee income.

    The loss on sales of securities, net, during the current quarter was due to the execution of the bond portfolio optimization strategy discussed above.

    The decrease in insurance commission and fee income was primarily driven by a seasonal increase in annual contingency fee income recognized in the first quarter with no comparable increase in the current quarter.

    The increase in swap fee income was due to both an attractive interest rate environment which is increasingly conducive to facilitating back-to-back swaps for our customers and an increased focus on the marketing of customer swaps as part of Optimize Origin.

    Noninterest Expense

    Noninterest expense for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, was $62.0 million, a decrease of $85,000, or 0.1% from the linked quarter. The decrease was primarily driven by a decrease of $1.4 million in occupancy and equipment, net, that was partially offset by increases of $549,000 and $475,000 in salaries and employee benefit expense and data processing expense, respectively.

    The $1.4 million decrease in occupancy and equipment, net was primarily due to cost incurred in the linked quarter in connection with the closure of banking centers as a part of Optimize Origin.

    The $549,000 increase in salaries and employee benefit expense was primarily due to the adjustment of the incentive compensation accrual which drove the salaries and employee benefit expense lower during the linked quarter.

    The $475,000 increase in data processing expense was primarily due to higher loan workflow software costs during the current quarter compared to the linked quarter.

    Financial Condition

    Loans

    • Total LHFI at June 30, 2025, were $7.68 billion, an increase of $98.9 million, or 1.3%, from $7.59 billion at March 31, 2025, and a decrease of $274.7 million, or 3.5%, compared to June 30, 2024.
    • The primary drivers of the increase during the quarter ended June 30, 2025, compared to the linked quarter, were increases in MW LOC, multi-family real estate and owner occupied commercial real estate of $170.6 million, $40.1 million and $34.8 million, respectively. These increases were partially offset by decreases of $144.9 million and $10.9 million in construction/land/land development loans and commercial and industrial loans, respectively.

    Securities

    • Total securities at June 30, 2025 were $1.14 billion, a decrease of $34.9 million, or 3.0%, from $1.18 billion at March 31, 2025, and a decrease of $34.1 million, or 2.9%, compared to June 30, 2024.
    • The decrease in securities was primarily due to maturities of short-term investments and net sales of available for sale securities during the current quarter.
    • In connection with Optimize Origin, we made a strategic decision to replace lower yielding available-for-sale securities with a total book value of $215.8 million with higher-yielding securities totaling $201.8 million. Additional details about this transaction is disclosed above in the Net Interest Income and Net Interest Margin section of this release.
    • Accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of taxes, primarily associated with unrealized losses within the available for sale portfolio, was $73.6 million at June 30, 2025, a decrease of $16.9 million, or 18.6%, from the linked quarter.
    • The weighted average effective duration for the total securities portfolio was 4.52 years as of June 30, 2025, compared to 4.10 years as of March 31, 2025.

    Deposits

    • Total deposits at June 30, 2025, were $8.12 billion, a decrease of $215.4 million, or 2.6%, compared to March 31, 2025, and a decrease of $387.8 million, or 4.6%, from June 30, 2024. Seasonality in our public fund deposits drove $99.7 million of the current quarter decline when compared to March 31, 2025.
    • The decrease in total deposits at June 30, 2025, compared to the linked quarter was primarily due to decreases of $159.0 million, $57.3 million and $47.1 million in interest-bearing demand deposits, time deposits (excluding brokered time deposits) and noninterest-bearing deposits, respectively. The decrease was partially offset by an increase of $92.6 million in money market deposits. 
    • At June 30, 2025 and March 31, 2025, noninterest-bearing deposits as a percentage of total deposits were 22.7%. At June 30, 2024, noninterest-bearing deposits as a percentage of total deposits were 21.9%.

    Borrowings

    • FHLB advances and other borrowings at June 30, 2025, were $127.8 million, an increase of $115.4 million from $12.5 million at March 31, 2025, and an increase of $87.1 million compared to June 30, 2024. The increase in the current quarter compared to the linked quarter is primarily due to an increase in FHLB short-term borrowings of $115.0 million used primarily to meet current liquidity needs.
    • Average FHLB advances were $104.5 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $98.3 million from $6.2 million for the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and an increase of $68.8 million from June 30, 2024.

    Conference Call

    Origin will hold a conference call to discuss its second quarter 2025 results on Thursday, July 24, 2025, at 8:00 a.m. Central Time (9:00 a.m. Eastern Time). To participate in the live conference call, please dial +1 (929) 272-1574 (U.S. Local / International 1); +1 (857) 999-3259 (U.S. Local / International 2); +1 (888) 700-7550 (U.S. Toll Free), enter Conference ID: 05905 and request to be joined into the Origin Bancorp, Inc. (OBK) call. A simultaneous audio-only webcast may be accessed via Origin’s website at www.origin.bank under the investor relations, News & Events, Events & Presentations link or directly by visiting https://dealroadshow.com/e/ORIGINQ2.

    If you are unable to participate during the live webcast, the webcast will be archived on the Investor Relations section of Origin’s website at www.origin.bank, under Investor Relations, News & Events, Events & Presentations.

    About Origin

    Origin Bancorp, Inc. is a financial holding company headquartered in Ruston, Louisiana. Origin’s wholly owned bank subsidiary, Origin Bank, was founded in 1912 in Choudrant, Louisiana. Deeply rooted in Origin’s history is a culture committed to providing personalized relationship banking to businesses, municipalities, and personal clients to enrich the lives of the people in the communities it serves. Origin provides a broad range of financial services and currently operates more than 55 locations in Dallas/Fort Worth, East Texas, Houston, North Louisiana, Mississippi, South Alabama and the Florida Panhandle. For more information, visit www.origin.bank.

    Non-GAAP Financial Measures

    Origin reports its results in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America (“GAAP”). However, management believes that certain supplemental non-GAAP financial measures may provide meaningful information to investors that is useful in understanding Origin’s results of operations and underlying trends in its business. However, non-GAAP financial measures are supplemental and should be viewed in addition to, and not as an alternative for, Origin’s reported results prepared in accordance with GAAP. The following are the non-GAAP measures used in this release: PTPP earnings, PTPP ROAA, tangible book value per common share, ROATCE, and core efficiency ratio.

    Please see the last few pages of this release for reconciliations of non-GAAP measures to the most directly comparable financial measures calculated in accordance with GAAP.

    Forward-Looking Statements

     This press release contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements include information regarding Origin Bancorp, Inc’s (“Origin”, “we”, “our” or the “Company”) future financial performance, business and growth strategies, projected plans and objectives, and any expected purchases of its outstanding common stock, and related transactions and other projections based on macroeconomic and industry trends, including changes to interest rates by the Federal Reserve and the resulting impact on Origin’s results of operations, estimated forbearance amounts and expectations regarding the Company’s liquidity, including in connection with advances obtained from the FHLB, which are all subject to change and may be inherently unreliable due to the multiple factors that impact broader economic and industry trends, and any such changes may be material. Such forward-looking statements are based on various facts and derived utilizing important assumptions and current expectations, estimates and projections about Origin and its subsidiaries, any of which may change over time and some of which may be beyond Origin’s control. Statements or statistics preceded by, followed by or that otherwise include the words “assumes,” “anticipates,” “believes,” “estimates,” “expects,” “foresees,” “intends,” “plans,” “projects,” and similar expressions or future or conditional verbs such as “could,” “may,” “might,” “should,” “will,” and “would” and variations of such terms are generally forward-looking in nature and not historical facts, although not all forward-looking statements include the foregoing words. Further, certain factors that could affect Origin’s future results and cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in the forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to: (1) the impact of current and future economic conditions generally and in the financial services industry, nationally and within Origin’s primary market areas, including the impact of tariffs, as well as the financial stress on borrowers and changes to customer and client behavior as a result of the foregoing; (2) changes in benchmark interest rates and the resulting impacts on net interest income; (3) deterioration of Origin’s asset quality; (4) factors that can impact the performance of Origin’s loan portfolio, including real estate values and liquidity in Origin’s primary market areas; (5) the financial health of Origin’s commercial borrowers and the success of construction projects that Origin finances; (6) changes in the value of collateral securing Origin’s loans; (7) the impact of generative artificial intelligence; (8) Origin’s ability to anticipate interest rate changes and manage interest rate risk; (9) the impact of heightened regulatory requirements, reduced debit interchange and overdraft income and the possibility of facing related adverse business consequences if our total assets grow in excess of $10 billion as of December 31 of any calendar year; (10) the effectiveness of Origin’s risk management framework and quantitative models; (11) Origin’s inability to receive dividends from Origin Bank and to service debt, pay dividends to Origin’s common stockholders, repurchase Origin’s shares of common stock and satisfy obligations as they become due; (12) the impact of labor pressures; (13) changes in Origin’s operation or expansion strategy or Origin’s ability to prudently manage its growth and execute its strategy; (14) changes in management personnel; (15) Origin’s ability to maintain important customer relationships, reputation or otherwise avoid liquidity risks; (16) increasing costs as Origin grows deposits; (17) operational risks associated with Origin’s business; (18) significant turbulence or a disruption in the capital or financial markets and the effect of market disruption and interest rate volatility on our investment securities; (19) increased competition in the financial services industry, particularly from regional and national institutions, as well as from fintech companies; (20) compliance with governmental and regulatory requirements and changes in laws, rules, regulations, interpretations or policies relating to financial institutions; (21) periodic changes to the extensive body of accounting rules and best practices; (22) further government intervention in the U.S. financial system; (23) a deterioration of the credit rating for U.S. long-term sovereign debt; (24) Origin’s ability to comply with applicable capital and liquidity requirements, including its ability to generate liquidity internally or raise capital on favorable terms, including continued access to the debt and equity capital markets; (25) natural disasters and other adverse weather events, pandemics, acts of terrorism, war, and other matters beyond Origin’s control; (26) developments in our mortgage banking business, including loan modifications, general demand, and the effects of judicial or regulatory requirements or guidance; (27) fraud or misconduct by internal or external actors (including Origin employees); (28) cybersecurity threats or security breaches and the cost of defending against them; (29) Origin’s ability to maintain adequate internal controls over financial and non-financial reporting; and (30) potential claims, damages, penalties, fines, costs and reputational damage resulting from pending or future litigation, regulatory proceedings and enforcement actions. For a discussion of these and other risks that may cause actual results to differ from expectations, please refer to the sections titled “Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements” and “Risk Factors” in Origin’s most recent Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission and any updates to those sections set forth in Origin’s subsequent Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q and Current Reports on Form 8-K. If one or more events related to these or other risks or uncertainties materialize, or if Origin’s underlying assumptions prove to be incorrect, actual results may differ materially from what Origin anticipates. Accordingly, you should not place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. Any forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date on which it is made, and Origin does not undertake any obligation to publicly update or review any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future developments or otherwise.

    New risks and uncertainties arise from time to time, and it is not possible for Origin to predict those events or how they may affect Origin. In addition, Origin cannot assess the impact of each factor on Origin’s business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements. All forward-looking statements, expressed or implied, included in this communication are expressly qualified in their entirety by this cautionary statement. This cautionary statement should also be considered in connection with any subsequent written or oral forward-looking statements that Origin or persons acting on Origin’s behalf may issue. Annualized, pro forma, adjusted, projected, and estimated numbers are used for illustrative purposes only, are not forecasts, and may not reflect actual results.

    This press release contains projected financial information with respect to Origin, including with respect to certain goals and strategic initiatives of Origin and the anticipated benefits thereof. This projected financial information constitutes forward-looking information and is for illustrative purposes only and should not be relied upon as necessarily being indicative of future results. The assumptions and estimates underlying such projected financial information are inherently uncertain and are subject to significant business, economic (including interest rate), competitive, and other risks and uncertainties. Actual results may differ materially from the results contemplated by the projected financial information contained herein and the inclusion of such projected financial information in this release should not be regarded as a representation by any person that such actions will be taken or accomplished or that the results reflected in such projected financial information with respect thereto will be achieved.

    Contact:

    Investor Relations
    Chris Reigelman
    318-497-3177
    chris@origin.bank

    Media Contact
    Ryan Kilpatrick
    318-232-7472
    rkilpatrick@origin.bank

    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Selected Quarterly Financial Data
    (Unaudited) 
     
      Three Months Ended
      June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
                       
    Income statement and share amounts (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Net interest income $ 82,136     $ 78,459     $ 78,349     $ 74,804     $ 73,890  
    Provision (benefit) for credit losses   2,862       3,444       (5,398 )     4,603       5,231  
    Noninterest income (loss)   1,368       15,602       (330 )     15,989       22,465  
    Noninterest expense   61,983       62,068       65,422       62,521       64,388  
    Income before income tax expense   18,659       28,549       17,995       23,669       26,736  
    Income tax expense   4,012       6,138       3,725       5,068       5,747  
    Net income $ 14,647     $ 22,411     $ 14,270     $ 18,601     $ 20,989  
    PTPP earnings(1) $ 21,521     $ 31,993     $ 12,597     $ 28,272     $ 31,967  
    Basic earnings per common share   0.47       0.72       0.46       0.60       0.68  
    Diluted earnings per common share   0.47       0.71       0.46       0.60       0.67  
    Dividends declared per common share   0.15       0.15       0.15       0.15       0.15  
    Weighted average common shares outstanding – basic   31,192,622       31,205,752       31,155,486       31,130,293       31,042,527  
    Weighted average common shares outstanding – diluted   31,327,818       31,412,010       31,308,805       31,239,877       31,131,829  
                       
    Balance sheet data                  
    Total LHFI $ 7,684,446     $ 7,585,526     $ 7,573,713     $ 7,956,790     $ 7,959,171  
    Total LHFI excluding MW LOC   7,109,698       7,181,395       7,224,632       7,461,602       7,452,666  
    Total assets   9,678,158       9,750,372       9,678,702       9,965,986       9,947,182  
    Total deposits   8,123,036       8,338,412       8,223,120       8,486,568       8,510,842  
    Total stockholders’ equity   1,205,769       1,180,177       1,145,245       1,145,673       1,095,894  
                       
    Performance metrics and capital ratios                  
    Yield on LHFI   6.33 %     6.33 %     6.47 %     6.67 %     6.58 %
    Yield on interest-earnings assets   5.87       5.79       5.91       6.09       6.04  
    Cost of interest-bearing deposits   3.20       3.23       3.61       4.01       3.95  
    Cost of total deposits   2.47       2.52       2.79       3.14       3.08  
    NIM – fully tax equivalent (“FTE”)   3.61       3.44       3.33       3.18       3.17  
    Return on average assets (annualized) (“ROAA”)   0.60       0.93       0.57       0.74       0.84  
    PTPP ROAA (annualized)(1)   0.89       1.32       0.50       1.13       1.28  
    Return on average stockholders’ equity (annualized) (“ROAE”)   4.94       7.79       4.94       6.57       7.79  
    Return on average tangible common equity (annualized) (“ROATCE”)(1)   5.74       9.09       5.78       7.74       9.25  
    Book value per common share $ 38.62     $ 37.77     $ 36.71     $ 36.76     $ 35.23  
    Tangible book value per common share(1)   33.33       32.43       31.38       31.37       29.77  
    Efficiency ratio(2)   74.23 %     65.99 %     83.85 %     68.86 %     66.82 %
    Core efficiency ratio(1)   73.77       65.33       82.79       67.48       65.55  
    Common equity tier 1 to risk-weighted assets(3)   13.47       13.57       13.32       12.46       12.15  
    Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets(3)   13.66       13.77       13.52       12.64       12.33  
    Total capital to risk-weighted assets(3)   15.68       15.81       16.44       15.45       15.16  
    Tier 1 leverage ratio(3)   11.70       11.47       11.08       10.93       10.70  
                                           

    __________________________

    (1) PTPP earnings, PTPP ROAA, tangible book value per common share, ROATCE, and core efficiency ratio are either non-GAAP financial measures or use a non-GAAP contributor in the formula. For a reconciliation of these alternative financial measures to their most directly comparable GAAP measures, please see the last few pages of this release.
    (2) Calculated by dividing noninterest expense by the sum of net interest income plus noninterest income.
    (3) June 30, 2025, ratios are estimated and calculated at the Company level, which is subject to the capital adequacy requirements of the Federal Reserve Board.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Selected Year-To-Date Financial Data
    (Unaudited)
     
      Six Months Ended June 30, 2025
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   2025       2024  
           
    Income statement and share amounts  
    Net interest income $ 160,595     $ 147,213  
    Provision for credit losses   6,306       8,243  
    Noninterest income   16,970       39,720  
    Noninterest expense   124,051       123,095  
    Income before income tax expense   47,208       55,595  
    Income tax expense   10,150       11,974  
    Net income $ 37,058     $ 43,621  
    PTPP earnings(1) $ 53,514     $ 63,838  
    Basic earnings per common share   1.19       1.41  
    Diluted earnings per common share   1.18       1.40  
    Dividends declared per common share   0.30       0.30  
    Weighted average common shares outstanding – basic   31,199,151       31,011,930  
    Weighted average common shares outstanding – diluted   31,375,804       31,110,747  
           
    Performance metrics      
    Yield on LHFI   6.33 %     6.58 %
    Yield on interest-earning assets   5.83       6.01  
    Cost of interest-bearing deposits   3.21       3.90  
    Cost of total deposits   2.49       3.04  
    NIM-FTE   3.52       3.18  
    ROAA (annualized)   0.77       0.88  
    PTPP ROAA (annualized)(1)   1.11       1.29  
    ROAE (annualized)   6.34       8.17  
    ROATCE (annualized)(1)   7.38       9.73  
    Efficiency ratio(2)   69.86       65.85  
    Core efficiency ratio(1)   69.29       65.40  
                   

    ____________________________

    (1) PTPP earnings, PTPP ROAA, ROATCE, and core efficiency ratio are either non-GAAP financial measures or use a non-GAAP contributor in the formula. For a reconciliation of these alternative financial measures to their most directly comparable GAAP measures, please see the last few pages of this release.
    (2) Calculated by dividing noninterest expense by the sum of net interest income plus noninterest income.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Consolidated Quarterly Statements of Income
    (Unaudited)
     
      Three Months Ended
      June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
                       
    Interest and dividend income (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Interest and fees on loans $ 121,239     $ 117,075     $ 127,021     $ 133,195   $ 129,879
    Investment securities-taxable   7,692       8,076       6,651       6,536     6,606
    Investment securities-nontaxable   1,425       968       964       905     893
    Interest and dividend income on assets held in other financial institutions   4,281       6,424       5,197       3,621     4,416
    Total interest and dividend income   134,637       132,543       139,833       144,257     141,794
    Interest expense                  
    Interest-bearing deposits   50,152       51,779       59,511       67,051     65,469
    FHLB advances and other borrowings   1,216       96       88       482     514
    Subordinated indebtedness   1,133       2,209       1,885       1,920     1,921
    Total interest expense   52,501       54,084       61,484       69,453     67,904
    Net interest income   82,136       78,459       78,349       74,804     73,890
    Provision (benefit) for credit losses   2,862       3,444       (5,398 )     4,603     5,231
    Net interest income after provision (benefit) for credit losses   79,274       75,015       83,747       70,201     68,659
    Noninterest income                  
    Insurance commission and fee income   6,661       7,927       5,441       6,928     6,665
    Service charges and fees   4,927       4,716       4,801       4,664     4,862
    Other fee income   2,809       2,301       2,152       2,114     2,404
    Mortgage banking revenue   1,369       915       1,151       1,153     1,878
    Swap fee income   1,435       533       116       106     44
    (Loss) gain on sales of securities, net   (14,448 )     —       (14,617 )     221     —
    Limited partnership investment (loss) income   (1,909 )     (1,692 )     (62 )     375     68
    Change in fair value of equity investments   —       —       —       —     5,188
    Other income   524       902       688       428     1,356
    Total noninterest income (loss)   1,368       15,602       (330 )     15,989     22,465
    Noninterest expense                  
    Salaries and employee benefits   38,280       37,731       36,405       38,491     38,109
    Occupancy and equipment, net   7,187       8,544       7,913       6,298     7,009
    Data processing   3,432       2,957       3,414       3,470     3,468
    Office and operations   3,337       2,972       2,883       2,984     3,072
    Intangible asset amortization   1,768       1,761       1,800       1,905     2,137
    Regulatory assessments   1,345       1,392       1,535       1,791     1,842
    Advertising and marketing   1,158       1,133       1,929       1,449     1,328
    Professional services   1,285       1,250       2,064       2,012     1,303
    Electronic banking   1,359       1,354       1,377       1,308     1,238
    Loan-related expenses   669       599       431       751     1,077
    Franchise tax expense   688       675       884       721     815
    Other expenses   1,475       1,700       4,787       1,341     2,990
    Total noninterest expense   61,983       62,068       65,422       62,521     64,388
    Income before income tax expense   18,659       28,549       17,995       23,669     26,736
    Income tax expense   4,012       6,138       3,725       5,068     5,747
    Net income $ 14,647     $ 22,411     $ 14,270     $ 18,601   $ 20,989
     
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Consolidated Balance Sheets
    (Unaudited)
     
    (Dollars in thousands) June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
    Assets                  
    Cash and due from banks $ 113,918     $ 112,888     $ 132,991     $ 159,337     $ 137,615  
    Interest-bearing deposits in banks   220,193       373,314       337,258       161,854       150,435  
    Total cash and cash equivalents   334,111       486,202       470,249       321,191       288,050  
    Securities:                  
    AFS   1,126,721       1,161,368       1,102,528       1,160,965       1,160,048  
    Held to maturity, net of allowance for credit losses   11,093       11,094       11,095       11,096       11,616  
    Securities carried at fair value through income   6,218       6,512       6,512       6,533       6,499  
    Total securities   1,144,032       1,178,974       1,120,135       1,178,594       1,178,163  
    Non-marketable equity securities held in other financial institutions   75,181       71,754       71,643       67,068       64,010  
    Loans held for sale   8,878       10,191       10,494       7,631       18,291  
    LHFI   7,684,446       7,585,526       7,573,713       7,956,790       7,959,171  
    Less: ALCL   92,426       92,011       91,060       95,989       100,865  
    LHFI, net of ALCL   7,592,020       7,493,515       7,482,653       7,860,801       7,858,306  
    Premises and equipment, net   122,618       123,847       126,620       126,751       121,562  
    Cash surrender value of bank-owned life insurance   41,265       41,021       40,840       40,602       40,365  
    Goodwill   128,679       128,679       128,679       128,679       128,679  
    Other intangible assets, net   36,444       38,212       37,473       39,272       41,177  
    Accrued interest receivable and other assets   194,930       177,977       189,916       195,397       208,579  
    Total assets $ 9,678,158     $ 9,750,372     $ 9,678,702     $ 9,965,986     $ 9,947,182  
    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity                  
    Noninterest-bearing deposits $ 1,841,684     $ 1,888,808     $ 1,900,651     $ 1,893,767     $ 1,866,622  
    Interest-bearing deposits excluding brokered interest-bearing deposits, if any   5,450,710       5,536,636       5,301,243       5,137,940       4,984,817  
    Time deposits   805,642       862,968       941,000       1,023,252       1,022,589  
    Brokered deposits   25,000       50,000       80,226       431,609       636,814  
    Total deposits   8,123,036       8,338,412       8,223,120       8,486,568       8,510,842  
    FHLB advances and other borrowings   127,843       12,488       12,460       30,446       40,737  
    Subordinated indebtedness   89,657       89,599       159,943       159,861       159,779  
    Accrued expenses and other liabilities   131,853       129,696       137,934       143,438       139,930  
    Total liabilities   8,472,389       8,570,195       8,533,457       8,820,313       8,851,288  
    Stockholders’ equity:                  
    Common stock   156,124       156,220       155,988       155,837       155,543  
    Additional paid-in capital   537,819       538,790       537,366       535,662       532,950  
    Retained earnings   585,387       575,578       557,920       548,419       534,585  
    Accumulated other comprehensive loss   (73,561 )     (90,411 )     (106,029 )     (94,245 )     (127,184 )
    Total stockholders’ equity   1,205,769       1,180,177       1,145,245       1,145,673       1,095,894  
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 9,678,158     $ 9,750,372     $ 9,678,702     $ 9,965,986     $ 9,947,182  
     
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Loan Data
    (Unaudited)
     
      At and For the Three Months Ended
      June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
                       
    LHFI (Dollars in thousands)
    Owner occupied commercial real estate $ 972,788     $ 937,985     $ 975,947     $ 991,671     $ 959,850  
    Non-owner occupied commercial real estate   1,455,771       1,445,864       1,501,484       1,533,093       1,563,152  
    Construction/land/land development   653,748       798,609       864,011       991,545       1,017,389  
    Residential real estate – single family   1,465,535       1,465,192       1,432,129       1,414,013       1,421,027  
    Multi-family real estate   529,899       489,765       425,460       434,317       398,202  
    Total real estate loans   5,077,741       5,137,415       5,199,031       5,364,639       5,359,620  
    Commercial and industrial   2,011,178       2,022,085       2,002,634       2,074,037       2,070,947  
    MW LOC   574,748       404,131       349,081       495,188       506,505  
    Consumer   20,779       21,895       22,967       22,926       22,099  
    Total LHFI   7,684,446       7,585,526       7,573,713       7,956,790       7,959,171  
    Less: ALCL   92,426       92,011       91,060       95,989       100,865  
    LHFI, net $ 7,592,020     $ 7,493,515     $ 7,482,653     $ 7,860,801     $ 7,858,306  
                       
    Nonperforming assets(1)                  
    Nonperforming LHFI                  
    Commercial real estate $ 12,814     $ 5,465     $ 4,974     $ 2,776     $ 2,196  
    Construction/land/land development   17,720       17,694       18,505       26,291       26,336  
    Residential real estate(2)   37,996       40,749       36,221       14,313       13,493  
    Commercial and industrial   16,655       17,325       15,120       20,486       33,608  
    Consumer   130       135       182       407       179  
    Total nonperforming LHFI   85,315       81,368       75,002       64,273       75,812  
    Other real estate owned/repossessed assets   1,991       1,990       3,635       6,043       6,827  
    Total nonperforming assets $ 87,306     $ 83,358     $ 78,637     $ 70,316     $ 82,639  
    Classified assets $ 129,628     $ 129,666     $ 122,417     $ 113,529     $ 125,081  
    Past due LHFI(3)   67,626       72,774       42,437       38,838       66,276  
    Past due 30 to 89 days and still accruing   12,495       42,587       18,015       20,170       17,080  
                       
    Allowance for loan credit losses                  
    Balance at beginning of period $ 92,011     $ 91,060     $ 95,989     $ 100,865     $ 98,375  
    Provision (benefit) for loan credit losses   2,715       3,679       (5,489 )     4,644       5,436  
    Loans charged off   3,700       4,848       2,025       11,226       3,706  
    Loan recoveries   1,400       2,120       2,585       1,706       760  
    Net charge-offs (recoveries)   2,300       2,728       (560 )     9,520       2,946  
    Balance at end of period $ 92,426     $ 92,011     $ 91,060     $ 95,989     $ 100,865  
                       
    Credit quality ratios                  
    Total nonperforming assets to total assets   0.90 %     0.85 %     0.81 %     0.71 %     0.83 %
    Nonperforming LHFI to LHFI   1.11       1.07       0.99       0.81       0.95  
    Past due LHFI to LHFI   0.88       0.96       0.56       0.49       0.83  
    Past due 30 to 89 days and still accruing to LHFI   0.16       0.56       0.24       0.25       0.21  
    ALCL to nonperforming LHFI   108.33       113.08       121.41       149.35       133.05  
    ALCL to total LHFI   1.20       1.21       1.20       1.21       1.27  
    ALCL to total LHFI, adjusted(4)   1.29       1.28       1.25       1.28       1.34  
    Net charge-offs (recoveries) to total average LHFI (annualized)   0.12       0.15       (0.03 )     0.48       0.15  
     

    ____________________________

    (1) Nonperforming assets consist of nonperforming/nonaccrual loans and property acquired through foreclosures or repossession, as well as bank-owned property not in use and listed for sale, if any.
    (2)  Includes multi-family real estate.
    (3) Past due LHFI are defined as loans 30 days or more past due and includes past due nonperforming loans.
    (4) The ALCL to total LHFI, adjusted is calculated by excluding the ALCL for MW LOC loans from the total LHFI ALCL in the numerator and excluding the MW LOC loans from the LHFI in the denominator. Due to their low-risk profile, MW LOC loans require a disproportionately low allocation of the ALCL.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Average Balances and Yields/Rates
    (Unaudited)
     
      Three Months Ended
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024
      Average Balance   Yield/Rate   Average Balance   Yield/Rate   Average Balance   Yield/Rate
                           
    Assets (Dollars in thousands)
    Commercial real estate $ 2,407,632   5.78 %   $ 2,448,099   5.82 %   $ 2,497,490   5.91 %
    Construction/land/land development   739,601   6.92       821,754   6.87       1,058,972   6.98  
    Residential real estate(1)   1,955,422   5.62       1,909,922   5.53       1,787,829   5.48  
    Commercial and industrial (“C&I”)   2,068,175   7.30       2,004,034   7.37       2,128,486   7.87  
    MW LOC   480,587   6.86       289,521   7.07       430,885   7.57  
    Consumer   21,851   7.29       22,709   7.45       22,396   8.06  
    LHFI   7,673,268   6.33       7,496,039   6.33       7,926,058   6.58  
    Loans held for sale   11,422   6.92       8,590   6.18       14,702   6.84  
    Loans receivable   7,684,690   6.33       7,504,629   6.33       7,940,760   6.58  
    Investment securities-taxable   980,430   3.15       1,021,904   3.21       1,046,301   2.54  
    Investment securities-nontaxable   175,101   3.26       140,875   2.79       143,232   2.51  
    Non-marketable equity securities held in other financial institutions   77,240   6.63       71,669   2.35       56,270   6.53  
    Interest-earning balances due from banks   276,372   4.36       543,821   4.48       254,627   5.53  
    Total interest-earning assets   9,193,833   5.87       9,282,898   5.79       9,441,190   6.04  
    Noninterest-earning assets   522,090         525,317         567,035    
    Total assets $ 9,715,923       $ 9,808,215       $ 10,008,225    
                           
    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity                    
    Liabilities                      
    Interest-bearing liabilities                      
    Savings and interest-bearing transaction accounts $ 5,409,357   3.17 %   $ 5,538,710   3.14 %   $ 5,130,224   3.80 %
    Time deposits   868,703   3.45       972,176   3.69       1,534,679   4.46  
    Total interest-bearing deposits   6,278,060   3.20       6,510,886   3.23       6,664,903   3.95  
    FHLB advances and other borrowings   111,951   4.36       14,148   2.75       41,666   4.96  
    Subordinated indebtedness   89,633   5.07       124,133   7.22       159,973   4.83  
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   6,479,644   3.25       6,649,167   3.30       6,866,542   3.98  
    Noninterest-bearing liabilities                      
    Noninterest-bearing deposits   1,881,301         1,837,365         1,894,141    
    Other liabilities   164,647         154,934         163,273    
    Total liabilities   8,525,592         8,641,466         8,923,956    
    Stockholders’ Equity   1,190,331         1,166,749         1,084,269    
    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 9,715,923       $ 9,808,215       $ 10,008,225    
    Net interest spread     2.62 %       2.49 %       2.06 %
    NIM     3.58         3.43         3.15  
    NIM-FTE(2)     3.61         3.44         3.17  
     

    ____________________________

    (1) Includes multi-family real estate.
    (2) In order to present pre-tax income and resulting yields on tax-exempt investments comparable to those on taxable investments, a tax-equivalent adjustment has been computed. This adjustment also includes income tax credits received on Qualified School Construction Bonds.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Notable Items
    (Unaudited)
     
      At and For the Three Months Ended
      June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
      $ Impact   EPS
    Impact(1)
      $ Impact   EPS
    Impact(1)
      $ Impact   EPS
    Impact(1)
      $ Impact   EPS
    Impact(1)
      $ Impact   EPS
    Impact(1)
                                           
      (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Notable interest income items:                                    
    Interest income reversal on relationships impacted by questioned banker activity $ —     $ —     $ —     $ —     $ —     $ —     $ —     $ —     $ (1,206 )   $ (0.03 )
    Notable interest expense items:                                    
    OID amortization – subordinated debenture redemption   —       —       (681 )     (0.02 )     —       —       —       —       —       —  
    Notable provision expense items:                                    
    Provision release (expense) related to questioned banker activity   —       —       —       —       3,212       0.08       —       —       (3,212 )     (0.08 )
    Provision release (expense) on relationships impacted by questioned banker activity   —       —       375       0.01       —       —       —       —       (4,131 )     (0.11 )
    Notable noninterest income items(2):                                
    (Loss) gain on sales of securities, net   (14,448 )     (0.36 )     —       —       (14,617 )     (0.37 )     221       0.01       —       —  
    Gain on sub-debt repurchase   —       —       —       —       —       —       —       —       81       —  
    Positive valuation adjustment on non-marketable equity securities   —       —       —       —       —       —       —       —       5,188       0.13  
    Net (loss) gain on OREO properties(2)   (158 )     —       (212 )     (0.01 )     198       —       —       —       800       0.02  
    BOLI payout   —       —       208       0.01       —       —       —       —       —       —  
    Notable noninterest expense items:                                
    Operating expense related to questioned banker activity   (530 )     (0.01 )     (543 )     (0.01 )     (4,069 )     (0.10 )     (848 )     (0.02 )     (1,452 )     (0.04 )
    Operating expense related to strategic Optimize Origin initiatives   (428 )     (0.01 )     (1,615 )     (0.04 )     (1,121 )     (0.03 )     —       —       —       —  
    Employee Retention Credit   —       —       213       0.01       1,651       0.04       —       —       —       —  
    Total notable items $ (15,564 )     (0.39 )   $ (2,255 )     (0.06 )   $ (14,746 )     (0.37 )   $ (627 )     (0.02 )   $ (3,932 )     (0.10 )
     

    ____________________________

    (1) The diluted EPS impact is calculated using a 21% effective tax rate. The total of the diluted EPS impact of each individual line item may not equal the calculated diluted EPS impact on the total notable items due to rounding.
    (2) The $158,000 net loss on OREO properties for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, includes an $8,000 insurance settlement recovery that was included in noninterest income on the face of the income statement and $3,000 in repair costs that was included in noninterest expense. The $212,000 net loss on OREO properties for the quarter ended March 31, 2025, includes a $444,000 expected insurance settlement recovery that was included in noninterest income on the face of the income statement, and a $148,000 repair cost that was included in noninterest expense.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Notable Items – Continued
    (Unaudited)
     
      Six Months Ended June 30,
        2025       2024  
      $ Impact   EPS Impact(1)   $ Impact   EPS Impact(1)
                   
      (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Notable interest income items:              
    Interest income reversal on relationships impacted by questioned banker activity $ —     $ —     $ (1,206 )   $ (0.03 )
    Notable interest expense items:              
    OID amortization -subordinated debenture redemption   (681 )     (0.02 )     —       —  
    Notable provision expense items:              
    Provision expense related to questioned banker activity   —       —       (3,212 )     (0.08 )
    Provision release (expense) on relationships impacted by questioned banker activity   375       0.01       (4,131 )     (0.10 )
    Notable noninterest income items:              
    MSR gain (impairment)   —       —       410       0.01  
    Loss on sales of securities, net   (14,448 )     (0.36 )     (403 )     (0.01 )
    Gain on sub-debt repurchase   —       —       81       —  
    Positive valuation adjustment on non-marketable equity securities   —       —       5,188       0.13  
    Net (loss) gain on OREO properties(2)   (370 )     (0.01 )     800       0.02  
    BOLI payout   208       0.01       —       —  
    Notable noninterest expense items:              
    Operating expense related to questioned banker activity   (1,073 )     (0.03 )     (1,452 )     (0.04 )
    Operating expense related to strategic Optimize Origin initiatives   (2,043 )     (0.05 )     —       —  
    Employee Retention Credit   213       0.01       —       —  
    Total notable items $ (17,819 )     (0.45 )   $ (3,925 )     (0.10 )
     

    ____________________________

    (1) The diluted EPS impact is calculated using a 21% effective tax rate. The total of the diluted EPS impact of each individual line item may not equal the calculated diluted EPS impact on the total notable items due to rounding.
    (2) The $370,000 net loss on OREO properties for the six months ended June 30, 2025, includes a $452,000 insurance settlement recovery that was included in noninterest income on the face of the income statement and a $151,000 repair cost that was included in noninterest expense.
       
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Non-GAAP Financial Measures
    (Unaudited)
     
      At and For the Three Months Ended
      June 30,
    2025
      March 31,
    2025
      December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30,
    2024
                       
      (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Calculation of PTPP earnings:                  
    Net income $ 14,647     $ 22,411     $ 14,270     $ 18,601     $ 20,989  
    Provision (benefit) for credit losses   2,862       3,444       (5,398 )     4,603       5,231  
    Income tax expense   4,012       6,138       3,725       5,068       5,747  
    PTPP earnings (non-GAAP) $ 21,521     $ 31,993     $ 12,597     $ 28,272     $ 31,967  
                       
    Calculation of PTPP ROAA:                  
    PTPP earnings $ 21,521     $ 31,993     $ 12,597     $ 28,272     $ 31,967  
    Divided by number of days in the quarter   91       90       92       92       91  
    Multiplied by the number of days in the year   365       365       366       366       366  
    PTPP earnings, annualized $ 86,320     $ 129,749     $ 50,114     $ 112,473       128,571  
    Divided by total average assets   9,715,923       9,808,215       9,978,543       9,985,836       10,008,225  
    ROAA (annualized) (GAAP)   0.60 %     0.93 %     0.57 %     0.74 %     0.84 %
    PTPP ROAA (annualized) (non-GAAP)   0.89       1.32       0.50       1.13       1.28  
                       
    Calculation of tangible book value per common share:
    Total common stockholders’ equity $ 1,205,769     $ 1,180,177     $ 1,145,245     $ 1,145,673     $ 1,095,894  
    Goodwill   (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )
    Other intangible assets, net   (36,444 )     (38,212 )     (37,473 )     (39,272 )     (41,177 )
    Tangible common equity   1,040,646       1,013,286       979,093       977,722       926,038  
    Divided by common shares outstanding at the end of the period   31,224,718       31,244,006       31,197,574       31,167,410       31,108,667  
    Book value per common share (GAAP) $ 38.62     $ 37.77     $ 36.71     $ 36.76     $ 35.23  
    Tangible book value per common share (non-GAAP)   33.33       32.43       31.38       31.37       29.77  
                       
    Calculation of ROATCE:                
    Net income $ 14,647     $ 22,411     $ 14,270     $ 18,601     $ 20,989  
    Divided by number of days in the quarter   91       90       92       92       91  
    Multiplied by number of days in the year   365       365       366       366       366  
    Annualized net income $ 58,749     $ 90,889     $ 56,770     $ 74,000     $ 84,417  
                       
    Total average common stockholders’ equity $ 1,190,331     $ 1,166,749     $ 1,149,228     $ 1,125,697     $ 1,084,269  
    Average goodwill   (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )     (128,679 )
    Average other intangible assets, net   (37,459 )     (38,254 )     (38,646 )     (40,487 )     (42,563 )
    Average tangible common equity   1,024,193       999,816       981,903       956,531       913,027  
                       
    ROAE (annualized) (GAAP)   4.94 %     7.79 %     4.94 %     6.57 %     7.79 %
    ROATCE (annualized) (non-GAAP)   5.74       9.09       5.78       7.74       9.25  
                       
    Calculation of core efficiency ratio:                  
    Total noninterest expense $ 61,983     $ 62,068     $ 65,422     $ 62,521     $ 64,388  
    Insurance and mortgage noninterest expense   (8,460 )     (8,230 )     (8,497 )     (8,448 )     (8,402 )
    Adjusted total noninterest expense   53,523       53,838       56,925       54,073       55,986  
                       
    Net interest income $ 82,136     $ 78,459     $ 78,349     $ 74,804     $ 73,890  
    Insurance and mortgage net interest income   (2,924 )     (2,815 )     (2,666 )     (2,578 )     (2,407 )
    Total noninterest income   1,368       15,602       (330 )     15,989       22,465  
    Insurance and mortgage noninterest income   (8,030 )     (8,842 )     (6,592 )     (8,081 )     (8,543 )
    Adjusted total revenue   72,550       82,404       68,761       80,134       85,405  
                       
    Efficiency ratio (GAAP)   74.23 %     65.99 %     83.85 %     68.86 %     66.82 %
    Core efficiency ratio (non-GAAP)   73.77       65.33       82.79       67.48       65.55  
     
    Origin Bancorp, Inc.
    Non-GAAP Financial Measures – Continued
    (Unaudited)
     
      Six Months Ended June 30,
        2025       2024  
           
      (Dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
    Calculation of PTPP earnings:      
    Net income $ 37,058     $ 43,621  
    Provision for credit losses   6,306       8,243  
    Income tax expense   10,150       11,974  
    PTPP earnings (non-GAAP) $ 53,514     $ 63,838  
           
    Calculation of PTPP ROAA:      
    PTPP Earnings $ 53,514     $ 63,838  
    Divided by the year-to-date number of days   181       182  
    Multiplied by number of days in the year   365       366  
    Annualized PTPP Earnings $ 107,915     $ 128,378  
           
    Divided by total average assets $ 9,761,814     $ 9,934,730  
    ROAA (annualized) (GAAP)   0.77 %     0.88 %
    PTPP ROAA (annualized) (non-GAAP)   1.11       1.29  
           
    Calculation of ROATCE:    
    Net income $ 37,058     $ 43,621  
    Divided by the year-to-date number of days   181       182  
    Multiplied by number of days in the year   365       366  
    Annualized net income $ 74,730     $ 87,721  
           
    Total average common stockholders’ equity $ 1,178,605     $ 1,073,487  
    Average goodwill   (128,679 )     (128,679 )
    Average other intangible assets, net   (37,854 )     (43,631 )
    Average tangible common equity   1,012,072       901,177  
           
    ROAE (annualized) (GAAP)   6.34 %     8.17 %
    ROATCE (annualized) (non-GAAP)   7.38       9.73  
           
    Calculation of core efficiency ratio:      
    Total noninterest expense $ 124,051     $ 123,095  
    Insurance and mortgage noninterest expense   (16,690 )     (16,447 )
    Adjusted total noninterest expense   107,361       106,648  
           
    Net interest income $ 160,595     $ 147,213  
    Insurance and mortgage net interest income   (5,739 )     (5,202 )
    Total noninterest income   16,970       39,720  
    Insurance and mortgage noninterest income   (16,872 )     (18,666 )
    Adjusted total revenue   154,954       163,065  
           
    Efficiency ratio (non-GAAP)   69.86 %     65.85 %
    Core efficiency ratio (non-GAAP)   69.29       65.40  
                   

    The MIL Network –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: Northrim BanCorp Earns $11.8 Million, or $2.09 Per Diluted Share, in Second Quarter 2025

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    ANCHORAGE, Alaska, July 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Northrim BanCorp, Inc. (NASDAQ:NRIM) (“Northrim” or the “Company”) today reported net income of $11.8 million, or $2.09 per diluted share, in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $13.3 million, or $2.38 per diluted share, in the first quarter of 2025, and $9.0 million, or $1.62 per diluted share, in the second quarter a year ago. The increase in second quarter 2025 profitability as compared to the second quarter a year ago was primarily the result of an increase in net interest income, higher purchased receivable income, and increased mortgage banking income, which were partially offset by a higher provision for credit losses, higher other operating expenses, and a higher provision for income taxes. Net interest income increased primarily due to higher loan balances and higher yields on earning assets. Purchased receivable income increased primarily due to the Company’s acquisition of Sallyport Commercial Finance, LLC (“Sallyport or SCF”), which was completed on October 31, 2024. Sallyport and its direct and indirect subsidiaries provide services and products related to purchased receivable factoring and asset-based lending in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom.

    Dividends per share in the second quarter of 2025 remained consistent with the first quarter of 2025 at $0.64 per share as compared to $0.61 per share in the second quarter of 2024.

    “Strong loan growth, increasing asset yields, and stable funding costs drove record net interest income in the second quarter of this year,” said Mike Huston, Northrim’s President and Chief Executive Officer. “We continue to attract new customers to Northrim and believe we have an opportunity to steadily increase our market share over the next few years.”

    Second Quarter 2025 Highlights:

    • Net interest income in the second quarter of 2025 increased 7% to $33.6 million compared to $31.3 million in the first quarter of 2025 and increased 24% compared to $27.1 million in the second quarter of 2024.
    • Net interest margin on a tax equivalent basis (“NIMTE”)* was 4.72% for the second quarter of 2025, up 11-basis points from the first quarter of 2025 and up 42-basis points from the second quarter a year ago.
    • Return on average assets (“ROAA”) was 1.48% and return on average equity (“ROAE”) was 16.37% for the second quarter of 2025 compared to ROAA of 1.76 and ROAE of 19.70 in the prior quarter and ROAA of 1.31% and ROAE of 14.84% for the second quarter of 2024.
    • Portfolio loans were $2.20 billion at June 30, 2025, up 4% from the preceding quarter and up 17% from a year ago, primarily due to new customer relationships and expanding market share, as well as retaining certain mortgages originated by Residential Mortgage, a subsidiary of Northrim Bank (the “Bank”). The Company sold $61 million in consumer mortgages in the second quarter of 2025 that were included in loans held for investment as of the end of 2024 to reduce the concentration of residential real estate loans and to provide additional liquidity for future commercial and construction loan growth.
    • Total deposits were $2.81 billion at June 30, 2025, up 1% from the preceding quarter, and up 14% from $2.46 billion a year ago. Non-interest bearing demand deposits increased 5% from the preceding quarter and increased 10% year-over-year to $777.9 million at June 30, 2025 and represent 28% of total deposits.
    • The average cost of interest-bearing deposits was 2.04% at June 30, 2025, up slightly from 2.01% at March 31, 2025 and down from 2.21% at June 30, 2024.
    • Mortgage loan originations were $277.1 million in the second quarter of 2025, up from $121.6 million in the first quarter of 2025 and up from $181.5 million in the second quarter a year ago. Mortgage loans funded for sale were $249.7 million in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $108.5 million in the first quarter of 2025 and $152.3 million in the second quarter of 2024.
    Financial Highlights Three Months Ended
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30, 2025 March 31, 2025 December 31,
    2024
    September 30,
    2024
    June 30, 2024
    Total assets $ 3,243,760   $ 3,140,960   $ 3,041,869   $ 2,963,392   $ 2,821,668  
    Total portfolio loans $ 2,202,115   $ 2,124,330   $ 2,129,263   $ 2,007,565   $ 1,875,907  
    Total deposits $ 2,809,170   $ 2,777,977   $ 2,680,189   $ 2,625,567   $ 2,463,806  
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 290,219   $ 279,756   $ 267,116   $ 260,050   $ 247,200  
    Net income $ 11,778   $ 13,324   $ 10,927   $ 8,825   $ 9,020  
    Diluted earnings per share $ 2.09   $ 2.38   $ 1.95   $ 1.57   $ 1.62  
    Return on average assets   1.48 %   1.76 %   1.43 %   1.22 %   1.31 %
    Return on average shareholders’ equity   16.37 %   19.70 %   16.32 %   13.69 %   14.84 %
    NIM   4.66 %   4.55 %   4.41 %   4.29 %   4.24 %
    NIMTE*   4.72 %   4.61 %   4.47 %   4.35 %   4.30 %
    Efficiency ratio   64.68 %   63.54 %   66.96 %   66.11 %   68.78 %
    Total shareholders’ equity/total assets   8.95 %   8.91 %   8.78 %   8.78 %   8.76 %
    Tangible common equity/tangible assets*   7.50 %   7.41 %   7.23 %   8.28 %   8.24 %
    Book value per share $ 52.55   $ 50.67   $ 48.41   $ 47.27   $ 44.93  
    Tangible book value per share* $ 43.35   $ 41.47   $ 39.17   $ 44.36   $ 42.03  
    Dividends per share $ 0.64   $ 0.64   $ 0.62   $ 0.62   $ 0.61  
    Common stock outstanding   5,522,271     5,520,892     5,518,210     5,501,943     5,501,562  
                                   

    * References to NIMTE, tangible book value per share, and tangible common equity to tangible common assets, (both of which exclude intangible assets) represent non-GAAP financial measures. Management has presented these non-GAAP measurements in this earnings release, because it believes these measures are useful to investors. See the end of this release for reconciliations of these non-GAAP financial measures to GAAP financial measures.

    Alaska Economic Update
    (Note: sources for information included in this section are included on page 14.)

    The Alaska Department of Labor (“DOL”) has reported Alaska’s seasonally adjusted unemployment rate in May of 2025 was 4.7% compared to the U.S. rate of 4.2%. The rate has held steady in Alaska at 4.7% for eight consecutive months. The total number of payroll jobs in Alaska, not including uniformed military, increased 1.1% or 3,800 jobs between May of 2024 and May of 2025.  

    According to the DOL, the Oil and Gas sector had the largest growth rate in new jobs of 8.8% through May of this year compared to the prior year, up 700 direct jobs. The Construction sector added 700 positions for a year-over-year growth rate of 3.7% through May of 2025. The larger Health Care sector grew by 1,200 jobs for an annual growth rate of 2.9%. Transportation, Warehousing and Utilities added 600 jobs for a 2.3% growth rate over the same period. Professional and Business Services increased 500 jobs year-over-year through May of 2025, up 1.7%.

    The Government sector grew by 200 jobs for 0.2% growth, adding 400 State positions while losing 200 Federal jobs in Alaska over the same period. Declining sectors between May 2024 and May 2025 were Information down 100 jobs or (-2.3%), Manufacturing (primarily seafood processing) shrinking 200 positions (-2.1%), Wholesale Trade lost 100 jobs (-1.5%) and Financial Activities, down 100 jobs (-0.9%).

    Alaska’s seasonally adjusted personal income was $57.4 billion in the first quarter of 2025 according to the Federal Bureau of Economic Analysis (“BEA”). This was an annualized improvement in the first quarter of 6.4% for Alaska, compared to the national average of 6.7%. Alaska enjoyed an annual personal income improvement of 6% in 2024 compared to the U.S. increase of 5.4%, ranking Alaska 6th best in the nation. The $885 million increase in personal income in the first quarter of 2025 in Alaska came from a $352 million increase in net earnings from wages, $440 million growth in government transfer receipts, and a $92 million increase in investment income.

    Alaska’s Gross State Product (“GSP”) in the first quarter of 2025 reached $72 billion according to the BEA. Alaska’s inflation adjusted “real” GSP increased 1.5% in 2024 and decreased -1.8% annualized in the first quarter of 2025. The average U.S. GDP growth rate was 2.8% for 2025 and -0.5% in the first quarter of 2025. Alaska’s real GSP decrease in the first quarter of 2025 was primarily caused by a decrease in the Mining, Oil & Gas sector, somewhat offset by improvements in the Construction sector.

    Alaska exported $5.9 billion in goods to foreign countries in 2024 according to the U.S. International Trade Administration. China is the largest importer of Alaska’s products at $1.5 billion, followed by Australia at $804 million, Japan at $674 million and South Korea at $634 million in 2024. Fish and related maritime products accounted for the largest volume at $2.1 billion, followed by minerals and ores at $2 billion, and primary metals at $992 million in 2024. Oil & Gas exports are $380 million because the majority of Alaska’s production is refined and consumed in the United States. Chief Credit Officer and Bank Economist Mark Edwards stated, “President Trump’s significant changes to international tariffs has created uncertainty in trade markets. At this time, it is unknown how each country will respond. Alaska’s natural resources are highly valued commodities throughout the world. If issues arise with one country, such as China, it is most likely that Alaska’s products will be redirected to other markets like Japan and South Korea or sold domestically in the United States. Canada is the largest long-term investor in Alaska’s mining industry. This involves significant fixed capital investments made over decades that are unlikely to shift dramatically in the short-run. Alaska’s Legislature just passed a bill HJR-11 with an approval vote of 33-4 titled, Recognizing and honoring the relationship between Canada and Alaska. It highlights the deeply interconnected friendship between Alaska and Canada culturally, economically, and militarily.”

    According to the US Bureau of Labor Statistics, the Consumer Price Index (“CPI”) for the U.S. increased 2.7% between June of 2024 and June of 2025. In Alaska, the rate of CPI increase was lower at 1.6% for the same time period.   Food and beverage, housing costs, and medical care costs were the largest causes for inflation. Declining motor fuel prices, transportation, recreation and household furnishing costs have helped moderate inflationary pressures in Alaska.

    The monthly average price of Alaska North Slope (“ANS”) crude oil has ranged between $76.39 a barrel in January of 2025 and $67.07 in May of the prior year. The June 2025 average was $72.62. The Alaska Department of Revenue (“DOR”) calculated ANS crude oil production was 461 thousand barrels per day (“bpd”) in Alaska’s fiscal year ending June 30, 2024.   Production rose to 469 thousand bpd in fiscal year ending June 30, 2025.   In the Spring 2025 Revenue Forecast published March 12, 2025, the DOR expects production to continue to grow to 663 thousand bpd by fiscal year 2034. This is primarily a result of new production coming on-line in and around the NPR-A region west of Prudhoe Bay. A partnership between Santos and Repsol is constructing the new Pikka field and ConocoPhillips is developing the large new Willow field. There are also a number of smaller new fields in the ANS that are contributing to the State of Alaska’s production growth estimates.

    The Alaska Permanent Fund is seeded annually by the oil wealth the State continues to save each year and has grown significantly over 40 years of successful investment. As of May 31, 2025 the fund’s value was $83.13 billion. According to the DOR it is scheduled to contribute $3.7 billion to Alaska General Fund in fiscal year 2025 for general government spending and to pay the annual dividend to Alaskan residents.

    According to the Alaska Multiple Listing Services, the average sales price of a single family home in Anchorage rose 6.2% in 2024 to $510,064, following a 5.2% increase in 2023. This was the seventh consecutive year of price increases. Through June of 2025 prices have continued to increase on average 2.6% to $523,059.

    The average sales price for single family homes in the Matanuska Susitna Borough rose 3.8% in 2024 to $412,859, after increasing 4% in 2023. This continues a trend of average price increases for more than a decade in the region. Through June of 2025 prices have continued to increase on average 6.9% to $441,463. These two markets represent where the vast majority of the Bank’s residential lending activity occurs.

    The Alaska Multiple Listing Services reported a 3.4% increase in the number of units sold in Anchorage when comparing 2024 to 2023. The first six months of 2025 has seen a 4.8% increase in home sales compared to the first half of 2024 in Anchorage.  

    There was virtually no change in the number of homes sold in the Matanuska Susitna Borough, with only four fewer homes sold in 2024 than in 2023 or -0.2%. In the first six months of 2025 the number of units sold has increased 13.1% in the Matanuska Susitna Borough compared to the first half of 2024.

    Northrim Bank sponsors the Alaskanomics blog to provide news, analysis, and commentary on Alaska’s economy. Join the conversation at Alaskanomics.com, or for more information on the Alaska economy, visit: www.northrim.com and click on the “Business Banking” link and then click “Learn.” Information from our website is not incorporated into, and does not form, a part of this earnings release.

    Review of Income Statement

    Consolidated Income Statement

    In the second quarter of 2025, Northrim generated a ROAA of 1.48% and a ROAE of 16.37%, compared to 1.76% and 19.70%, respectively, in the first quarter of 2025 and 1.31% and 14.84%, respectively, in the second quarter a year ago.

    Net Interest Income/Net Interest Margin

    Net interest income increased 7% to $33.6 million in the first quarter of 2025 compared to $31.3 million in the first quarter of 2025 and increased 24% compared to $27.1 million in the second quarter of 2024.   Interest expense on deposits increased to $10.3 million in the second quarter of 2025 compared to $9.9 million in the first quarter of 2025 and compared to $9.5 million in the second quarter of 2024.

    NIMTE* was 4.72% in the second quarter of 2025 up from 4.61% in the preceding quarter and 4.30% in the second quarter a year ago. NIMTE* increased 42 basis points in the second quarter of 2025 compared to the second quarter of 2024 primarily due to a favorable change in the mix of earning-assets towards higher loan balances as a percentage of total earning-assets, higher yields on those assets as variable rate loans reset at higher rates which were only partially offset by an increase in borrowings. The weighted average interest rate for new loans booked in the second quarter of 2025 was 7.27% compared to 7.30% in the first quarter of 2025 and 7.90% in the second quarter a year ago. The yield on the investment portfolio in the second quarter of 2025 increased to 3.07% from 2.97% in the first quarter of 2025 and 2.82% in the second quarter of 2024. “We are continuing to see some benefits from the repricing of our loan portfolio and new production increasing our margin” said Jed Ballard, Chief Financial Officer. Northrim’s NIMTE* continues to remain above the peer average of 3.26% posted by the S&P U.S. Small Cap Bank Index with total market capitalization between $250 million and $1 billion as of March 31, 2025.

    Provision for Credit Losses

    Northrim recorded a provision for credit losses of $2.0 million in the second quarter of 2025, which was comprised of a provision for credit losses on loans of $1.8 million, a $157,000 provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments, and a provision for credit losses on purchased receivables of $18,000. This compares to a benefit to the provision for credit losses of $1.4 million in the first quarter of 2025, which was comprised of a benefit to the provision for credit losses on loans of $1.1 million, a $322,000 benefit for credit losses on unfunded commitments, and a provision for credit losses on purchased receivables of $46,000. In the second quarter a year ago, Northrim recorded a benefit to the provision for credit losses of $120,000 which was comprised of a $134,000 provision for credit losses on loans and a $254,000 benefit to the provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments.

    The increase to the provision for credit losses on loans in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the prior quarter and the same quarter a year ago was primarily a result of increased loan balances as well as an increase in estimated loss rates due to less favorable economic forecasts and trends in qualitative factors. The increase to the provision for unfunded commitments in the second quarter of 2025 was primarily due to an increase in estimated loss rates which was only partially offset by changes in mix of unfunded commitments.

    Nonperforming assets, net of government guarantees, decreased during the quarter to $11.9 million at June 30, 2025, compared to $12.3 million at March 31, 2025, and increased compared to $5.1 million at June 30, 2024. The increase in nonperforming assets, net of government guarantees at June 30, 2025 compared to June 30, 2024 is primarily the result of the acquisition of Sallyport in the fourth quarter of 2024.

    The allowance for credit losses on loans was 290% of nonperforming loans, net of government guarantees, at the end of the second quarter of 2025, compared to 262% three months earlier and 365% a year ago.

    Other Operating Income

    In addition to home mortgage lending, Northrim has interests in other businesses that complement its core community banking activities, including purchased receivables financing and wealth management. Other operating income contributed $16.6 million, or 33% of total second quarter 2025 revenues, as compared to $13.0 million, or 29% of revenues in the first quarter of 2025, and $9.6 million, or 26% of revenues in the second quarter of 2024. The increase in other operating income in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the second quarter of 2024 was primarily the result of increased purchased receivable income due to the Company’s acquisition of Sallyport on October 31, 2024. Mortgage banking income in the second quarter of 2025 increased as compared to the first quarter of 2025 and second quarter of 2024 due to a higher volume of mortgage activity. See further discussion regarding mortgage activity contained under “Home Mortgage Lending” below.  

    Other Operating Expenses

    Operating expenses were $32.5 million in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $28.2 million in the first quarter of 2025, and $25.2 million in the second quarter of 2024. The increase in other operating expenses in the second quarter of 2025 compared to the first quarter of 2025 was primarily due to an increase in salaries and other personnel expense, including $980,000 in higher mortgage commissions expense due to higher mortgage volume, $763,000 in higher salary expense, a $760,000 increase in group medical expenses, and increases in profit share expense and payroll taxes. Additionally, marketing expense increased due to timing of annual charitable contributions. The increase in total other operating expenses in the second quarter of 2025 compared to the second quarter a year ago was primarily due to an increase in salaries and other personnel expense, the increase in compensation expense for Sallyport acquisition payments, and an increase in data processing expense. Total other operating expense increased $2.1 million in the Specialty Finance segment in the second quarter of 2025 compared to the second quarter of 2024 due to the acquisition of Sallyport on October 31, 2024.

    Income Tax Provision

    In the second quarter of 2025, Northrim recorded $4.0 million in state and federal income tax expense for an effective tax rate of 25.3%, compared to $4.3 million, or 24.2% in the first quarter of 2025 and $2.5 million, or 21.9% in the second quarter a year ago. The increase in the tax rate in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the first quarter of 2025 and second quarter of 2024 is primarily the result of a decrease in tax credits and tax exempt interest income as a percentage of pre-tax income in 2025 as compared to 2024.

    Community Banking

    Northrim is committed to meeting the needs of the diverse communities in which it operates. As a testament to that support, the Bank has branches in four regions of Alaska identified by the Federal Reserve as ‘distressed or underserved non-metropolitan middle-income geographies’.

    Net interest income in the Community Banking segment totaled $30.0 million in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $28.2 million in the first quarter of 2025 and $24.3 million in the second quarter of 2024. Net interest income increased $5.7 million or 23% in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the second quarter of 2024 mostly due to higher interest income on loans. This increase was only partially offset by lower interest income on investments and higher interest expense on deposits and borrowings.

    The provision for credit losses in the Community Banking segment was $1.3 million in the second quarter of 2025 compared to a benefit to the provision for credit losses of $1.8 million in the first quarter of 2025 and a benefit to the provision for credit losses of $184,000 in the same quarter a year ago. The increase to the provision for credit losses in the Community Banking segment in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the prior quarter and the same quarter a year ago was primarily a result of increased loan balances as well as an increase in estimated loss rates due to less favorable economic forecasts and trends in qualitative factors. In the first quarter of 2025, the Company recorded a net benefit for credit losses in the Community Banking segment primarily due to changes in the Company’s loss rate regression models for commercial, commercial real estate, and construction loans. These decreases in the provision were only partially offset by increases in estimated loss rates for management’s assessment of economic conditions and an increase for higher loan balances.

    Other operating expenses in the Community Banking segment totaled $21.8 million in the second quarter of 2025, up $3.2 million or 17% from $18.6 million in the first quarter of 2025, and up $3.7 million or 20% from $18.1 million in the second quarter a year ago. The increase in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the prior quarter and compared to the same quarter a year ago was primarily due to increases in salaries and other personnel expense, including $667,000 in higher salary expense, an $873,000 increase in group medical expenses, as well as increases in profit share expense and payroll taxes. Additionally, marketing expense increased due to timing of annual charitable contributions.

    The following tables provide highlights of the Community Banking segment of Northrim:

      Three Months Ended
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30, 2025 March 31, 2025 December 31,
    2024
    September 30,
    2024
    June 30, 2024
    Net interest income $ 29,971 $ 28,151   $ 27,643 $ 25,928 $ 24,318  
    (Benefit) provision for credit losses   1,319   (1,768 )   771   1,492   (184 )
    Other operating income   3,268   2,703     2,535   3,507   2,451  
    Other operating expense   21,764   18,581     19,116   18,723   18,069  
    Income before provision for income taxes   10,156   14,041     10,291   9,220   8,884  
    Provision for income taxes   2,413   3,253     1,474   2,133   1,786  
    Net income $ 7,743 $ 10,788   $ 8,817 $ 7,087 $ 7,098  
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,558   5,608,102     5,597,889   5,583,055   5,558,580  
    Diluted earnings per share attributable to Community Banking $ 1.37 $ 1.93   $ 1.58 $ 1.26 $ 1.27  
      Year-to-date
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30, 2025 June 30, 2024
    Net interest income $ 58,122   $ 48,533
    (Benefit) provision for credit losses   (449 )   13
    Other operating income   5,971     4,919
    Other operating expense   40,345     35,247
    Income before provision for income taxes   24,197     18,192
    Provision for income taxes   5,666     3,752
    Net income Community Banking segment $ 18,531   $ 14,440
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,734     5,562,025
    Diluted earnings per share $ 3.30   $ 2.59


    Home Mortgage Lending

    During the second quarter of 2025, mortgage loans funded for sale were $249.7 million, compared to $108.5 million in the first quarter of 2025, and $152.3 million in the second quarter of 2024.

    During the second quarter of 2025, the Bank purchased loans of $27.5 million from its subsidiary, Residential Mortgage, of which approximately half were jumbos, one-quarter were mortgages for second homes, and one-quarter were adjustable rate mortgages, with a weighted average interest rate of 6.71%, as compared to $13.1 million and 6.39% in the first quarter of 2025, and $29.2 million and 6.82% in the second quarter of 2024. Net interest income contributed $3.5 million to total Home Mortgage Lending revenue in the second quarter of 2025, up from $3.0 million in the prior quarter, and up from $2.8 million in the second quarter a year ago.

    The Company reclassified $100 million in consumer mortgages held for investment to held for sale in the first quarter of 2025 and recorded unrealized losses of $1.2 million related to this portfolio in the first quarter of 2025. In the second quarter of 2025, the Company sold $61 million of the $100 million that was reclassified to loans held for sale in the first quarter of 2025 for a total realized loss of $545,000.

    The Arizona, Colorado, and Pacific Northwest mortgage expansion markets were responsible for 22% of Residential Mortgage’s $216 million total production in the second quarter of 2025 (excluding the $61 million in mortgages sold noted above), 20% of $122 million total production in the first quarter of 2025, and 22% of $182 million total production in the second quarter of 2024.

    The provision for credit losses in the Home Mortgage Lending segment was $639,000 in the second quarter of 2025 compared to a benefit to the provision for credit losses of $307,000 in the first quarter of 2025 and a provision for credit loses of $64,000 in the second quarter of 2024. The increase in the provision for credit losses in the second quarter of 2025 in the Home Mortgage Lending segment as compared to the prior quarter and the same quarter a year ago was primarily a result of increased loan balances. The benefit to the provision for loan losses in the Home Mortgage Lending segment in the first quarter of 2025 was primarily the result of the reclassification of $100 million in mortgage loans to loans held for sale, which was only partially offset by an increase in the provision for loan losses due to changes in the Company’s loss rate regression models for home mortgage loans.

    The net change in fair value of mortgage servicing rights decreased mortgage banking income by $818,000 during the second quarter of 2025 compared to a decrease of $855,000 for the first quarter of 2025 and a decrease of $81,000 for the second quarter of 2024. Mortgage servicing revenue increased to $3.0 million in the second quarter of 2025 from $2.7 million in the prior quarter and increased from $2.2 million in the second quarter of 2024 due to an increase in production of Alaska Housing Finance Corporation (AHFC) mortgages, which contribute to servicing revenues at origination. In the second quarter of 2025, the Company’s servicing portfolio increased $69.3 million compared to a $24.0 million increase in the first quarter of 2025, and an increase of $41.8 million in the second quarter of 2024.

    As of June 30, 2025, Northrim serviced 6,458 loans in its $1.55 billion home-mortgage-servicing portfolio, a 5% increase compared to the $1.48 billion serviced as of the end of the first quarter of 2025, and a 41% increase from the $1.10 billion serviced a year ago.

    The following tables provide highlights of the Home Mortgage Lending segment of Northrim:

      Three Months Ended
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30,
    2025
    March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    September 30,
    2024
    June 30,
    2024
    Mortgage commitments $ 73,198   $ 68,258   $ 32,299   $ 77,591   $ 88,006  
               
    Mortgage loans funded for sale $ 249,680   $ 108,499   $ 162,530   $ 209,960   $ 152,339  
    Mortgage loans funded for investment   27,455     13,061     23,380     38,087     29,175  
    Total mortgage loans funded $ 277,135   $ 121,560   $ 185,910   $ 248,047   $ 181,514  
    Mortgage loan refinances to total fundings   10 %   11 %   11 %   6 %   6 %
    Mortgage loans serviced for others $ 1,553,987   $ 1,484,714   $ 1,460,720   $ 1,166,585   $ 1,101,800  
               
    Net realized and unrealized gains on mortgage loans sold and held for sale $ 5,091   $ 1,580   $ 3,747   $ 5,079   $ 3,189  
    Change in fair value of mortgage loan commitments, net   (110 )   660     (665 )   60     390  
    Total production revenue   4,981     2,240     3,082     5,139     3,579  
    Mortgage servicing revenue   2,957     2,696     2,847     2,583     2,164  
    Change in fair value of mortgage servicing rights:          
    Due to changes in model inputs of assumptions1   (355 )   (322 )   1,372     (566 )   239  
    Other2   (463 )   (533 )   (499 )   (402 )   (320 )
    Total mortgage servicing revenue, net   2,139     1,841     3,720     1,615     2,083  
    Other mortgage banking revenue   280     170     238     293     222  
    Total mortgage banking income $ 7,400   $ 4,251   $ 7,040   $ 7,047   $ 5,884  
               
    Net interest income $ 3,507   $ 3,046   $ 3,280   $ 2,941   $ 2,775  
    Provision (benefit) for credit losses   639     (307 )   305     571     64  
    Mortgage banking income   7,400     4,251     7,040     7,047     5,884  
    Other operating expense   7,593     6,490     7,198     7,643     6,697  
    Income before provision for income taxes   2,675     1,114     2,817     1,774     1,898  
    Provision for income taxes   746     310     842     497     532  
    Net income $ 1,929   $ 804   $ 1,975   $ 1,277   $ 1,366  
               
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,558     5,608,102     5,597,889     5,583,055     5,558,580  
    Diluted earnings per share attributable to Home Mortgage Lending $ 0.34   $ 0.14   $ 0.35   $ 0.23   $ 0.25  

    1Principally reflects changes in discount rates and prepayment speed assumptions, which are primarily affected by changes in interest rates.
    2Represents changes due to collection/realization of expected cash flows over time.

      Year-to-date
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30, 2025 June 30, 2024
    Mortgage loans funded for sale $ 358,179   $ 236,663  
    Mortgage loans funded for investment   40,516     46,578  
    Total mortgage loans funded $ 398,695   $ 283,241  
    Mortgage loan refinances to total fundings   10 %   6 %
         
    Net realized and unrealized gains on mortgage loans sold and held for sale $ 6,671   $ 5,168  
    Change in fair value of mortgage loan commitments, net   550     777  
    Total production revenue   7,221     5,945  
    Mortgage servicing revenue   5,653     3,725  
    Change in fair value of mortgage servicing rights:    
    Due to changes in model inputs of assumptions1   (677 )   528  
    Other2   (996 )   (634 )
    Total mortgage servicing revenue, net   3,980     3,619  
    Other mortgage banking revenue   450     351  
    Total mortgage banking income $ 11,651   $ 9,915  
         
    Net interest income $ 6,553   $ 5,007  
    Provision for credit losses   332     16  
    Mortgage banking income   11,651     9,915  
    Other operating expense   14,083     12,783  
    Income before provision for income taxes   3,789     2,123  
    Provision for income taxes   1,056     595  
    Net income Home Mortgage Lending segment $ 2,733   $ 1,528  
         
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,734     5,562,025  
    Diluted earnings per share $ 0.48   $ 0.28  

    1Principally reflects changes in discount rates and prepayment speed assumptions, which are primarily affected by changes in interest rates.
    2Represents changes due to collection/realization of expected cash flows over time.

    Specialty Finance

    The Company’s Specialty Finance segment includes Northrim Funding Services and Sallyport. Northrim Funding Services is a division of the Bank and has offered factoring solutions to small businesses since 2004. Sallyport is a leading provider of factoring, asset-based lending and alternative working capital solutions to small and medium sized enterprises in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom that the Company acquired on October 31, 2024 in an all cash transaction valued at approximately $53.9 million. The composition of revenues for the Specialty Finance segment are primarily purchased receivable income, but also includes interest income from loans and other fee income.

    The acquisition of Sallyport included $1.1 million in one-time deal related costs which are reflected in other operating expenses for the fourth quarter of 2024 in the tables below. Total pre-tax income for Sallyport for the second quarter of 2025 was $1.3 million compared to $1.3 million in the first quarter of 2025 and $945,000 for the two months of operations in the fourth quarter of 2024, excluding transaction costs.

    Average purchased receivables and loan balances at Sallyport were $71.0 million for the second quarter of 2025 with a yield of 27.23% compared to average balances of $59.9 million for the first quarter of 2025 and a yield of 35.8%. The yield in the first quarter of 2025 included the recognition of $899,000 in nonaccrual fee income collected during the quarter related to two nonperforming receivables and the collection of a $350,000 line termination fee. The yield excluding these items for the first quarter of 2025 was 27.4%.

    The following tables provide highlights of the Specialty Finance segment of Northrim:

      Three Months Ended
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30,
    2025
    March 31,
    2025
    December 31,
    2024
    September 30,
    2024
    June 30,
    2024
    Purchased receivable income $ 5,897 $ 6,150   $ 3,526   $ 1,033 $ 1,242
    Other operating income   75   (64 )   (68 )   —   —
    Interest income   782   596     407     158   170
    Total revenue   6,754   6,682     3,865     1,191   1,412
    Provision for credit losses   18   666     125     —   —
    Compensation expense – SCF acquisition payments   600   600     —     —   —
    Other operating expense   2,531   2,500     3,063     362   428
    Interest expense   668   496     489     185   210
    Total expense   3,817   4,262     3,677     547   638
    Income before provision for income taxes   2,937   2,420     188     644   774
    Provision for income taxes   831   688     53     183   218
    Net income Specialty Finance segment $ 2,106 $ 1,732   $ 135   $ 461 $ 556
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,558   5,608,102     5,597,889     5,583,055   5,558,580
    Diluted earnings per share attributable to Specialty Finance $ 0.38 $ 0.31   $ 0.02   $ 0.08 $ 0.10
      Year-to-date
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) June 30, 2025 June 30, 2024
    Purchased receivable income $ 12,047 $ 2,587
    Other operating income   11   —
    Interest income   1,378   382
    Total revenue   13,436   2,969
    Provision for credit losses   684   —
    Compensation expense – SCF acquisition payments   1,200   —
    Other operating expense   5,031   802
    Interest expense   1,164   422
    Total expense   8,079   1,224
    Income before provision for income taxes   5,357   1,745
    Provision for income taxes   1,519   494
    Net income Specialty Finance segment $ 3,838 $ 1,251
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,734   5,562,025
    Diluted earnings per share $ 0.69 $ 0.23


    Balance Sheet Review

    Northrim’s total assets were $3.24 billion at June 30, 2025, up 3% from the preceding quarter and up 15% from a year ago. Northrim’s loan-to-deposit ratio was 78% at June 30, 2025, up from 76% at both March 31, 2025 and June 30, 2024.

    At June 30, 2025, liquid assets, investments, and loans maturing within one year were $1.15 billion and our funds available for borrowing under our existing lines of credit were $507.9 million. Given these sources of liquidity and our expectations for customer demands for cash and for our operating cash needs, we believe our sources of liquidity to be sufficient for the foreseeable future.

    Average interest-earning assets were $2.89 billion in the second quarter of 2025, up 4% from $2.78 billion in the first quarter of 2025 and up 12% from $2.57 billion in the second quarter a year ago. The average yield on interest-earning assets was 6.27% in the second quarter of 2025, up from 6.10% in the preceding quarter and up from 5.83% in the second quarter of 2024.

    Average investment securities decreased to $515.9 million in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $523.8 million in the first quarter of 2025 and $640.0 million in the second quarter a year ago. The average net tax equivalent yield on the securities portfolio was 3.07% for the second quarter of 2025, up from 2.97% in the preceding quarter and up from 2.82% in the year ago quarter. The average estimated duration of the investment portfolio at June 30, 2025, was approximately 2.4 years compared to approximately 2.5 years at June 30, 2024. As of June 30, 2025, $55.7 million of available for sale securities with a weighted average yield of 1.40% are scheduled to mature in the next six months, $106.8 million with a weighted average yield of 1.28% are scheduled to mature in six months to one year, and $145.0 million with a weighted average yield of 1.96% are scheduled to mature in the following year, representing a total of $307.5 million or 11% of earning assets that are scheduled to mature in the next 24 months.

    Total unrealized losses, net of tax, on available for sale securities decreased by $1.9 million in the second quarter of 2025 resulting in total unrealized loss, net of tax, of $3.6 million compared to $5.5 million at March 31, 2025, and $15.2 million a year ago. The average maturity of the available for sale securities with the majority of the unrealized loss is 1.3 years. Total unrealized losses on held to maturity securities were $711,000 at June 30, 2025, compared to $1.1 million at March 31, 2025, and $3.0 million a year ago.

    Average interest bearing deposits in other banks decreased to $27.2 million in the second quarter of 2025 from $38.0 million in the first quarter of 2025 and increased from $17.4 million in the second quarter of 2024, as cash was used to fund loan growth and provide liquidity.

    Loans held for sale decreased to $127.1 million at June 30, 2025, compared to $159.6 million at March 31, 2025, largely due to the sale of $61 million consumer mortgage loans in the second quarter of 2025 that had been reclassified to loans held for sale from portfolio loans in the first quarter of 2025, and increased from $85.9 million a year ago, due to higher loan production by Residential Mortgage.

    Portfolio loans were $2.20 billion at June 30, 2025, up 4% from the preceding quarter and up 17% from a year ago. Portfolio loans, excluding consumer mortgage loans, were $2.00 billion at June 30, 2025, up $59.1 million or 3% from the preceding quarter and up 21% from a year ago. This increase in the second quarter of 2025 was diversified throughout the loan portfolio including consumer mortgage loans increasing by $19 million, construction loans increasing by $31.2 million, commercial real estate owner-occupied loans increasing $17.1 million, and nonowner-occupied commercial real estate and multi-family loans increasing by $6.5 million from the preceding quarter. These increases were partially offset by a $3.8 million decrease in commercial loans. Average portfolio loans in the second quarter of 2025 were $2.17 billion, which was consistent with the preceding quarter after the sale of $61 million in consumer mortgage loans, and up 18% from a year ago. Yields on average portfolio loans in the second quarter of 2025 increased to 6.99% from 6.89% in the first quarter and increased from 6.87% in the second quarter of 2024. The yield on new portfolio loans, excluding consumer mortgage loans, was 7.45% in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to 7.43% in the first quarter of 2025 and 8.26% in the second quarter of 2024.

    Northrim’s loans and credit lines are subject to approval procedures and amount limitations. These limitations apply to the borrower’s total outstanding indebtedness and commitments to us, including the indebtedness of any guarantor. Generally, Northrim is permitted to make loans to one borrower of up to 15% of the unimpaired capital and surplus of the Bank. The legal lending limit was $39.4 million at June 30, 2025. At June 30, 2025, Northrim had 22 relationships totaling $504.0 million in portfolio loans whose total direct and indirect commitments were greater than 50% of the legal lending limit.

    Alaskans continue to account for substantially all of Northrim’s deposit base. Total deposits were $2.81 billion at June 30, 2025, up 1% from $2.78 billion at March 31, 2025, and up 14% from $2.46 billion a year ago. “The increase in deposits in the second quarter of 2025 was consistent with our customers’ normal business cycles which typically result in increases in deposit balances in the second and third quarters and decreases in the first and fourth quarters,” said Ballard. At June 30, 2025, 75% of total deposits were held in business accounts and 25% of deposit balances were held in consumer accounts. Northrim had approximately 34,000 deposit customers with an average balance of $60,000 as of June 30, 2025. Northrim had 27 customers with balances over $10 million as of June 30, 2025, which accounted for $731.1 million, or 27%, of total deposits. Demand deposits increased by 5% from the prior quarter and increased 10% from the prior year to $777.9 million at June 30, 2025. Demand deposits were 28% of total deposits at June 30, 2025 up from 27% at March 31, 2025 and were down from 29% of total deposits at June 30, 2024. Average interest-bearing deposits were up 1% to $2.03 billion with an average cost of 2.04% in the second quarter of 2025, compared to $2.00 billion and an average cost of 2.01% in the first quarter of 2025, and up 18% compared to $1.73 billion and an average cost of 2.21% in the second quarter of 2024. Uninsured deposits totaled $1.02 billion or 36% of total deposits as of June 30, 2025 compared to $1.08 billion or 40% of total deposits as of December 31, 2024.

    Shareholders’ equity was $290.2 million, or $52.55 book value per share, at June 30, 2025, compared to $279.8 million, or $50.67 book value per share, at March 31, 2025 and $247.2 million, or $44.93 book value per share, a year ago. Tangible book value per share* was $43.35 at June 30, 2025, compared to $41.47 at March 31, 2025, and $42.03 per share a year ago. The increase in shareholders’ equity in the second quarter of 2025 as compared to the first quarter of 2025 was largely the result of earnings of $11.8 million and an increase in the fair value of the available for sale securities portfolio, which increased $1.9 million, net of tax, which were only partially offset by dividends paid of $3.6 million. The Company did not repurchase any shares of common stock in the second quarter of 2025 and currently has no plans to repurchase shares this year. Tangible common equity to tangible assets* was 7.50% as of June 30, 2025, compared to 7.41% as of March 31, 2025 and 8.24% as of June 30, 2024. Northrim continues to maintain capital levels in excess of the requirements to be categorized as “well-capitalized” with Tier 1 Capital to Risk Adjusted Assets of 9.80% at June 30, 2025, compared to 9.76% at March 31, 2025, and 11.68% at June 30, 2024.

    Asset Quality

    Northrim believes it has a consistent lending approach throughout economic cycles, which emphasizes appropriate loan-to-value ratios, adequate debt coverage ratios, and competent management.

    Nonperforming assets (“NPAs”) net of government guarantees were $11.9 million at June 30, 2025, down from $12.3 million at March 31, 2025 and up from $5.1 million a year ago. Of the NPAs at June 30, 2025, $4.2 million are attributable to the Community Banking segment and $7.5 million are attributable to the Specialty Finance segment.

    Net adversely classified loans were $35.8 million at June 30, 2025, as compared to $20.4 million at March 31, 2025, and $7.1 million a year ago. Adversely classified loans are loans that Northrim has classified as substandard, doubtful, and loss, net of government guarantees. The increase in adversely classified loans, net of government guarantees, at June 30, 2025 as compared to the prior quarter is mostly attributable to two commercial relationships totaling $16.0 million. Net loan charge-offs were $140,000 in the second quarter of 2025, compared to net loan recoveries of $34,000 in the first quarter of 2025, and net loan recoveries of $26,000 in the second quarter of 2024. Additionally, Northrim had 13 loan modifications to borrowers experiencing financial difficulty totaling $3.3 million, net of government guarantees that had been modified in the last twelve months as of June 30, 2025.

    Northrim had $141.2 million, or 6% of portfolio loans, in the Healthcare sector, $127.2 million, or 6% of portfolio loans, in the Tourism sector, $121.0 million, or 5% of portfolio loans, in the Accommodations sector, $93.4 million, or 4% of portfolio loans, in the Retail sector, $84.2 million, or 4% of portfolio loans, in the Aviation (non-tourism) sector, $76.2 million, or 3% of portfolio loans, in the Fishing sector, and $59.5 million, or 3% in the Restaurants and Breweries sector as of June 30, 2025.

    Northrim estimates that $105.9 million, or approximately 5% of portfolio loans, had direct exposure to the oil and gas industry in Alaska, as of June 30, 2025, and $1.5 million of these loans are adversely classified. As of June 30, 2025, Northrim has an additional $76.9 million in unfunded commitments to companies with direct exposure to the oil and gas industry in Alaska, and no unfunded commitments on adversely classified loans. Northrim defines direct exposure to the oil and gas sector as loans to borrowers that provide oilfield services and other companies that have been identified as significantly reliant upon activity in Alaska related to the oil and gas industry, such as lodging, equipment rental, transportation and other logistics services specific to this industry.

    About Northrim BanCorp

    Northrim BanCorp, Inc. is the parent company of Northrim Bank, an Alaska-based community bank with 20 branches throughout the state and differentiates itself with its detailed knowledge of Alaska’s economy and its “Customer First Service” philosophy. The Bank has two wholly-owned subsidiaries, Sallyport Commercial Finance, LLC, a specialty finance company and Residential Mortgage Holding Company, LLC, a regional home mortgage company. Pacific Wealth Advisors, LLC is an affiliated company.

    www.northrim.com

    Forward-Looking Statement

    This release may contain “forward-looking statements” as that term is defined for purposes of Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. These statements are, in effect, management’s attempt to predict future events, and thus are subject to various risks and uncertainties. Readers should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements, which reflect management’s views only as of the date hereof. All statements, other than statements of historical fact, regarding our financial position, business strategy, management’s plans and objectives for future operations are forward-looking statements. When used in this report, the words “anticipate,” “believe,” “estimate,” “expect,” and “intend” and words or phrases of similar meaning, as they relate to Northrim and its management are intended to help identify forward-looking statements. Although we believe that management’s expectations as reflected in forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot assure readers that those expectations will prove to be correct. Forward-looking statements, are subject to various risks and uncertainties that may cause our actual results to differ materially and adversely from our expectations as indicated in the forward-looking statements. These risks and uncertainties include: descriptions of Northrim’s and Sallyport’s financial condition, results of operations, asset based lending volumes, asset and credit quality trends and profitability and statements about the expected financial benefits and other effects of the acquisition of Sallyport by Northrim Bank; expected cost savings, synergies and other financial benefits from the acquisition of Sallyport by Northrim Bank might not be realized within the expected time frames and costs or difficulties relating to integration matters might be greater than expected; the ability of Northrim and Sallyport to execute their respective business plans; potential further increases in interest rates; the value of securities held in our investment portfolio; the impact of the results of government initiatives, including tariffs, on the regulatory landscape, natural resource extraction industries, and capital markets; the impact of declines in the value of commercial and residential real estate markets, high unemployment rates, inflationary pressures and slowdowns in economic growth; changes in banking regulation or actions by bank regulators; potential further increases in inflation, supply-chain constraints, and potential geopolitical instability, including the war in Ukraine and the conflict in the Middle East; financial stress on borrowers (consumers and businesses) as a result of higher rates or an uncertain economic environment; the general condition of, and changes in, the Alaska economy; our ability to maintain or expand our market share or net interest margin; the sufficiency of our allowance for credit losses and the accuracy of the assumptions or estimates used in preparing our financial statements, including those related to current expected credit losses accounting guidance; our ability to maintain asset quality; our ability to implement our marketing and growth strategies; our ability to identify and address cyber-security risks, including security breaches, “denial of service attacks,” “hacking,” and identity theft; disease outbreaks; and our ability to execute our business plan. Further, actual results may be affected by competition on price and other factors with other financial institutions; customer acceptance of new products and services; the regulatory environment in which we operate; and general trends in the local, regional and national banking industry and economy. In addition, there are risks inherent in the banking industry relating to collectability of loans and changes in interest rates. Many of these risks, as well as other risks that may have a material adverse impact on our operations and business, are identified in the “Risk Factors” section of our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2024, and from time to time are disclosed in our other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. However, you should be aware that these factors are not an exhaustive list, and you should not assume these are the only factors that may cause our actual results to differ from our expectations. These forward-looking statements are made only as of the date of this release, and Northrim does not undertake any obligation to release revisions to these forward-looking statements to reflect events or conditions after the date of this release.
    References:

    https://www.bea.gov/

    http://almis.labor.state.ak.us/

    http://www.tax.alaska.gov/programs/oil/prevailing/ans.aspx

    http://www.tax.state.ak.us/

    https://www.bls.gov/regions/west/news-release/consumerpriceindex_anchorage.htm

    https://www.alaskarealestate.com/MLSMember/RealEstateStatistics.aspx

    https://www.akleg.gov/basis/Bill/Text/34?Hsid=HJR011C

    https://www.trade.gov/data-visualization/tradestats-express-trade-partner-state

    https://tax.alaska.gov/programs/programs/reports/RSB.aspx?Year=2025&Type=Spring

    Home

    https://www.capitaliq.spglobal.com/web/client?auth=inherit&overridecdc=1&#markets/indexFinancials

    Contact: Mike Huston, President, CEO, and COO
      (907) 261-8750
      Jed Ballard, Chief Financial Officer
      (907) 261-3539
       
    Income Statement            
    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data) Three Months Ended   Year-to-date
    (Unaudited) June 30, March 31, June 30,   June 30, June 30,
        2025   2025     2024       2025   2024  
    Interest Income:            
    Interest and fees on loans $ 40,519 $ 37,470   $ 32,367     $ 77,989 $ 62,817  
    Interest on portfolio investments   3,765   3,675     4,310       7,440   8,830  
    Interest on deposits in banks   515   416     232       931   1,070  
    Total interest income   44,799   41,561     36,909       86,360   72,717  
    Interest Expense:            
    Interest expense on deposits   10,304   9,935     9,476       20,239   18,656  
    Interest expense on borrowings   903   329     380       1,232   561  
    Total interest expense   11,207   10,264     9,856       21,471   19,217  
    Net interest income   33,592   31,297     27,053       64,889   53,500  
                 
    Provision (benefit) for credit losses   1,976   (1,409 )   (120 )     567   29  
    Net interest income after provision for credit losses   31,616   32,706     27,173       64,322   53,471  
                 
    Other Operating Income:            
    Mortgage banking income   7,400   4,251     5,884       11,651   9,915  
    Purchased receivable income   5,897   6,100     1,242       12,047   2,587  
    Bankcard fees   1,153   1,074     1,105       2,227   2,022  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   726   677     572       1,403   1,121  
    Unrealized gain (loss) on marketable equity securities   78   (50 )   (60 )     28   254  
    Other income   1,386   988     834       2,324   1,522  
    Total other operating income   16,640   13,040     9,577       29,680   17,421  
                 
    Other Operating Expense:            
    Salaries and other personnel expense   20,854   17,223     16,627       38,077   32,044  
    Data processing expense   3,366   3,104     2,601       6,470   5,260  
    Occupancy expense   2,104   1,889     1,843       3,993   3,805  
    Professional and outside services   1,113   1,115     726       2,228   1,481  
    Marketing expense   1,042   672     690       1,714   1,203  
    Insurance expense   756   1,017     692       1,773   1,471  
    Compensation expense – SCF acquisition payments   600   600     —       1,200   —  
    OREO expense, net rental income and gains on sale   2   3     2       5   (389 )
    Other expense   2,651   2,548     2,013       5,199   3,957  
    Total other operating expense   32,488   28,171     25,194       60,659   48,832  
                 
    Income before provision for income taxes   15,768   17,575     11,556       33,343   22,060  
    Provision for income taxes   3,990   4,251     2,536       8,241   4,841  
    Net income $ 11,778 $ 13,324   $ 9,020     $ 25,102 $ 17,219  
                 
    Basic EPS $ 2.13 $ 2.41   $ 1.64     $ 4.54 $ 3.13  
    Diluted EPS $ 2.09 $ 2.38   $ 1.62     $ 4.47 $ 3.10  
    Weighted average shares outstanding, basic   5,521,811   5,519,998     5,500,588       5,520,905   5,500,083  
    Weighted average shares outstanding, diluted   5,611,558   5,608,102     5,558,580       5,611,734   5,562,025  
    Balance Sheet      
    (Dollars in thousands)      
    (Unaudited) June 30, March 31, June 30,
        2025     2025     2024  
           
    Assets:      
    Cash and due from banks $ 43,734   $ 29,671   $ 33,364  
    Interest bearing deposits in other banks   97,549     35,852     21,058  
    Investment securities available for sale, at fair value   429,421     463,096     584,964  
    Investment securities held to maturity   36,750     36,750     36,750  
    Marketable equity securities, at fair value   8,747     8,669     12,381  
    Investment in Federal Home Loan Bank stock   8,343     5,342     4,929  
    Loans held for sale   127,116     159,603     85,926  
           
    Portfolio loans   2,202,115     2,124,330     1,875,907  
    Allowance for credit losses, loans   (22,585 )   (20,922 )   (17,694 )
    Net portfolio loans   2,179,530     2,103,408     1,858,213  
    Purchased receivables, net   109,098     95,489     25,722  
    Mortgage servicing rights, at fair value   27,506     26,814     21,077  
    Other real estate owned, net   —     —     —  
    Premises and equipment, net   36,501     37,070     40,393  
    Lease right of use asset   7,033     7,632     8,244  
    Goodwill and intangible assets   50,824     50,824     15,967  
    Other assets   81,608     80,740     72,680  
    Total assets $ 3,243,760   $ 3,140,960   $ 2,821,668  
           
    Liabilities:      
    Demand deposits $ 777,948   $ 742,560   $ 704,471  
    Interest-bearing demand   1,196,048     1,187,465     906,010  
    Savings deposits   248,141     256,650     238,156  
    Money market deposits   196,166     193,842     195,159  
    Time deposits   390,867     397,460     420,010  
    Total deposits   2,809,170     2,777,977     2,463,806  
    Other borrowings   63,026     13,136     43,961  
    Junior subordinated debentures   10,310     10,310     10,310  
    Lease liability   7,077     7,682     8,269  
    Other liabilities   63,958     52,099     48,122  
    Total liabilities   2,953,541     2,861,204     2,574,468  
           
    Shareholders’ Equity:      
    Total shareholders’ equity   290,219     279,756     247,200  
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 3,243,760   $ 3,140,960   $ 2,821,668  
           

    Additional Financial Information
    (Dollars in thousands)
    (Unaudited)

    Composition of Portfolio Loans                        
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
      Balance % of
    total
      Balance % of
    total
      Balance % of
    total
      Balance % of
    total
      Balance % of
    total
    Commercial loans $ 569,753   27 %   $ 573,593   27 %   $ 518,148   24 %   $ 492,414   24 %   $ 495,781   26 %
    Commercial real estate:                            
    Owner occupied properties   447,561   20 %     430,442   20 %     420,060   20 %     412,827   20 %     383,832   20 %
    Nonowner occupied and                            
    multifamily properties   696,766   31 %     690,277   32 %     619,431   29 %     584,302   31 %     551,130   30 %
    Residential real estate:                            
    1-4 family properties                            
    secured by first liens   206,905   9 %     188,219   9 %     270,535   13 %     248,514   12 %     222,026   12 %
    1-4 family properties                            
    secured by junior liens &                            
    revolving secured by first liens   60,118   3 %     53,836   3 %     48,857   2 %     45,262   2 %     41,258   2 %
    1-4 family construction   36,005   2 %     34,017   2 %     39,789   2 %     39,794   2 %     29,510   2 %
    Construction loans   187,442   8 %     156,211   7 %     214,068   10 %     185,362   9 %     154,009   8 %
    Consumer loans   7,570   — %     7,424   — %     7,562   — %     7,836   — %     6,679   — %
    Subtotal   2,212,120         2,134,019         2,138,450         2,016,311         1,884,225    
    Unearned loan fees, net   (10,005 )       (9,689 )       (9,187 )       (8,746 )       (8,318 )  
    Total portfolio loans $ 2,202,115       $ 2,124,330       $ 2,129,263       $ 2,007,565       $ 1,875,907    
                                 
    Composition of Deposits                        
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
      Balance % of total   Balance % of total   Balance % of total   Balance % of total   Balance % of total
    Demand deposits $ 777,948 28 %   $ 742,560 27 %   $ 706,225 27 %   $ 763,595 29 %   $ 704,471 29 %
    Interest-bearing demand   1,196,048 42 %     1,187,465 43 %     1,108,404 41 %     979,238 37 %     906,010 36 %
    Savings deposits   248,141 9 %     256,650 9 %     250,900 9 %     245,043 9 %     238,156 10 %
    Money market deposits   196,166 7 %     193,842 7 %     196,290 7 %     204,821 8 %     195,159 8 %
    Time deposits   390,867 14 %     397,460 14 %     418,370 16 %     435,870 17 %     420,010 17 %
    Total deposits $ 2,809,170     $ 2,777,977     $ 2,680,189     $ 2,628,567     $ 2,463,806  


    Additional Financial Information

    (Dollars in thousands)
    (Unaudited)

    Asset Quality June 30,   March 31,   June 30,  
        2025     2025     2024  
    Nonaccrual loans – Community Banking $ 4,180   $ 4,274   $ 4,233  
    Nonaccrual loans – Home Mortgage Lending   197     221     253  
    Nonaccrual loans – Specialty Finance   3,484     3,573     344  
    Nonaccrual loans – Total   7,861     8,068     4,830  
    Loans 90 days past due and accruing – Community Banking   —     —     17  
    Loans 90 days past due and accruing – Total   —     —     17  
    Total nonperforming loans – Community Banking   4,180     4,274     4,250  
    Total nonperforming loans – Home Mortgage Lending   197     221     253  
    Total nonperforming loans – Specialty Finance   3,484     3,573     344  
    Total nonperforming loans – Total   7,861     8,068     4,847  
    Nonperforming loans guaranteed by gov’t – Community Banking   70     80     —  
    Nonperforming loans guaranteed by gov’t – Total   70     80     —  
    Net nonperforming loans – Community Banking   4,110     4,194     4,250  
    Net nonperforming loans – Home Mortgage Lending   197     221     253  
    Net nonperforming loans – Specialty Finance   3,484     3,573     344  
    Net nonperforming loans – Total   7,791     7,988     4,847  
                 
    Repossessed assets – Community Banking   50     297     297  
    Repossessed assets – Total   50     297     297  
                 
    Nonperforming purchased receivables – Specialty Finance   4,017     4,007     —  
                 
    Net nonperforming assets – Community Banking   4,160     4,491     4,547  
    Net nonperforming assets – Home Mortgage Lending   197     221     253  
    Net nonperforming assets – Specialty Finance   7,501     7,580     344  
    Net nonperforming assets – Total $ 11,858   $ 12,292   $ 5,144  
                 
    Adversely classified loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Community Banking $ 32,128   $ 16,592   $ 6,006  
    Adversely classified loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Home Mortgage Lending   223     252     718  
    Adversely classified loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Specialty Finance   3,484     3,573     344  
    Adversely classified loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Total $ 35,835   $ 20,417   $ 7,068  
                 
    Special mention loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Community Banking $ 3,966   $ 14,496   $ 8,902  
    Special mention loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Home Mortgage Lending   790     637     —  
    Special mention loans, net of gov’t guarantees – Total $ 4,756   $ 15,133   $ 8,902  
    Asset Quality, Continued June 30,   March 31,   June 30,  
        2025       2025       2024    
    Nonperforming loans, net of government guarantees / portfolio loans   0.35   %   0.38   %   0.26   %
    Nonperforming loans, net of government guarantees / portfolio loans,            
    net of government guarantees   0.38   %   0.40   %   0.28   %
    Nonperforming assets, net of government guarantees / total assets   0.37   %   0.39   %   0.18   %
    Nonperforming assets, net of government guarantees / total assets            
    net of government guarantees   0.38   %   0.41   %   0.19   %
                 
    Loans 30-89 days past due and accruing, net of government guarantees /       %    
    portfolio loans   0.06   %   0.04   %   0.03   %
    Loans 30-89 days past due and accruing, net of government guarantees /            
    portfolio loans, net of government guarantees   0.06   %   0.04   %   0.04   %
                 
    Allowance for credit losses for loans / portfolio loans   1.03   %   0.98   %   0.94   %
    Allowance for credit losses for loans / portfolio loans, net of gov’t guarantees   1.10   %   1.06   %   1.01   %
    Allowance for credit losses for loans / nonperforming loans, net of            
    government guarantees   290   %   262   %   365   %
                 
    Gross loan charge-offs for the quarter – Community Banking $3     $50     $—    
    Gross loan charge-offs for the quarter – Specialty Finance   152       —       —    
    Gross loan charge-offs for the quarter – Total   155       50       —    
                 
    Gross loan recoveries for the quarter – Community Banking   (15 )     (84 )     (26 )  
    Gross loan recoveries for the quarter – Home Mortgage Lending   —       —       —    
    Gross loan recoveries for the quarter – Specialty Finance   —       —       —    
    Gross loan recoveries for the quarter – Total ($15 )   ($84 )   ($26 )  
                 
    Net loan (recoveries) charge-offs for the quarter – Community Banking ($12 )   ($34 )   ($26 )  
    Net loan (recoveries) charge-offs for the quarter – Specialty Finance   152       —       —    
    Net loan (recoveries) charge-offs for the quarter – Total $140     ($34 )   ($26 )  
                 
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date – Community Banking ($46 )   ($34 )   ($68 )  
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date – Specialty Finance   152       —       —    
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date – Total $106     ($34 )   ($68 )  
                 
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) for the quarter / average loans, for the quarter   0.01   %   —   %   —   %
                 
    Net loan charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date / average loans,            
    year-to-date annualized   0.01   %   (0.01 ) %   (0.01 ) %
                 
    Allowance for credit losses for purchased receivables / purchased receivables   3.05   %   3.72   %   —   %
                 
    Net purchased receivable charge-offs (recoveries) for the quarter $281     $—     $—    
                 
    Net purchased receivable charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date $281     $—     $—    
                 
    Net purchased receivable charge-offs (recoveries) for the quarter /            
    average purchased receivables, for the quarter   0.27   % NA   NA  
                 
    Net purchased receivable charge-offs (recoveries) year-to-date / average            
    purchased receivables, year-to-date annualized   0.61   % NA   NA  


    Additional Financial Information

    (Dollars in thousands)
    (Unaudited)

    Average Balances, Yields, and Rates                
      Three Months Ended
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024
        Average     Average     Average
      Average Tax Equivalent   Average Tax Equivalent   Average Tax Equivalent
      Balance Yield/Rate   Balance Yield/Rate   Balance Yield/Rate
    Assets                
    Interest bearing deposits in other banks $ 27,216   7.60 %   $ 37,969   4.44 %   $ 17,352   5.27 %
    Portfolio investments   515,916   3.07 %     523,753   2.97 %     639,980   2.82 %
    Loans held for sale   173,675   6.50 %     46,223   5.86 %     65,102   6.08 %
    Portfolio loans   2,172,482   6.99 %     2,173,425   6.89 %     1,845,832   6.87 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,889,289   6.27 %     2,781,370   6.10 %     2,568,266   5.83 %
    Nonearning assets   306,206         293,415         204,509    
    Total assets $ 3,195,495       $ 3,074,785       $ 2,772,775    
                     
    Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity                
    Interest-bearing deposits $ 2,029,100   2.04 %   $ 2,002,594   2.01 %   $ 1,725,013   2.21 %
    Borrowings   86,404   4.14 %     37,081   3.55 %     38,390   3.92 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   2,115,504   2.12 %     2,039,675   2.04 %     1,763,403   2.25 %
                     
    Noninterest-bearing demand deposits   737,112         697,534         706,339    
    Other liabilities   54,320         63,348         58,549    
    Shareholders’ equity   288,559         274,228         244,484    
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 3,195,495       $ 3,074,785       $ 2,772,775    
    Net spread   4.15 %     4.06 %     3.58 %
    NIM   4.66 %     4.55 %     4.24 %
    NIMTE*   4.72 %     4.61 %     4.30 %
    Cost of funds   1.57 %     1.52 %     1.60 %
    Average portfolio loans to average                
    interest-earning assets   75.19 %       78.14 %       71.87 %  
    Average portfolio loans to average total deposits   78.54 %       80.49 %       75.92 %  
    Average non-interest deposits to average                
    total deposits   26.65 %       25.83 %       29.05 %  
    Average interest-earning assets to average                
    interest-bearing liabilities   136.58 %       136.36 %       145.64 %  


    Additional Financial Information

    (Dollars in thousands)
    (Unaudited)

    Average Balances, Yields, and Rates          
      Year-to-date
      June 30, 2025   June 30, 2024
        Average     Average
      Average Tax Equivalent   Average Tax Equivalent
      Balance Yield/Rate   Balance Yield/Rate
    Assets          
    Interest bearing deposits in other banks $ 32,563   5.77 %   $ 39,457   5.36 %
    Portfolio investments   519,813   3.02 %     655,458   2.82 %
    Loans held for sale   110,301   6.35 %     48,868   6.10 %
    Portfolio loans   2,172,950   6.94 %     1,819,629   6.81 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,835,627   6.19 %     2,563,412   5.76 %
    Nonearning assets   299,848         202,819    
    Total assets $ 3,135,475       $ 2,766,231    
               
    Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity          
    Interest-bearing deposits $ 2,015,920   2.02 %   $ 1,728,468   2.17 %
    Borrowings   61,879   3.96 %     31,167   3.55 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   2,077,799   2.08 %     1,759,635   2.19 %
               
    Noninterest-bearing demand deposits   717,432         705,736    
    Other liabilities   58,809         59,478    
    Shareholders’ equity   281,435         241,382    
    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $ 3,135,475       $ 2,766,231    
    Net spread   4.11 %     3.57 %
    NIM   4.61 %     4.20 %
    NIMTE*   4.66 %     4.26 %
    Cost of funds   1.55 %     1.57 %
    Average portfolio loans to average interest-earning assets   76.63 %       70.98 %  
    Average portfolio loans to average total deposits   79.50 %       74.75 %  
    Average non-interest deposits to average total deposits   26.25 %       28.99 %  
    Average interest-earning assets to average interest-bearing liabilities   136.47 %       145.68 %  


    Additional Financial Information

    (Dollars in thousands, except per share data)
    (Unaudited)

    Capital Data (At quarter end)            
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    Book value per share $52.55     $50.67     $44.93    
    Tangible book value per share* $43.35     $41.47     $42.03    
    Total shareholders’ equity/total assets   8.95   %   8.91   %   8.76   %
    Tangible Common Equity/Tangible Assets*   7.50   %   7.41   %   8.24   %
    Tier 1 Capital / Risk Adjusted Assets   9.80   %   9.76   %   11.68   %
    Total Capital / Risk Adjusted Assets   10.71   %   10.62   %   12.58   %
    Tier 1 Capital / Average Assets   7.99   %   8.02   %   9.17   %
    Shares outstanding   5,522,271       5,520,892       5,501,562    
    Total unrealized loss on AFS debt securities, net of income taxes ($3,571 )   ($5,452 )   ($15,197 )  
    Total unrealized gain on derivatives and hedging activities, net of income taxes $1,026     $1,097     $1,212    
    Profitability Ratios                    
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024  
    For the quarter:                    
    NIM 4.66 % 4.55 % 4.41 % 4.29 % 4.24 %
    NIMTE* 4.72 % 4.61 % 4.47 % 4.35 % 4.30 %
    Efficiency ratio 64.68 % 63.54 % 66.96 % 66.11 % 68.78 %
    Return on average assets 1.48 % 1.76 % 1.43 % 1.22 % 1.31 %
    Return on average equity 16.37 % 19.70 % 16.32 % 13.69 % 14.84 %
      June 30, 2025   June 30, 2024  
    Year-to-date:        
    NIM 4.61 % 4.20 %
    NIMTE* 4.66 % 4.26 %
    Efficiency ratio 64.14 % 68.85 %
    Return on average assets 1.61 % 1.25 %
    Return on average equity 17.99 % 14.35 %


    *Non-GAAP Financial Measures

    (Dollars and shares in thousands, except per share data)
    (Unaudited)

    Non-GAAP financial measures have inherent limitations, are not required to be uniformly applied, and are not audited. Although we believe these non-GAAP financial measures are frequently used by stakeholders in the evaluation of the Company, they have limitations as analytical tools and should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for analysis of results as reported under GAAP.

    Net interest margin on a tax equivalent basis

    Net interest margin on a tax equivalent basis (“NIMTE”) is a non-GAAP performance measurement in which interest income on non-taxable investments and loans is presented on a tax equivalent basis using a combined federal and state statutory rate of 28.43% in both 2025 and 2024. The most comparable GAAP measure is net interest margin and the following table sets forth the reconciliation of NIMTE to net interest margin for the periods indicated.

      Three Months Ended
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
    Net interest income $ 33,592     $ 31,297     $ 30,841     $ 28,842     $ 27,053  
    Divided by average interest-bearing assets   2,889,289       2,781,370       2,787,517       2,674,291       2,568,266  
    Net interest margin (“NIM”)2   4.66 %     4.55 %     4.41 %     4.29 %     4.24 %
                       
    Net interest income $ 33,592     $ 31,297     $ 30,841     $ 28,842     $ 27,053  
    Plus: reduction in tax expense related to                  
    tax-exempt interest income   409       379       379       385       378  
      $ 34,001     $ 31,676     $ 31,220     $ 29,227     $ 27,431  
    Divided by average interest-bearing assets   2,889,289       2,781,370       2,787,517       2,674,291       2,568,266  
    NIMTE2   4.72 %     4.61 %     4.47 %     4.35 %     4.30 %
      Year-to-date
      June 30, 2025   June 30, 2024
    Net interest income $ 64,889     $ 53,500  
    Divided by average interest-bearing assets   2,835,627       2,563,412  
    Net interest margin (“NIM”)3   4.61 %     4.20 %
           
    Net interest income $ 64,889     $ 53,500  
    Plus: reduction in tax expense related to      
    tax-exempt interest income   788       757  
      $ 65,677     $ 54,257  
    Divided by average interest-bearing assets   2,835,627       2,563,412  
    NIMTE3   4.66 %     4.26 %

    2Calculated using actual days in the quarter divided by 365 for the quarters ended in 2025 and 366 for the quarters ended in 2024, respectively.

    3Calculated using actual days in the year divided by 365 for year-to-date period in 2025 and 366 for year-to-date period in 2024, respectively.

    *Non-GAAP Financial Measures
    (Dollars and shares in thousands, except per share data)
    (Unaudited)

    Tangible Book Value Per Share

    Tangible book value per share is a non-GAAP measure defined as shareholders’ equity, less intangible assets, divided by shares outstanding. The most comparable GAAP measure is book value per share and the following table sets forth the reconciliation of tangible book value per share and book value per share for the periods indicated.

      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
                       
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 290,219   $ 279,756   $ 267,116   $ 260,050   $ 247,200
    Divided by shares outstanding   5,522     5,521     5,518     5,502     5,502
    Book value per share $ 52.55   $ 50.68   $ 48.41   $ 47.26   $ 44.93
      June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
                       
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 290,219   $ 279,756   $ 267,116   $ 260,050   $ 247,200
    Less: goodwill and intangible assets   50,824     50,824     50,968     15,967     15,967
      $ 239,395   $ 228,932   $ 216,148   $ 244,083   $ 231,233
    Divided by shares outstanding   5,522     5,521     5,518     5,502     5,502
    Tangible book value per share $ 43.35   $ 41.47   $ 39.17   $ 44.36   $ 42.03


    Tangible Common Equity to Tangible Assets

    Tangible common equity to tangible assets is a non-GAAP ratio that represents total equity less goodwill and intangible assets divided by total assets less goodwill and intangible assets. The most comparable GAAP measure of shareholders’ equity to total assets is calculated by dividing total shareholders’ equity by total assets and the following table sets forth the reconciliation of tangible common equity to tangible assets and shareholders’ equity to total assets for the periods indicated.

    Northrim BanCorp, Inc. June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
                       
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 290,219     $ 279,756     $ 267,116     $ 260,050     $ 247,200  
    Total assets   3,243,760       3,140,960       3,041,869       2,963,392       2,821,668  
    Total shareholders’ equity to total assets   8.95 %     8.91 %     8.78 %     8.78 %     8.76 %
    Northrim BanCorp, Inc. June 30, 2025   March 31, 2025   December 31,
    2024
      September 30,
    2024
      June 30, 2024
    Total shareholders’ equity $ 290,219     $ 279,756     $ 267,116     $ 260,050     $ 247,200  
    Less: goodwill and other intangible assets, net   50,824       50,824       50,968       15,967       15,967  
    Tangible common shareholders’ equity $ 239,395     $ 228,932     $ 216,148     $ 244,083     $ 231,233  
                       
    Total assets $ 3,243,760     $ 3,140,960     $ 3,041,869     $ 2,963,392     $ 2,821,668  
    Less: goodwill and other intangible assets, net   50,824       50,824       50,968       15,967       15,967  
    Tangible assets $ 3,192,936     $ 3,090,136     $ 2,990,901     $ 2,947,425     $ 2,805,701  
    Tangible common equity ratio   7.50 %     7.41 %     7.23 %     8.28 %     8.24 %

    Note Transmitted on GlobeNewswire on July 23, 2025, at 12:15 pm Alaska Standard Time.

    The MIL Network –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: Hanover Bancorp, Inc. Reports Second Quarter 2025 Results Highlighted by Strong Demand Deposit Growth, Continued Margin Expansion and Its Inclusion in the Russell 2000 Index

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Second Quarter Performance Highlights

    • Net Income: Net income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 totaled $2.4 million or $0.33 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares).
    • Pre-Provision Net Revenue: Pre-provision net revenue was $5.7 million resulting in a return on average assets of 1.04% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 which was the highest level since the first quarter of 2023.
    • Net Interest Income: Net interest income was $14.8 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $0.2 million, or 1.13% from the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and $1.5 million, or 11.69%, from the quarter ended June 30, 2024.
    • Net Interest Margin Expansion: The Company’s net interest margin during the quarter ended June 30, 2025 increased to 2.76% from 2.68% in the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and 2.46% in the quarter ended June 30, 2024.
    • Demand Deposit Growth: Demand deposits increased $28.1 million, or 13.03%, from March 31, 2025 and $32.0 million, or 15.12%, from December 31, 2024, underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals.  
    • Strong Liquidity Position: At June 30, 2025, undrawn liquidity sources, which include cash and unencumbered securities and secured and unsecured funding capacity, totaled $686.5 million, or approximately 274% of uninsured deposit balances.   Insured and collateralized deposits, which include municipal deposits, accounted for approximately 87% of total deposits at June 30, 2025.
    • Loan Diversification Strategy: The Company continues to actively manage its Multi-Family and Commercial Real Estate portfolios which resulted in a reduction in the commercial real estate concentration ratio to 368% of capital at June 30, 2025 from 385% at December 31, 2024 and 403% at June 30, 2024. The Company continues to focus loan growth primarily in residential loan products originated for sale to specific buyers in the secondary market, C&I and SBA loans. The Company will selectively explore Commercial Real Estate opportunities with an emphasis on relationship based Commercial Real Estate lending.
    • Asset Quality: At June 30, 2025, the Bank’s asset quality metrics remained solid with non-performing loans totaling $12.7 million, representing 0.64% of the total loan portfolio, and the allowance for credit losses equaling 1.10% of total loans, a decrease from non-performing loans totaling $16.4 million, representing 0.82% of the total loan portfolio, as of December 31, 2024.
    • Port Jefferson Branch: In June 2025, the Company continued its strategic expansion in Suffolk County Long Island with the opening of its tenth branch in Port Jefferson, New York. The Company will continue to be opportunistic in furthering its expansion into the underserved markets of Eastern Long Island.
    • Inclusion in Russell 2000: The Company was added to the Russell 2000 Index in late June 2025. The Russell 2000 Index encompasses the 2,000 largest U.S.-traded stocks by objective, market-capitalization rankings, and style attributes. The Russell Indexes are widely used by investment managers and institutional investors for index funds and as benchmarks for active investment strategies.
    • Quarterly Cash Dividend: The Company’s Board of Directors approved a $0.10 per share cash dividend on both common and Series A preferred shares payable on August 13, 2025 to stockholders of record on August 6, 2025.

    MINEOLA, N.Y., July 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Hanover Bancorp, Inc. (“Hanover” or “the Company” – NASDAQ: HNVR), the holding company for Hanover Community Bank (“the Bank”), today reported results for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 and the declaration of a $0.10 per share cash dividend on both common and Series A preferred shares payable on August 13, 2025 to stockholders of record on August 6, 2025.

    Earnings Summary for the Quarter Ended June 30, 2025

    The Company reported net income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 of $2.4 million or $0.33 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares), versus $0.8 million (after giving effect to an allowance for credit loss (“ACL”) on an individually evaluated loan of $2.5 million and a $1.1 million provision resulting from ongoing enhancements to the current expected credit loss (“CECL”) model) or $0.11 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares) in the quarter ended June 30, 2024. Returns on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.44%, 4.93% and 5.46%, respectively, for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.15%, 1.77% and 1.97%, respectively, for the comparable quarter of 2024.

    The increase in net income recorded in the second quarter of 2025 from the comparable 2024 quarter resulted from an increase in net interest income and a decrease in provision for credit losses. These were partially offset by the increase in non-interest expenses, particularly compensation and benefits, and an increase in income tax expense.   The increase in compensation and benefits expense in the second quarter of 2025 versus the comparable 2024 quarter was primarily related to the staffing of the newly opened Port Jefferson branch and additions to the C&I Banking teams, partially offset by lower incentive compensation expense resulting from reduced lending activity and other expense reduction initiatives. The Company’s effective tax rate was 27.8% in the second quarter of 2025 and 27.2% in the comparable 2024 quarter. We expect a normalized run rate of 25.0% for the remainder of the year.

    Net interest income was $14.8 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $1.5 million, or 11.69% from the comparable 2024 quarter. This increase was due to improvement of the Company’s net interest margin to 2.76% in the 2025 quarter from 2.46% in the comparable 2024 quarter. The cost of interest-bearing liabilities decreased to 3.94% in the 2025 quarter from 4.48% in the comparable 2024 quarter, a decrease of 54 basis points. This decrease was partially offset by a 24 basis point decrease in the yield on interest earning assets to 5.98% in the 2025 quarter from 6.22% in the second quarter of 2024. Net interest income on a linked quarter basis increased $0.2 million or 1.13%, due to an 8 basis point increase in net interest margin resulting from a 7 basis point decrease in cost of interest-bearing liabilities, partially offset by a 3 basis point decrease on yield on interest earning assets.

    Earnings Summary for the Six Months Ended June 30, 2025

    For the six months ended June 30, 2025, the Company reported net income of $4.0 million or $0.53 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares), versus $4.9 million or $0.66 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares) in the comparable 2024 six-month period. The Company recorded adjusted (non-GAAP) net income (excluding core system conversion expenses of $2.6 million, net of tax) of $6.5 million or $0.87 per diluted share in the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus net income of $4.9 million or $0.66 per diluted share in the comparable 2024 six-month period (which included no adjustments). Returns on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.36%, 4.02% and 4.46%, respectively, for the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.44%, 5.20% and 5.80%, respectively, for the comparable 2024 period. Adjusted (non-GAAP) returns, exclusive of core system conversion expenses on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.59%, 6.63% and 7.35%, respectively, in the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.44%, 5.20% and 5.80%, respectively, in the comparable of 2024 period.

    The decrease in net income recorded for the six months ended June 30, 2025 from the comparable 2024 period is due to an increase in non-interest expenses, particularly compensation and benefits and the one-time core system conversion expenses. These were partially offset by an increase in net interest income and a decrease in provision for credit losses. The increase in compensation and benefits expense for the six months ended June 30, 2025 versus the comparable 2024 period was primarily related to additional headcount to staff the new Port Jefferson branch and expansion of the C&I lending vertical and lower deferred loan origination costs partially offset by lower incentive compensation expense resulting from reduced lending activity. The Company’s effective tax rate decreased to 23.0% for the six months ended June 30, 2025 from 25.3% in the comparable 2024 period.

    Net interest income was $29.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $3.2 million, or 12.38% from the comparable 2024 period, due to the improvement of the Company’s net interest margin to 2.72% in the 2025 period from 2.43% in the comparable 2024 period. The cost of interest-bearing liabilities decreased to 3.98% in the 2025 six months period from 4.41% in the comparable 2024 period, a decrease of 43 basis points. This decrease was partially offset by a 13 basis point decrease in the yield on interest earning assets to 5.99% in the 2025 period from 6.12% in the comparable 2024 period. The increase in the net interest margin was a result of the late 2024 reductions in the Fed Funds effective rate and the liability sensitive nature of the Bank’s balance sheet.

    Michael P. Puorro, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, commented on the Company’s quarterly results: “Our second quarter performance, reflects a number of high notes, including increased Pre-Provision Net Revenue of $5.7 million, strong non-interest bearing deposit growth of $28.1 million, underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals, and continued improvement in our Net Interest Margin. We are extremely pleased with the recent opening of our Port Jefferson branch and will continue to be opportunistic in furthering our expansion into the underserved markets of Eastern Long Island. With our inclusion in the Russell 2000, the continued development of our diversified revenue verticals and liability sensitive balance sheet, we look forward to delivering continued shareholder value and the eventual benefits of a more favorable interest rate environment.”

    Balance Sheet Highlights

    Total assets were $2.31 billion at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. Total securities available for sale at June 30, 2025 were $102.6 million, an increase of $18.9 million from December 31, 2024, primarily driven by growth in collateralized mortgage obligations, collateralized loan obligations and corporate bonds.

    Total deposits were $1.95 billion at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. Total deposits increased $9.4 million or 0.48% from June 30, 2024. Demand deposits increased $43.8 million or 21.93% from June 30, 2024 and $32.0 million, or 15.12%, from December 31, 2024 underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals.   Our loan to deposit ratio improved to 101% at June 30, 2025 from 102% at December 31, 2024.

    The Company had $517.4 million in total municipal deposits at June 30, 2025, at a weighted average rate of 3.67% versus $509.3 million at a weighted average rate of 3.72% at December 31, 2024 and $452.6 million at a weighted average rate of 4.61% at June 30, 2024. The Company’s municipal deposit program is built on long-standing relationships developed in the local marketplace. This core deposit business will continue to provide a stable source of funding for the Company’s lending products at costs lower than those of consumer deposits and market-based borrowings.   The Company continues to broaden its municipal deposit base and currently services 40 customer relationships.

    Total borrowings at June 30, 2025 were $107.8 million, with a weighted average rate and term of 4.11% and 17 months, respectively. At June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024, the Company had $107.8 million of term FHLB advances outstanding. The Company had no FHLB overnight borrowings outstanding at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. The Company had no borrowings outstanding under lines of credit with correspondent banks at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024.

    Stockholders’ equity was $198.9 million at June 30, 2025 and compared to $196.6 million at December 31, 2024. Retained earnings increased by $2.5 million due primarily to net income of $4.0 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025, which was offset by $1.5 million of dividends declared. The accumulated other comprehensive loss at June 30, 2025 was 0.62% of total equity and was comprised of a $0.7 million after tax net unrealized loss on the investment portfolio and a $0.5 million after tax net unrealized loss on derivatives.   Tangible book value per share (including Series A preferred shares) was $23.94 at June 30, 2025 compared to $23.86 at December 31, 2024.

    Loan Portfolio

    For the six months ended June 30, 2025, the Bank’s loan portfolio decreased $19.1 million to $1.97 billion from December 31, 2024. The decrease resulted primarily from the ongoing management of our commercial real estate and multifamily loan concentrations. On a linked quarter basis, net loans increased $5.8 million. At June 30, 2025, the Company’s residential loan portfolio (including home equity) amounted to $738.8 million, with an average loan balance of $489 thousand and a weighted average loan-to-value ratio of 57%.   Commercial real estate (including construction) and multifamily loans totaled $1.08 billion at June 30, 2025, with an average loan balance of $1.5 million and a weighted average loan-to-value ratio of 59%. As will be discussed below, approximately 36% of the multifamily portfolio is subject to rent regulation. The Company’s commercial real estate concentration ratio continues to improve, decreasing to 368% of capital at June 30, 2025 from 385% at December 31, 2024 and 403% at June 30, 2024, with loans secured by office space accounting for 2.48% of the total loan portfolio and totaling $48.9 million at June 30, 2025. The Company’s loan pipeline with executed term sheets at June 30, 2025 is approximately $190.2 million, with approximately 81% being niche-residential, conventional C&I, SBA and USDA lending opportunities.

    The Bank remains focused on expanding its core verticals and continues to originate loans for its portfolio and for sale in the secondary market under its residential flow origination program. The Bank originated $62.2 million in residential loans in the quarter ended June 30, 2025. During the quarters ended June 30, 2025 and 2024, the Company sold $23.7 million and $2.9 million, respectively, of residential loans under its flow origination program and recorded gains on sale of loans held-for-sale of $0.5 million and $0.1 million, respectively.

    During the quarters ended June 30, 2025 and 2024, the Company sold approximately $22.3 million and $28.0 million, respectively, in government guaranteed SBA loans and recorded gains on sale of loans held-for-sale of $1.8 million and $2.5 million, respectively. SBA loan originations and gains on sale were lower than expected due to a confluence of factors. One factor is the impact of the “higher-for-longer” interest rate environment that we believe has both worsened the financial condition of and reduced demand among small business borrowers, resulting in a lower volume of creditworthy customers. Another factor is the negative impact of and uncertainty created by tariffs, which we believe have also dampened loan demand among borrowers in certain industries. A third factor is the Bank’s decision to tighten credit over the course of the last year. Although management continues to believe this to be a prudent measure, it has nonetheless resulted in a lower volume of loan approvals, causing the Bank to re-evaluate the number and caliber of its business development officers. Taken together these and other factors have adversely impacted SBA loan originations and closings. With the addition of additional business development officers in the second half of 2025, we anticipate higher volumes of eligible loans as we transition into 2026. The Bank concluded the second quarter of 2025 with C&I loan originations of approximately $29.3 million. Based on its existing pipeline, the Bank expects C&I lending and deposit activity to grow as the year progresses.

    Commercial Real Estate Statistics

    A significant portion of the Bank’s commercial real estate portfolio consists of loans secured by Multi-Family and CRE-Investor owned real estate that are predominantly subject to fixed interest rates for an initial period of 5 years. The Bank’s exposure to Land/Construction loans is minor at $8.2 million, all at floating interest rates. As shown below, 31% of the loan balances in these combined portfolios will either have a rate reset or mature in 2025 and 2026, with another 57% with rate resets or maturing in 2027.

    Multi-Family Market Rent Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule   Multi-Family Stabilized Rent Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule
    Calendar Period   #
    Loans
      Total O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
      Calendar Period   #
    Loans
      Total O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
                                                                         
    2025     7     $ 8,609     $ 1,230       5.29 %   2025     8     $ 14,950     $ 1,869       4.54 %
    2026     36       117,249       3,257       3.66 %   2026     20       42,310       2,115       3.67 %
    2027     70       185,157       2,645       4.41 %   2027     51       122,901       2,410       4.22 %
    2028     16       21,310       1,332       6.20 %   2028     12       10,117       843       7.14 %
    2029     6       4,924       821       7.70 %   2029     4       4,313       1,078       6.38 %
    2030+     3       6,667       2,222       3.68 %   2030+     4       1,099       275       6.04 %
    Fixed Rate     138       343,916       2,492       4.32 %   Fixed Rate     99       195,690       1,977       4.34 %
    Floating Rate     2       347       174       9.50 %   Floating Rate     —       —       —       — %
    Total     140     $ 344,263     $ 2,459       4.33 %   Total     99     $ 195,690     $ 1,977       4.34 %
                                                                         
    CRE Investor Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule
    Calendar Period   # Loans   Total O/S ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
                                     
    2025     25     $ 33,503     $ 1,340       7.28 %
    2026     30       35,702       1,190       4.90 %
    2027     89       156,924       1,763       4.86 %
    2028     28       30,868       1,102       6.65 %
    2029     4       2,336       584       7.04 %
    2030+     15       8,999       600       6.46 %
    Fixed Rate     191       268,332       1,405       5.45 %
    Floating Rate     6       11,905       1,984       9.50 %
    Total CRE-Inv.     197     $ 280,237     $ 1,423       5.62 %
                                     

    Stabilized Multi-Family Pro Forma Stress Results

    The table below reflects a proforma stressed evaluation of the Bank’s Multifamily stabilized loan portfolio, using the primary assumption for a revised Debt Service Coverage Ratio (“DSCR”) calculation, for all loans where the current interest rate is below 6%. The current balance for these loans is recast at 6% with a 30-year amortization. The chart below reflects the impact of these adjustments on the portfolio. The projected loan to value (“LTV”) assumption resets all loans using a 6% cap rate and the last reported property net operating income (“NOI”) to determine an implied property valuation and based on the current loan balance the resultant LTV.

    Multi-Family Stabilized Rent Portfolio
    DSCR Range        # Loans      Total O/S
    ($000’s omitted)
       % of Total
    MF
    Portfolio
      Current
    Weighted 
    Average
    LTV
      Projected
    Weighted 
    Average
    LTV
                                     
    < 1.0   10     $ 18,153     3 %   61 %   95 %
    1.0 < x  < 1.2   24       69,751     13 %   65 %   74 %
    1.2 < x  < 1.3   20       34,897     6 %   62 %   67 %
    1.3 < x  < 1.5   15       38,547     7 %   63 %   61 %
    1.5 < x  < 2.0   18       25,805     5 %   58 %   53 %
    x  > 2.0   12       8,537     2 %   43 %   33 %
     Total                 99     $    195,690           36 %           62 %           67 %
                                     

    As reflected above, the results show approximately 3%, or 10 loans totaling $18 million of the total multi-family portfolio would have proforma DSCR’s less than 1x while maintaining projected weighted average LTV’s under 100%. Additionally, approximately 97% or 89 loans totaling $178 million would possess DSCR’s greater than 1x while maintaining a projected weighted average LTV well within our policy guidelines. We believe the overall demand for multifamily housing in our market will allow our borrowers to address any adverse impact proactively, as evidenced by the maturities and rate resets in the previous 12 months which have been successfully refinanced with other institutions at market rates similar to those used in the above analysis.

    Rental breakdown of Multi-Family portfolio

    The table below segments our portfolio of loans secured by Multi-Family properties based on rental terms and location. As shown below, 64% of the combined portfolio is secured by properties subject to free market rental terms, which is the dominant tenant type. Both the Market Rent and Stabilized Rent segments of our portfolio present very similar average borrower profiles. The portfolio is primarily located in the New York City boroughs of Brooklyn, the Bronx and Queens.

    Multi-Family Loan Portfolio – Loans by Rent Type
    Rent Type   # of Notes
      Outstanding
    Loan Balance
      % of Total
    Multi-Family
      Avg Loan
    Size
      LTV   Current
    DSCR

      Avg #
    of Units

                ($000’s omitted)           ($000’s omitted)                        
                                                             
    Market               140     $        344,263                   64 %   $         2,459       61.8 %          1.41               11  
    Location                                                        
    Manhattan     7     $ 10,251       2 %   $ 1,464       49.4 %     1.88       14  
    Other NYC     92     $ 254,515       47 %   $ 2,766       61.7 %     1.40       10  
    Outside NYC     41     $ 79,497       15 %   $ 1,939       63.9 %     1.36       14  
                                                             
    Stabilized                  99     $        195,690                   36 %   $         1,977       61.8 %          1.44               12  
    Location                                                        
    Manhattan     7     $ 10,459       2 %   $ 1,494       48.2 %     1.71       19  
    Other NYC     81     $ 168,044       31 %   $ 2,075       62.6 %     1.42       11  
    Outside NYC     11     $ 17,187       3 %   $ 1,562       63.1 %     1.54       14  
                                                             

    Office Property Exposure

    The Bank’s exposure to the Office market is minor.   Loans secured by office space accounted for 2.48% of the total loan portfolio with a total balance of $48.9 million, of which less than 1% is located in Manhattan. The pool has a 2.48x weighted average DSCR, a 53% weighted average LTV and less than $350,000 of exposure in Manhattan.

    Asset Quality and Allowance for Credit Losses

    The Bank’s asset quality metrics remain solid. At June 30, 2025, the Bank reported $12.7 million in non-performing loans compared to $16.4 million at December 31, 2024, a decrease of $3.7 million. This decrease resulted primarily from the proactive sale of non-performing loans, satisfactions and the charge-off of a specific reserve established in June 2024 on an individually evaluated commercial loan. At June 30, 2025 non-performing loans were 0.64% of total loans outstanding versus 0.82% at December 31, 2024.

    During the second quarter of 2025, the Bank recorded a provision for credit losses expense of $2.4 million (including $187 thousand provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments). Net charge-offs of $3.5 million were incurred during the quarter, of which $2.5 million is attributable to the aforementioned charge-off of a specific reserve on an individually evaluated commercial loan. The June 30, 2025 allowance for credit losses was $21.6 million versus $22.8 million at December 31, 2024. The allowance for credit losses as a percentage of total loans was 1.10% at June 30, 2025 and 1.15% at December 31, 2024.

    Net Interest Margin

    The Bank’s net interest margin increased to 2.76% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 compared to 2.68% in the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and 2.46% in the quarter ended June 30, 2024 due to the continuing effects of the late 2024 reductions in the Federal Funds effective rate and the liability sensitive nature of the Bank’s balance sheet.

    About Hanover Community Bank and Hanover Bancorp, Inc.

    Hanover Bancorp, Inc. (NASDAQ: HNVR), is the bank holding company for Hanover Community Bank, a community commercial bank focusing on highly personalized and efficient services and products responsive to client needs. Management and the Board of Directors are comprised of a select group of successful local businesspeople who are committed to the success of the Bank by knowing and understanding the metro-New York area’s financial needs and opportunities. Backed by state-of-the-art technology, Hanover offers a full range of financial services. Hanover offers a complete suite of consumer, commercial, and municipal banking products and services, including multi-family and commercial mortgages, residential loans, business loans and lines of credit. Hanover also offers its customers access to 24-hour ATM service with no fees attached, free checking with interest, telephone banking, advanced technologies in mobile and internet banking for our consumer and business customers, safe deposit boxes and much more. The Company’s corporate administrative office is located in Mineola, New York where it also operates a full-service branch office along with additional branch locations in Garden City Park, Hauppauge, Port Jefferson, Forest Hills, Flushing, Sunset Park, Rockefeller Center and Chinatown, New York, and Freehold, New Jersey.

    Hanover Community Bank is a member of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and is an Equal Housing/Equal Opportunity Lender. For further information, call (516) 548-8500 or visit the Bank’s website at www.hanoverbank.com.

    Non-GAAP Disclosure

    This discussion, including the financial statements attached thereto, includes non-GAAP financial measures which include the Company’s adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share, adjusted return on average assets, adjusted return on average equity, tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio, TCE, tangible assets, tangible book value per share, return on average tangible equity and efficiency ratio. A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes that the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provides both management and investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results and trends in addition to the results measured in accordance with GAAP, and provides greater comparability across time periods. While management uses non-GAAP financial measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information is not meant to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the numbers prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP. The Company’s non-GAAP financial measures may not be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other financial institutions.

    With respect to the calculations of and reconciliations of adjusted net income, TCE, tangible assets, TCE ratio and tangible book value per share, reconciliations to the most comparable U.S. GAAP measures are provided in the tables that follow.

    Forward-Looking Statements

    This release may contain certain “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and may be identified by the use of such words as “may,” “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “should,” “plan,” “estimate,” “predict,” “continue,” and “potential” or the negative of these terms or other comparable terminology. Examples of forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, estimates with respect to the financial condition, results of operations and business of Hanover Bancorp, Inc. Any or all of the forward-looking statements in this release and in any other public statements made by Hanover Bancorp, Inc. may turn out to be incorrect. They can be affected by inaccurate assumptions that Hanover Bancorp, Inc. might make or by known or unknown risks and uncertainties, including those discussed in our Annual Report on Form 10-K under Item 1A – Risk Factors, as updated by our subsequent filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. Further, the adverse effect of health emergencies or natural disasters on the Company, its customers, and the communities where it operates may adversely affect the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition for an indefinite period of time. Consequently, no forward-looking statement can be guaranteed. Hanover Bancorp, Inc. does not intend to update any of the forward-looking statements after the date of this release or to conform these statements to actual events.

    Investor and Press Contact:
    Lance P. Burke
    Chief Financial Officer
    (516) 548-8500

               
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.          
    STATEMENTS OF CONDITION (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands)
                 
        June 30,   March 31,   December 31,
        2025   2025   2024
    Assets            
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 164,535     $ 160,234     $ 162,857  
    Securities-available for sale, at fair value   102,636       93,197       83,755  
    Investments-held to maturity   3,594       3,671       3,758  
    Loans held for sale   10,593       16,306       12,404  
                 
    Loans, net of deferred loan fees and costs   1,966,452       1,960,674       1,985,524  
    Less: allowance for credit losses   -21,571       -22,925       -22,779  
    Loans, net   1,944,881       1,937,749       1,962,745  
                 
    Goodwill   19,168       19,168       19,168  
    Premises & fixed assets   14,388       14,511       15,337  
    Operating lease assets   10,890       8,484       8,337  
    Other assets   41,291       38,207       43,749  
      Assets $ 2,311,976     $ 2,291,527     $ 2,312,110  
                 
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity          
    Core deposits $ 1,439,656     $ 1,418,209     $ 1,456,513  
    Time deposits   511,625       518,229       497,770  
    Total deposits   1,951,281       1,936,438       1,954,283  
                 
    Borrowings   107,805       107,805       107,805  
    Subordinated debentures   24,716       24,702       24,689  
    Operating lease liabilities   11,565       9,144       9,025  
    Other liabilities   17,724       16,795       19,670  
      Liabilities   2,113,091       2,094,884       2,115,472  
                 
    Stockholders’ equity   198,885       196,643       196,638  
      Liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 2,311,976     $ 2,291,527     $ 2,312,110  
                 
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                     
        Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
        6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
                     
    Interest income $ 32,049     $ 33,420     $ 64,886     $ 65,852  
    Interest expense   17,254       20,173       35,462       39,670  
      Net interest income   14,795       13,247       29,424       26,182  
    Provision for credit losses   2,357       4,040       2,957       4,340  
      Net interest income after provision for credit losses   12,438       9,207       26,467       21,842  
                     
    Loan servicing and fee income   1,083       836       2,164       1,749  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   162       114       279       210  
    Gain on sale of loans held-for-sale   2,298       2,586       4,650       5,092  
    Gain on sale of investments   –       4       –       4  
    Other operating income   18       82       200       143  
      Non-interest income   3,561       3,622       7,293       7,198  
                     
    Compensation and benefits   7,003       6,499       14,235       12,061  
    Conversion expenses   –       –       3,180       –  
    Occupancy and equipment   1,910       1,843       3,746       3,613  
    Data processing   508       495       1,101       1,013  
    Professional fees   878       717       1,665       1,535  
    Federal deposit insurance premiums   365       365       702       683  
    Other operating expenses   1,952       1,751       3,983       3,569  
      Non-interest expense   12,616       11,670       28,612       22,474  
                     
      Income before income taxes   3,383       1,159       5,148       6,566  
    Income tax expense   940       315       1,184       1,661  
                     
      Net income $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 3,964     $ 4,905  
                     
    Earnings per share (“EPS”):(1)              
    Basic $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.53     $ 0.66  
    Diluted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.53     $ 0.66  
                     
    Average shares outstanding for basic EPS (1)(2)   7,500,871       7,399,816       7,482,307       7,388,021  
    Average shares outstanding for diluted EPS (1)(2)   7,506,584       7,449,110       7,488,226       7,438,234  
                     
    (1) Calculation includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Average shares outstanding before subtracting participating securities.
                     
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (unaudited)
    QUARTERLY TREND
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
     
        Three Months Ended
        6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024
                         
    Interest income $ 32,049     $ 32,837     $ 33,057     $ 34,113     $ 33,420  
    Interest expense   17,254       18,208       19,249       21,011       20,173  
      Net interest income   14,795       14,629       13,808       13,102       13,247  
    Provision for credit losses   2,357       600       400       200       4,040  
      Net interest income after provision for credit losses   12,438       14,029       13,408       12,902       9,207  
                         
    Loan servicing and fee income   1,083       1,081       981       960       836  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   162       117       136       123       114  
    Gain on sale of loans held-for-sale   2,298       2,352       3,014       2,834       2,586  
    Gain on sale of investments   –       –       27       –       4  
    Other operating income   18       182       29       37       82  
      Non-interest income   3,561       3,732       4,187       3,954       3,622  
                         
    Compensation and benefits   7,003       7,232       6,699       6,840       6,499  
    Conversion expenses   –       3,180       –       –       –  
    Occupancy and equipment   1,910       1,836       1,810       1,799       1,843  
    Data processing   508       593       536       547       495  
    Professional fees   878       787       782       762       717  
    Federal deposit insurance premiums   365       337       375       360       365  
    Other operating expenses   1,952       2,031       2,198       1,930       1,751  
      Non-interest expense   12,616       15,996       12,400       12,238       11,670  
                         
      Income before income taxes   3,383       1,765       5,195       4,618       1,159  
    Income tax expense   940       244       1,293       1,079       315  
                         
      Net income $ 2,443     $ 1,521     $ 3,902     $ 3,539     $ 844  
                         
    Earnings per share (“EPS”):(1)                  
    Basic $ 0.33     $ 0.20     $ 0.53     $ 0.48     $ 0.11  
    Diluted $ 0.33     $ 0.20     $ 0.52     $ 0.48     $ 0.11  
                         
    Average shares outstanding for basic EPS (1)(2)   7,500,871       7,463,537       7,427,583       7,411,064       7,399,816  
    Average shares outstanding for diluted EPS (1)(2)   7,506,584       7,469,489       7,456,471       7,436,068       7,449,110  
                         
    (1) Calculation includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Average shares outstanding before subtracting participating securities.
                         
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED NON-GAAP FINANCIAL INFORMATION (1)(unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                   
      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
      6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
                   
    ADJUSTED NET INCOME:              
    Net income, as reported $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 3,964     $ 4,905  
    Adjustments:              
    Conversion expenses   –       –       3,180       –  
    Total adjustments, before income taxes   –       –       3,180       –  
    Adjustment for reported effective income tax rate   –       –       608       –  
    Total adjustments, after income taxes   –       –       2,572       –  
    Adjusted net income $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 6,536     $ 4,905  
    Basic earnings per share – adjusted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.87     $ 0.66  
    Diluted earnings per share – adjusted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.87     $ 0.66  
                   
    ADJUSTED OPERATING EFFICIENCY RATIO:              
    Operating efficiency ratio, as reported   68.73 %     69.18 %     77.93 %     67.33 %
    Adjustments:              
    Conversion expenses   0.00 %     0.00 %     -8.66 %     0.00 %
    Adjusted operating efficiency ratio   68.73 %     69.18 %     69.27 %     67.33 %
                   
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE ASSETS   0.44 %     0.15 %     0.59 %     0.44 %
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE EQUITY   4.93 %     1.77 %     6.63 %     5.20 %
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE TANGIBLE EQUITY   5.46 %     1.97 %     7.35 %     5.80 %
                   
    (1)  A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provide investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results in addition to the results measured in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While management uses non-GAAP measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information should not be viewed as a substitute for financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP.
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.
             
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands)
                   
      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
      6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
    Profitability:              
    Return on average assets   0.44 %     0.15 %     0.36 %     0.44 %
    Return on average equity (1)   4.93 %     1.77 %     4.02 %     5.20 %
    Return on average tangible equity (1)   5.46 %     1.97 %     4.46 %     5.80 %
    Pre-provision net revenue return on assets   1.04 %     0.94 %     0.73 %     0.99 %
    Yield on average interest-earning assets   5.98 %     6.22 %     5.99 %     6.12 %
    Cost of average interest-bearing liabilities   3.94 %     4.48 %     3.98 %     4.41 %
    Net interest rate spread (2)   2.04 %     1.74 %     2.01 %     1.71 %
    Net interest margin (3)   2.76 %     2.46 %     2.72 %     2.43 %
    Non-interest expense to average assets   2.29 %     2.11 %     2.57 %     2.03 %
    Operating efficiency ratio (4)   68.73 %     69.18 %     77.93 %     67.33 %
                   
    Average balances:              
    Interest-earning assets $ 2,148,782     $ 2,162,250     $ 2,182,757     $ 2,162,543  
    Interest-bearing liabilities   1,756,316       1,809,991       1,798,958       1,810,195  
    Loans   1,978,535       2,014,820       1,984,135       1,999,448  
    Deposits   1,838,947       1,773,205       1,878,969       1,807,924  
    Borrowings   142,733       231,473       138,224       196,950  
                   
    (1) Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Represents the difference between the yield on average interest-earning assets and the cost of average interest-bearing liabilities.
    (3) Represents net interest income divided by average interest-earning assets.
    (4) Represents non-interest expense divided by the sum of net interest income and non-interest income.
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.
             
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except share and per share data)
                   
      At or For the Three Months Ended
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024
    Asset quality:              
    Provision for credit losses – loans (1) $ 2,170     $ 600     $ 400     $ 200  
    Net (charge-offs)/recoveries   (3,524 )     (454 )     (1,027 )     (438 )
    Allowance for credit losses   21,571       22,925       22,779       23,406  
    Allowance for credit losses to total loans (2)   1.10 %     1.17 %     1.15 %     1.17 %
    Non-performing loans $ 12,651     $ 11,697     $ 16,368     $ 15,365  
    Non-performing loans/total loans   0.64 %     0.60 %     0.82 %     0.77 %
    Non-performing loans/total assets   0.55 %     0.51 %     0.71 %     0.66 %
    Allowance for credit losses/non-performing loans   170.51 %     195.99 %     139.17 %     152.33 %
                                   
    Capital (Bank only):                              
    Tier 1 Capital $ 203,322     $ 201,925     $ 201,744     $ 198,196  
    Tier 1 leverage ratio   9.29 %     8.95 %     9.13 %     8.85 %
    Common equity tier 1 capital ratio   13.16 %     13.37 %     13.32 %     12.99 %
    Tier 1 risk based capital ratio   13.16 %     13.37 %     13.32 %     12.99 %
    Total risk based capital ratio   14.41 %     14.62 %     14.58 %     14.24 %
                                   
    Equity data:                              
    Shares outstanding (3)   7,499,243       7,503,731       7,427,127       7,428,366  
    Stockholders’ equity $ 198,885     $ 196,643     $ 196,638     $ 192,339  
    Book value per share (3)   26.52       26.21       26.48       25.89  
    Tangible common equity (3)   179,495       177,239       177,220       172,906  
    Tangible book value per share (3)   23.94       23.62       23.86       23.28  
    Tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio (3)   7.83 %     7.80 %     7.73 %     7.49 %
                   
    (1) Excludes $187 thousand, $0, $0 and $0 provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments for the quarters ended 6/30/25, 3/31/25, 12/31/24 and 9/30/24, respectively.
    (2) Calculation excludes loans held for sale.
    (3) Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    STATISTICAL SUMMARY
    QUARTERLY TREND
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands, except share data)
                   
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024
                   
    Loan distribution (1):              
    Residential mortgages $ 715,418     $ 708,649     $ 702,832     $ 719,037  
    Multifamily   539,573       535,429       550,570       557,634  
    Commercial real estate – OO   267,223       264,855       261,223       246,458  
    Commercial real estate – NOO   271,552       280,345       298,517       305,536  
    Commercial & industrial   148,907       146,050       145,457       149,853  
    Home equity   23,361       24,914       26,422       26,825  
    Consumer   418       432       503       470  
                   
    Total loans $ 1,966,452     $ 1,960,674     $ 1,985,524     $ 2,005,813  
                   
    Sequential quarter growth rate   0.29 %     -1.25 %     -1.01 %     -0.35 %
                   
    CRE concentration ratio   368 %     369 %     385 %     397 %
                   
    Loans sold during the quarter $ 46,045     $ 46,649     $ 53,499     $ 43,537  
                   
    Funding distribution:              
    Demand $ 243,664     $ 215,569     $ 211,656     $ 206,327  
    N.O.W.   655,333       698,297       692,890       621,880  
    Savings   42,860       46,275       48,885       53,024  
    Money market   497,799       458,068       503,082       572,213  
    Total core deposits   1,439,656       1,418,209       1,456,513       1,453,444  
    Time   511,625       518,229       497,770       504,100  
    Total deposits   1,951,281       1,936,438       1,954,283       1,957,544  
    Borrowings   107,805       107,805       107,805       125,805  
    Subordinated debentures   24,716       24,702       24,689       24,675  
                   
    Total funding sources $ 2,083,802     $ 2,068,945     $ 2,086,777     $ 2,108,024  
                   
    Sequential quarter growth rate – total deposits   0.77 %     -0.91 %     -0.17 %     0.80 %
                   
    Period-end core deposits/total deposits ratio   73.78 %     73.24 %     74.53 %     74.25 %
                   
    Period-end demand deposits/total deposits ratio   12.49 %     11.13 %     10.83 %     10.54 %
                   
    (1) Excluding loans held for sale
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.      
                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP FINANCIAL MEASURES (1)(unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except share and per share amounts)
                       
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024
    Tangible common equity                  
    Total equity (2) $ 198,885     $ 196,643     $ 196,638     $ 192,339     $ 190,072  
    Less: goodwill   (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )
    Less: core deposit intangible   (222 )     (236 )     (250 )     (265 )     (279 )
    Tangible common equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
                       
    Tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio                
    Tangible common equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
    Total assets   2,311,976       2,291,527       2,312,110       2,327,814       2,331,098  
    Less: goodwill   (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )
    Less: core deposit intangible   (222 )     (236 )     (250 )     (265 )     (279 )
    Tangible assets $ 2,292,586     $ 2,272,123     $ 2,292,692     $ 2,308,381     $ 2,311,651  
    TCE ratio (2)   7.83 %     7.80 %     7.73 %     7.49 %     7.38 %
                       
    Tangible book value per share                  
    Tangible equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
    Shares outstanding (2)   7,499,243       7,503,731       7,427,127       7,428,366       7,402,163  
    Tangible book value per share (2) $ 23.94     $ 23.62     $ 23.86     $ 23.28     $ 23.05  
                       
    (1)  A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provide investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results in addition to the results measured in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While management uses non-GAAP measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information should not be viewed as a substitute for financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP.
                       
    (2)  Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
     
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    NET INTEREST INCOME ANALYSIS
    For the Three Months Ended June 30, 2025 and 2024
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands)
                                                   
      2025
      2024
      Average       Average   Average       Average
      Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost   Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost
                                                   
    Assets:                                              
    Interest-earning assets:                                              
    Loans $ 1,978,535     $ 29,785       6.04 %   $ 2,014,820     $ 31,124       6.21 %
    Investment securities   99,448       1,433       5.78 %     99,324       1,534       6.21 %
    Interest-earning cash   62,760       695       4.44 %     36,633       497       5.46 %
    FHLB stock and other investments   8,039       136       6.79 %     11,473       265       9.29 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,148,782       32,049       5.98 %     2,162,250       33,420       6.22 %
    Non interest-earning assets:                                              
    Cash and due from banks   9,218                       7,979                  
    Other assets   50,164                       51,106                  
    Total assets $ 2,208,164                     $ 2,221,335                  
                                                   
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:                                              
    Interest-bearing liabilities:                                              
    Savings, N.O.W. and money market deposits $ 1,126,495     $ 10,649       3.79 %   $ 1,117,029     $ 12,667       4.56 %
    Time deposits   487,088       5,058       4.17 %     461,489       4,910       4.28 %
    Total savings and time deposits   1,613,583       15,707       3.90 %     1,578,518       17,577       4.48 %
    Borrowings   118,026       1,221       4.15 %     206,820       2,270       4.41 %
    Subordinated debentures   24,707       326       5.29 %     24,653       326       5.32 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   1,756,316       17,254       3.94 %     1,809,991       20,173       4.48 %
    Demand deposits   225,364                       194,687                  
    Other liabilities   27,615                       25,039                  
    Total liabilities   2,009,295                       2,029,717                  
    Stockholders’ equity   198,869                       191,618                  
    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $ 2,208,164                     $ 2,221,335                  
    Net interest rate spread                   2.04 %                     1.74 %
    Net interest income/margin         $ 14,795       2.76 %           $ 13,247       2.46 %
                                                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    NET INTEREST INCOME ANALYSIS
    For the Six Months Ended June 30, 2025 and 2024
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands)
                                                   
      2025
      2024
      Average       Average   Average       Average
      Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost   Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost
                                                   
    Assets:                                              
    Interest-earning assets:                                              
    Loans $ 1,984,135     $ 59,769       6.07 %   $ 1,999,448     $ 60,861       6.12 %
    Investment securities   92,681       2,619       5.70 %     97,085       2,991       6.20 %
    Interest-earning cash   97,914       2,177       4.48 %     55,652       1,511       5.46 %
    FHLB stock and other investments   8,027       321       8.06 %     10,358       489       9.49 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,182,757       64,886       5.99 %     2,162,543       65,852       6.12 %
    Non interest-earning assets:                                              
    Cash and due from banks   9,360                       7,962                  
    Other assets   49,930                       50,523                  
    Total assets $ 2,242,047                     $ 2,221,028                  
                                                   
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:                                              
    Interest-bearing liabilities:                                              
    Savings, N.O.W. and money market deposits $ 1,171,711     $ 22,104       3.80 %   $ 1,139,111     $ 25,600       4.52 %
    Time deposits   489,023       10,378       4.28 %     474,134       9,872       4.19 %
    Total savings and time deposits   1,660,734       32,482       3.94 %     1,613,245       35,472       4.42 %
    Borrowings   113,524       2,328       4.14 %     172,304       3,546       4.14 %
    Subordinated debentures   24,700       652       5.32 %     24,646       652       5.32 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   1,798,958       35,462       3.98 %     1,810,195       39,670       4.41 %
    Demand deposits   218,235                       194,679                  
    Other liabilities   26,179                       26,499                  
    Total liabilities   2,043,372                       2,031,373                  
    Stockholders’ equity   198,675                       189,655                  
    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $ 2,242,047                     $ 2,221,028                  
    Net interest rate spread                   2.01 %                     1.71 %
    Net interest income/margin         $ 29,424       2.72 %           $ 26,182       2.43 %
                                                   

    The MIL Network –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI: Hanover Bancorp, Inc. Reports Second Quarter 2025 Results Highlighted by Strong Demand Deposit Growth, Continued Margin Expansion and Its Inclusion in the Russell 2000 Index

    Source: GlobeNewswire (MIL-OSI)

    Second Quarter Performance Highlights

    • Net Income: Net income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 totaled $2.4 million or $0.33 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares).
    • Pre-Provision Net Revenue: Pre-provision net revenue was $5.7 million resulting in a return on average assets of 1.04% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 which was the highest level since the first quarter of 2023.
    • Net Interest Income: Net interest income was $14.8 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $0.2 million, or 1.13% from the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and $1.5 million, or 11.69%, from the quarter ended June 30, 2024.
    • Net Interest Margin Expansion: The Company’s net interest margin during the quarter ended June 30, 2025 increased to 2.76% from 2.68% in the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and 2.46% in the quarter ended June 30, 2024.
    • Demand Deposit Growth: Demand deposits increased $28.1 million, or 13.03%, from March 31, 2025 and $32.0 million, or 15.12%, from December 31, 2024, underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals.  
    • Strong Liquidity Position: At June 30, 2025, undrawn liquidity sources, which include cash and unencumbered securities and secured and unsecured funding capacity, totaled $686.5 million, or approximately 274% of uninsured deposit balances.   Insured and collateralized deposits, which include municipal deposits, accounted for approximately 87% of total deposits at June 30, 2025.
    • Loan Diversification Strategy: The Company continues to actively manage its Multi-Family and Commercial Real Estate portfolios which resulted in a reduction in the commercial real estate concentration ratio to 368% of capital at June 30, 2025 from 385% at December 31, 2024 and 403% at June 30, 2024. The Company continues to focus loan growth primarily in residential loan products originated for sale to specific buyers in the secondary market, C&I and SBA loans. The Company will selectively explore Commercial Real Estate opportunities with an emphasis on relationship based Commercial Real Estate lending.
    • Asset Quality: At June 30, 2025, the Bank’s asset quality metrics remained solid with non-performing loans totaling $12.7 million, representing 0.64% of the total loan portfolio, and the allowance for credit losses equaling 1.10% of total loans, a decrease from non-performing loans totaling $16.4 million, representing 0.82% of the total loan portfolio, as of December 31, 2024.
    • Port Jefferson Branch: In June 2025, the Company continued its strategic expansion in Suffolk County Long Island with the opening of its tenth branch in Port Jefferson, New York. The Company will continue to be opportunistic in furthering its expansion into the underserved markets of Eastern Long Island.
    • Inclusion in Russell 2000: The Company was added to the Russell 2000 Index in late June 2025. The Russell 2000 Index encompasses the 2,000 largest U.S.-traded stocks by objective, market-capitalization rankings, and style attributes. The Russell Indexes are widely used by investment managers and institutional investors for index funds and as benchmarks for active investment strategies.
    • Quarterly Cash Dividend: The Company’s Board of Directors approved a $0.10 per share cash dividend on both common and Series A preferred shares payable on August 13, 2025 to stockholders of record on August 6, 2025.

    MINEOLA, N.Y., July 23, 2025 (GLOBE NEWSWIRE) — Hanover Bancorp, Inc. (“Hanover” or “the Company” – NASDAQ: HNVR), the holding company for Hanover Community Bank (“the Bank”), today reported results for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 and the declaration of a $0.10 per share cash dividend on both common and Series A preferred shares payable on August 13, 2025 to stockholders of record on August 6, 2025.

    Earnings Summary for the Quarter Ended June 30, 2025

    The Company reported net income for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 of $2.4 million or $0.33 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares), versus $0.8 million (after giving effect to an allowance for credit loss (“ACL”) on an individually evaluated loan of $2.5 million and a $1.1 million provision resulting from ongoing enhancements to the current expected credit loss (“CECL”) model) or $0.11 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares) in the quarter ended June 30, 2024. Returns on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.44%, 4.93% and 5.46%, respectively, for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.15%, 1.77% and 1.97%, respectively, for the comparable quarter of 2024.

    The increase in net income recorded in the second quarter of 2025 from the comparable 2024 quarter resulted from an increase in net interest income and a decrease in provision for credit losses. These were partially offset by the increase in non-interest expenses, particularly compensation and benefits, and an increase in income tax expense.   The increase in compensation and benefits expense in the second quarter of 2025 versus the comparable 2024 quarter was primarily related to the staffing of the newly opened Port Jefferson branch and additions to the C&I Banking teams, partially offset by lower incentive compensation expense resulting from reduced lending activity and other expense reduction initiatives. The Company’s effective tax rate was 27.8% in the second quarter of 2025 and 27.2% in the comparable 2024 quarter. We expect a normalized run rate of 25.0% for the remainder of the year.

    Net interest income was $14.8 million for the quarter ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $1.5 million, or 11.69% from the comparable 2024 quarter. This increase was due to improvement of the Company’s net interest margin to 2.76% in the 2025 quarter from 2.46% in the comparable 2024 quarter. The cost of interest-bearing liabilities decreased to 3.94% in the 2025 quarter from 4.48% in the comparable 2024 quarter, a decrease of 54 basis points. This decrease was partially offset by a 24 basis point decrease in the yield on interest earning assets to 5.98% in the 2025 quarter from 6.22% in the second quarter of 2024. Net interest income on a linked quarter basis increased $0.2 million or 1.13%, due to an 8 basis point increase in net interest margin resulting from a 7 basis point decrease in cost of interest-bearing liabilities, partially offset by a 3 basis point decrease on yield on interest earning assets.

    Earnings Summary for the Six Months Ended June 30, 2025

    For the six months ended June 30, 2025, the Company reported net income of $4.0 million or $0.53 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares), versus $4.9 million or $0.66 per diluted share (including Series A preferred shares) in the comparable 2024 six-month period. The Company recorded adjusted (non-GAAP) net income (excluding core system conversion expenses of $2.6 million, net of tax) of $6.5 million or $0.87 per diluted share in the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus net income of $4.9 million or $0.66 per diluted share in the comparable 2024 six-month period (which included no adjustments). Returns on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.36%, 4.02% and 4.46%, respectively, for the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.44%, 5.20% and 5.80%, respectively, for the comparable 2024 period. Adjusted (non-GAAP) returns, exclusive of core system conversion expenses on average assets, average stockholders’ equity and average tangible equity were 0.59%, 6.63% and 7.35%, respectively, in the six months ended June 30, 2025, versus 0.44%, 5.20% and 5.80%, respectively, in the comparable of 2024 period.

    The decrease in net income recorded for the six months ended June 30, 2025 from the comparable 2024 period is due to an increase in non-interest expenses, particularly compensation and benefits and the one-time core system conversion expenses. These were partially offset by an increase in net interest income and a decrease in provision for credit losses. The increase in compensation and benefits expense for the six months ended June 30, 2025 versus the comparable 2024 period was primarily related to additional headcount to staff the new Port Jefferson branch and expansion of the C&I lending vertical and lower deferred loan origination costs partially offset by lower incentive compensation expense resulting from reduced lending activity. The Company’s effective tax rate decreased to 23.0% for the six months ended June 30, 2025 from 25.3% in the comparable 2024 period.

    Net interest income was $29.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025, an increase of $3.2 million, or 12.38% from the comparable 2024 period, due to the improvement of the Company’s net interest margin to 2.72% in the 2025 period from 2.43% in the comparable 2024 period. The cost of interest-bearing liabilities decreased to 3.98% in the 2025 six months period from 4.41% in the comparable 2024 period, a decrease of 43 basis points. This decrease was partially offset by a 13 basis point decrease in the yield on interest earning assets to 5.99% in the 2025 period from 6.12% in the comparable 2024 period. The increase in the net interest margin was a result of the late 2024 reductions in the Fed Funds effective rate and the liability sensitive nature of the Bank’s balance sheet.

    Michael P. Puorro, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, commented on the Company’s quarterly results: “Our second quarter performance, reflects a number of high notes, including increased Pre-Provision Net Revenue of $5.7 million, strong non-interest bearing deposit growth of $28.1 million, underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals, and continued improvement in our Net Interest Margin. We are extremely pleased with the recent opening of our Port Jefferson branch and will continue to be opportunistic in furthering our expansion into the underserved markets of Eastern Long Island. With our inclusion in the Russell 2000, the continued development of our diversified revenue verticals and liability sensitive balance sheet, we look forward to delivering continued shareholder value and the eventual benefits of a more favorable interest rate environment.”

    Balance Sheet Highlights

    Total assets were $2.31 billion at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. Total securities available for sale at June 30, 2025 were $102.6 million, an increase of $18.9 million from December 31, 2024, primarily driven by growth in collateralized mortgage obligations, collateralized loan obligations and corporate bonds.

    Total deposits were $1.95 billion at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. Total deposits increased $9.4 million or 0.48% from June 30, 2024. Demand deposits increased $43.8 million or 21.93% from June 30, 2024 and $32.0 million, or 15.12%, from December 31, 2024 underscoring the success of our C&I and Municipal banking verticals.   Our loan to deposit ratio improved to 101% at June 30, 2025 from 102% at December 31, 2024.

    The Company had $517.4 million in total municipal deposits at June 30, 2025, at a weighted average rate of 3.67% versus $509.3 million at a weighted average rate of 3.72% at December 31, 2024 and $452.6 million at a weighted average rate of 4.61% at June 30, 2024. The Company’s municipal deposit program is built on long-standing relationships developed in the local marketplace. This core deposit business will continue to provide a stable source of funding for the Company’s lending products at costs lower than those of consumer deposits and market-based borrowings.   The Company continues to broaden its municipal deposit base and currently services 40 customer relationships.

    Total borrowings at June 30, 2025 were $107.8 million, with a weighted average rate and term of 4.11% and 17 months, respectively. At June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024, the Company had $107.8 million of term FHLB advances outstanding. The Company had no FHLB overnight borrowings outstanding at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024. The Company had no borrowings outstanding under lines of credit with correspondent banks at June 30, 2025 and December 31, 2024.

    Stockholders’ equity was $198.9 million at June 30, 2025 and compared to $196.6 million at December 31, 2024. Retained earnings increased by $2.5 million due primarily to net income of $4.0 million for the six months ended June 30, 2025, which was offset by $1.5 million of dividends declared. The accumulated other comprehensive loss at June 30, 2025 was 0.62% of total equity and was comprised of a $0.7 million after tax net unrealized loss on the investment portfolio and a $0.5 million after tax net unrealized loss on derivatives.   Tangible book value per share (including Series A preferred shares) was $23.94 at June 30, 2025 compared to $23.86 at December 31, 2024.

    Loan Portfolio

    For the six months ended June 30, 2025, the Bank’s loan portfolio decreased $19.1 million to $1.97 billion from December 31, 2024. The decrease resulted primarily from the ongoing management of our commercial real estate and multifamily loan concentrations. On a linked quarter basis, net loans increased $5.8 million. At June 30, 2025, the Company’s residential loan portfolio (including home equity) amounted to $738.8 million, with an average loan balance of $489 thousand and a weighted average loan-to-value ratio of 57%.   Commercial real estate (including construction) and multifamily loans totaled $1.08 billion at June 30, 2025, with an average loan balance of $1.5 million and a weighted average loan-to-value ratio of 59%. As will be discussed below, approximately 36% of the multifamily portfolio is subject to rent regulation. The Company’s commercial real estate concentration ratio continues to improve, decreasing to 368% of capital at June 30, 2025 from 385% at December 31, 2024 and 403% at June 30, 2024, with loans secured by office space accounting for 2.48% of the total loan portfolio and totaling $48.9 million at June 30, 2025. The Company’s loan pipeline with executed term sheets at June 30, 2025 is approximately $190.2 million, with approximately 81% being niche-residential, conventional C&I, SBA and USDA lending opportunities.

    The Bank remains focused on expanding its core verticals and continues to originate loans for its portfolio and for sale in the secondary market under its residential flow origination program. The Bank originated $62.2 million in residential loans in the quarter ended June 30, 2025. During the quarters ended June 30, 2025 and 2024, the Company sold $23.7 million and $2.9 million, respectively, of residential loans under its flow origination program and recorded gains on sale of loans held-for-sale of $0.5 million and $0.1 million, respectively.

    During the quarters ended June 30, 2025 and 2024, the Company sold approximately $22.3 million and $28.0 million, respectively, in government guaranteed SBA loans and recorded gains on sale of loans held-for-sale of $1.8 million and $2.5 million, respectively. SBA loan originations and gains on sale were lower than expected due to a confluence of factors. One factor is the impact of the “higher-for-longer” interest rate environment that we believe has both worsened the financial condition of and reduced demand among small business borrowers, resulting in a lower volume of creditworthy customers. Another factor is the negative impact of and uncertainty created by tariffs, which we believe have also dampened loan demand among borrowers in certain industries. A third factor is the Bank’s decision to tighten credit over the course of the last year. Although management continues to believe this to be a prudent measure, it has nonetheless resulted in a lower volume of loan approvals, causing the Bank to re-evaluate the number and caliber of its business development officers. Taken together these and other factors have adversely impacted SBA loan originations and closings. With the addition of additional business development officers in the second half of 2025, we anticipate higher volumes of eligible loans as we transition into 2026. The Bank concluded the second quarter of 2025 with C&I loan originations of approximately $29.3 million. Based on its existing pipeline, the Bank expects C&I lending and deposit activity to grow as the year progresses.

    Commercial Real Estate Statistics

    A significant portion of the Bank’s commercial real estate portfolio consists of loans secured by Multi-Family and CRE-Investor owned real estate that are predominantly subject to fixed interest rates for an initial period of 5 years. The Bank’s exposure to Land/Construction loans is minor at $8.2 million, all at floating interest rates. As shown below, 31% of the loan balances in these combined portfolios will either have a rate reset or mature in 2025 and 2026, with another 57% with rate resets or maturing in 2027.

    Multi-Family Market Rent Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule   Multi-Family Stabilized Rent Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule
    Calendar Period   #
    Loans
      Total O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
      Calendar Period   #
    Loans
      Total O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S
    ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
                                                                         
    2025     7     $ 8,609     $ 1,230       5.29 %   2025     8     $ 14,950     $ 1,869       4.54 %
    2026     36       117,249       3,257       3.66 %   2026     20       42,310       2,115       3.67 %
    2027     70       185,157       2,645       4.41 %   2027     51       122,901       2,410       4.22 %
    2028     16       21,310       1,332       6.20 %   2028     12       10,117       843       7.14 %
    2029     6       4,924       821       7.70 %   2029     4       4,313       1,078       6.38 %
    2030+     3       6,667       2,222       3.68 %   2030+     4       1,099       275       6.04 %
    Fixed Rate     138       343,916       2,492       4.32 %   Fixed Rate     99       195,690       1,977       4.34 %
    Floating Rate     2       347       174       9.50 %   Floating Rate     —       —       —       — %
    Total     140     $ 344,263     $ 2,459       4.33 %   Total     99     $ 195,690     $ 1,977       4.34 %
                                                                         
    CRE Investor Portfolio Fixed Rate Reset/Maturity Schedule
    Calendar Period   # Loans   Total O/S ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg O/S ($000’s
    omitted)
      Avg Interest
    Rate
                                     
    2025     25     $ 33,503     $ 1,340       7.28 %
    2026     30       35,702       1,190       4.90 %
    2027     89       156,924       1,763       4.86 %
    2028     28       30,868       1,102       6.65 %
    2029     4       2,336       584       7.04 %
    2030+     15       8,999       600       6.46 %
    Fixed Rate     191       268,332       1,405       5.45 %
    Floating Rate     6       11,905       1,984       9.50 %
    Total CRE-Inv.     197     $ 280,237     $ 1,423       5.62 %
                                     

    Stabilized Multi-Family Pro Forma Stress Results

    The table below reflects a proforma stressed evaluation of the Bank’s Multifamily stabilized loan portfolio, using the primary assumption for a revised Debt Service Coverage Ratio (“DSCR”) calculation, for all loans where the current interest rate is below 6%. The current balance for these loans is recast at 6% with a 30-year amortization. The chart below reflects the impact of these adjustments on the portfolio. The projected loan to value (“LTV”) assumption resets all loans using a 6% cap rate and the last reported property net operating income (“NOI”) to determine an implied property valuation and based on the current loan balance the resultant LTV.

    Multi-Family Stabilized Rent Portfolio
    DSCR Range        # Loans      Total O/S
    ($000’s omitted)
       % of Total
    MF
    Portfolio
      Current
    Weighted 
    Average
    LTV
      Projected
    Weighted 
    Average
    LTV
                                     
    < 1.0   10     $ 18,153     3 %   61 %   95 %
    1.0 < x  < 1.2   24       69,751     13 %   65 %   74 %
    1.2 < x  < 1.3   20       34,897     6 %   62 %   67 %
    1.3 < x  < 1.5   15       38,547     7 %   63 %   61 %
    1.5 < x  < 2.0   18       25,805     5 %   58 %   53 %
    x  > 2.0   12       8,537     2 %   43 %   33 %
     Total                 99     $    195,690           36 %           62 %           67 %
                                     

    As reflected above, the results show approximately 3%, or 10 loans totaling $18 million of the total multi-family portfolio would have proforma DSCR’s less than 1x while maintaining projected weighted average LTV’s under 100%. Additionally, approximately 97% or 89 loans totaling $178 million would possess DSCR’s greater than 1x while maintaining a projected weighted average LTV well within our policy guidelines. We believe the overall demand for multifamily housing in our market will allow our borrowers to address any adverse impact proactively, as evidenced by the maturities and rate resets in the previous 12 months which have been successfully refinanced with other institutions at market rates similar to those used in the above analysis.

    Rental breakdown of Multi-Family portfolio

    The table below segments our portfolio of loans secured by Multi-Family properties based on rental terms and location. As shown below, 64% of the combined portfolio is secured by properties subject to free market rental terms, which is the dominant tenant type. Both the Market Rent and Stabilized Rent segments of our portfolio present very similar average borrower profiles. The portfolio is primarily located in the New York City boroughs of Brooklyn, the Bronx and Queens.

    Multi-Family Loan Portfolio – Loans by Rent Type
    Rent Type   # of Notes
      Outstanding
    Loan Balance
      % of Total
    Multi-Family
      Avg Loan
    Size
      LTV   Current
    DSCR

      Avg #
    of Units

                ($000’s omitted)           ($000’s omitted)                        
                                                             
    Market               140     $        344,263                   64 %   $         2,459       61.8 %          1.41               11  
    Location                                                        
    Manhattan     7     $ 10,251       2 %   $ 1,464       49.4 %     1.88       14  
    Other NYC     92     $ 254,515       47 %   $ 2,766       61.7 %     1.40       10  
    Outside NYC     41     $ 79,497       15 %   $ 1,939       63.9 %     1.36       14  
                                                             
    Stabilized                  99     $        195,690                   36 %   $         1,977       61.8 %          1.44               12  
    Location                                                        
    Manhattan     7     $ 10,459       2 %   $ 1,494       48.2 %     1.71       19  
    Other NYC     81     $ 168,044       31 %   $ 2,075       62.6 %     1.42       11  
    Outside NYC     11     $ 17,187       3 %   $ 1,562       63.1 %     1.54       14  
                                                             

    Office Property Exposure

    The Bank’s exposure to the Office market is minor.   Loans secured by office space accounted for 2.48% of the total loan portfolio with a total balance of $48.9 million, of which less than 1% is located in Manhattan. The pool has a 2.48x weighted average DSCR, a 53% weighted average LTV and less than $350,000 of exposure in Manhattan.

    Asset Quality and Allowance for Credit Losses

    The Bank’s asset quality metrics remain solid. At June 30, 2025, the Bank reported $12.7 million in non-performing loans compared to $16.4 million at December 31, 2024, a decrease of $3.7 million. This decrease resulted primarily from the proactive sale of non-performing loans, satisfactions and the charge-off of a specific reserve established in June 2024 on an individually evaluated commercial loan. At June 30, 2025 non-performing loans were 0.64% of total loans outstanding versus 0.82% at December 31, 2024.

    During the second quarter of 2025, the Bank recorded a provision for credit losses expense of $2.4 million (including $187 thousand provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments). Net charge-offs of $3.5 million were incurred during the quarter, of which $2.5 million is attributable to the aforementioned charge-off of a specific reserve on an individually evaluated commercial loan. The June 30, 2025 allowance for credit losses was $21.6 million versus $22.8 million at December 31, 2024. The allowance for credit losses as a percentage of total loans was 1.10% at June 30, 2025 and 1.15% at December 31, 2024.

    Net Interest Margin

    The Bank’s net interest margin increased to 2.76% for the quarter ended June 30, 2025 compared to 2.68% in the quarter ended March 31, 2025 and 2.46% in the quarter ended June 30, 2024 due to the continuing effects of the late 2024 reductions in the Federal Funds effective rate and the liability sensitive nature of the Bank’s balance sheet.

    About Hanover Community Bank and Hanover Bancorp, Inc.

    Hanover Bancorp, Inc. (NASDAQ: HNVR), is the bank holding company for Hanover Community Bank, a community commercial bank focusing on highly personalized and efficient services and products responsive to client needs. Management and the Board of Directors are comprised of a select group of successful local businesspeople who are committed to the success of the Bank by knowing and understanding the metro-New York area’s financial needs and opportunities. Backed by state-of-the-art technology, Hanover offers a full range of financial services. Hanover offers a complete suite of consumer, commercial, and municipal banking products and services, including multi-family and commercial mortgages, residential loans, business loans and lines of credit. Hanover also offers its customers access to 24-hour ATM service with no fees attached, free checking with interest, telephone banking, advanced technologies in mobile and internet banking for our consumer and business customers, safe deposit boxes and much more. The Company’s corporate administrative office is located in Mineola, New York where it also operates a full-service branch office along with additional branch locations in Garden City Park, Hauppauge, Port Jefferson, Forest Hills, Flushing, Sunset Park, Rockefeller Center and Chinatown, New York, and Freehold, New Jersey.

    Hanover Community Bank is a member of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and is an Equal Housing/Equal Opportunity Lender. For further information, call (516) 548-8500 or visit the Bank’s website at www.hanoverbank.com.

    Non-GAAP Disclosure

    This discussion, including the financial statements attached thereto, includes non-GAAP financial measures which include the Company’s adjusted net income, adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share, adjusted return on average assets, adjusted return on average equity, tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio, TCE, tangible assets, tangible book value per share, return on average tangible equity and efficiency ratio. A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes that the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provides both management and investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results and trends in addition to the results measured in accordance with GAAP, and provides greater comparability across time periods. While management uses non-GAAP financial measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information is not meant to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the numbers prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP. The Company’s non-GAAP financial measures may not be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other financial institutions.

    With respect to the calculations of and reconciliations of adjusted net income, TCE, tangible assets, TCE ratio and tangible book value per share, reconciliations to the most comparable U.S. GAAP measures are provided in the tables that follow.

    Forward-Looking Statements

    This release may contain certain “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995 and may be identified by the use of such words as “may,” “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “should,” “plan,” “estimate,” “predict,” “continue,” and “potential” or the negative of these terms or other comparable terminology. Examples of forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, estimates with respect to the financial condition, results of operations and business of Hanover Bancorp, Inc. Any or all of the forward-looking statements in this release and in any other public statements made by Hanover Bancorp, Inc. may turn out to be incorrect. They can be affected by inaccurate assumptions that Hanover Bancorp, Inc. might make or by known or unknown risks and uncertainties, including those discussed in our Annual Report on Form 10-K under Item 1A – Risk Factors, as updated by our subsequent filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. Further, the adverse effect of health emergencies or natural disasters on the Company, its customers, and the communities where it operates may adversely affect the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition for an indefinite period of time. Consequently, no forward-looking statement can be guaranteed. Hanover Bancorp, Inc. does not intend to update any of the forward-looking statements after the date of this release or to conform these statements to actual events.

    Investor and Press Contact:
    Lance P. Burke
    Chief Financial Officer
    (516) 548-8500

               
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.          
    STATEMENTS OF CONDITION (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands)
                 
        June 30,   March 31,   December 31,
        2025   2025   2024
    Assets            
    Cash and cash equivalents $ 164,535     $ 160,234     $ 162,857  
    Securities-available for sale, at fair value   102,636       93,197       83,755  
    Investments-held to maturity   3,594       3,671       3,758  
    Loans held for sale   10,593       16,306       12,404  
                 
    Loans, net of deferred loan fees and costs   1,966,452       1,960,674       1,985,524  
    Less: allowance for credit losses   -21,571       -22,925       -22,779  
    Loans, net   1,944,881       1,937,749       1,962,745  
                 
    Goodwill   19,168       19,168       19,168  
    Premises & fixed assets   14,388       14,511       15,337  
    Operating lease assets   10,890       8,484       8,337  
    Other assets   41,291       38,207       43,749  
      Assets $ 2,311,976     $ 2,291,527     $ 2,312,110  
                 
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity          
    Core deposits $ 1,439,656     $ 1,418,209     $ 1,456,513  
    Time deposits   511,625       518,229       497,770  
    Total deposits   1,951,281       1,936,438       1,954,283  
                 
    Borrowings   107,805       107,805       107,805  
    Subordinated debentures   24,716       24,702       24,689  
    Operating lease liabilities   11,565       9,144       9,025  
    Other liabilities   17,724       16,795       19,670  
      Liabilities   2,113,091       2,094,884       2,115,472  
                 
    Stockholders’ equity   198,885       196,643       196,638  
      Liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 2,311,976     $ 2,291,527     $ 2,312,110  
                 
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                     
        Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
        6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
                     
    Interest income $ 32,049     $ 33,420     $ 64,886     $ 65,852  
    Interest expense   17,254       20,173       35,462       39,670  
      Net interest income   14,795       13,247       29,424       26,182  
    Provision for credit losses   2,357       4,040       2,957       4,340  
      Net interest income after provision for credit losses   12,438       9,207       26,467       21,842  
                     
    Loan servicing and fee income   1,083       836       2,164       1,749  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   162       114       279       210  
    Gain on sale of loans held-for-sale   2,298       2,586       4,650       5,092  
    Gain on sale of investments   –       4       –       4  
    Other operating income   18       82       200       143  
      Non-interest income   3,561       3,622       7,293       7,198  
                     
    Compensation and benefits   7,003       6,499       14,235       12,061  
    Conversion expenses   –       –       3,180       –  
    Occupancy and equipment   1,910       1,843       3,746       3,613  
    Data processing   508       495       1,101       1,013  
    Professional fees   878       717       1,665       1,535  
    Federal deposit insurance premiums   365       365       702       683  
    Other operating expenses   1,952       1,751       3,983       3,569  
      Non-interest expense   12,616       11,670       28,612       22,474  
                     
      Income before income taxes   3,383       1,159       5,148       6,566  
    Income tax expense   940       315       1,184       1,661  
                     
      Net income $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 3,964     $ 4,905  
                     
    Earnings per share (“EPS”):(1)              
    Basic $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.53     $ 0.66  
    Diluted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.53     $ 0.66  
                     
    Average shares outstanding for basic EPS (1)(2)   7,500,871       7,399,816       7,482,307       7,388,021  
    Average shares outstanding for diluted EPS (1)(2)   7,506,584       7,449,110       7,488,226       7,438,234  
                     
    (1) Calculation includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Average shares outstanding before subtracting participating securities.
                     
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (unaudited)
    QUARTERLY TREND
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
     
        Three Months Ended
        6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024
                         
    Interest income $ 32,049     $ 32,837     $ 33,057     $ 34,113     $ 33,420  
    Interest expense   17,254       18,208       19,249       21,011       20,173  
      Net interest income   14,795       14,629       13,808       13,102       13,247  
    Provision for credit losses   2,357       600       400       200       4,040  
      Net interest income after provision for credit losses   12,438       14,029       13,408       12,902       9,207  
                         
    Loan servicing and fee income   1,083       1,081       981       960       836  
    Service charges on deposit accounts   162       117       136       123       114  
    Gain on sale of loans held-for-sale   2,298       2,352       3,014       2,834       2,586  
    Gain on sale of investments   –       –       27       –       4  
    Other operating income   18       182       29       37       82  
      Non-interest income   3,561       3,732       4,187       3,954       3,622  
                         
    Compensation and benefits   7,003       7,232       6,699       6,840       6,499  
    Conversion expenses   –       3,180       –       –       –  
    Occupancy and equipment   1,910       1,836       1,810       1,799       1,843  
    Data processing   508       593       536       547       495  
    Professional fees   878       787       782       762       717  
    Federal deposit insurance premiums   365       337       375       360       365  
    Other operating expenses   1,952       2,031       2,198       1,930       1,751  
      Non-interest expense   12,616       15,996       12,400       12,238       11,670  
                         
      Income before income taxes   3,383       1,765       5,195       4,618       1,159  
    Income tax expense   940       244       1,293       1,079       315  
                         
      Net income $ 2,443     $ 1,521     $ 3,902     $ 3,539     $ 844  
                         
    Earnings per share (“EPS”):(1)                  
    Basic $ 0.33     $ 0.20     $ 0.53     $ 0.48     $ 0.11  
    Diluted $ 0.33     $ 0.20     $ 0.52     $ 0.48     $ 0.11  
                         
    Average shares outstanding for basic EPS (1)(2)   7,500,871       7,463,537       7,427,583       7,411,064       7,399,816  
    Average shares outstanding for diluted EPS (1)(2)   7,506,584       7,469,489       7,456,471       7,436,068       7,449,110  
                         
    (1) Calculation includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Average shares outstanding before subtracting participating securities.
                         
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    CONSOLIDATED NON-GAAP FINANCIAL INFORMATION (1)(unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except per share data)
                   
      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
      6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
                   
    ADJUSTED NET INCOME:              
    Net income, as reported $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 3,964     $ 4,905  
    Adjustments:              
    Conversion expenses   –       –       3,180       –  
    Total adjustments, before income taxes   –       –       3,180       –  
    Adjustment for reported effective income tax rate   –       –       608       –  
    Total adjustments, after income taxes   –       –       2,572       –  
    Adjusted net income $ 2,443     $ 844     $ 6,536     $ 4,905  
    Basic earnings per share – adjusted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.87     $ 0.66  
    Diluted earnings per share – adjusted $ 0.33     $ 0.11     $ 0.87     $ 0.66  
                   
    ADJUSTED OPERATING EFFICIENCY RATIO:              
    Operating efficiency ratio, as reported   68.73 %     69.18 %     77.93 %     67.33 %
    Adjustments:              
    Conversion expenses   0.00 %     0.00 %     -8.66 %     0.00 %
    Adjusted operating efficiency ratio   68.73 %     69.18 %     69.27 %     67.33 %
                   
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE ASSETS   0.44 %     0.15 %     0.59 %     0.44 %
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE EQUITY   4.93 %     1.77 %     6.63 %     5.20 %
    ADJUSTED RETURN ON AVERAGE TANGIBLE EQUITY   5.46 %     1.97 %     7.35 %     5.80 %
                   
    (1)  A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provide investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results in addition to the results measured in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While management uses non-GAAP measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information should not be viewed as a substitute for financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP.
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.
             
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands)
                   
      Three Months Ended   Six Months Ended
      6/30/2025   6/30/2024   6/30/2025   6/30/2024
    Profitability:              
    Return on average assets   0.44 %     0.15 %     0.36 %     0.44 %
    Return on average equity (1)   4.93 %     1.77 %     4.02 %     5.20 %
    Return on average tangible equity (1)   5.46 %     1.97 %     4.46 %     5.80 %
    Pre-provision net revenue return on assets   1.04 %     0.94 %     0.73 %     0.99 %
    Yield on average interest-earning assets   5.98 %     6.22 %     5.99 %     6.12 %
    Cost of average interest-bearing liabilities   3.94 %     4.48 %     3.98 %     4.41 %
    Net interest rate spread (2)   2.04 %     1.74 %     2.01 %     1.71 %
    Net interest margin (3)   2.76 %     2.46 %     2.72 %     2.43 %
    Non-interest expense to average assets   2.29 %     2.11 %     2.57 %     2.03 %
    Operating efficiency ratio (4)   68.73 %     69.18 %     77.93 %     67.33 %
                   
    Average balances:              
    Interest-earning assets $ 2,148,782     $ 2,162,250     $ 2,182,757     $ 2,162,543  
    Interest-bearing liabilities   1,756,316       1,809,991       1,798,958       1,810,195  
    Loans   1,978,535       2,014,820       1,984,135       1,999,448  
    Deposits   1,838,947       1,773,205       1,878,969       1,807,924  
    Borrowings   142,733       231,473       138,224       196,950  
                   
    (1) Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
    (2) Represents the difference between the yield on average interest-earning assets and the cost of average interest-bearing liabilities.
    (3) Represents net interest income divided by average interest-earning assets.
    (4) Represents non-interest expense divided by the sum of net interest income and non-interest income.
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.
             
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA (unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except share and per share data)
                   
      At or For the Three Months Ended
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024
    Asset quality:              
    Provision for credit losses – loans (1) $ 2,170     $ 600     $ 400     $ 200  
    Net (charge-offs)/recoveries   (3,524 )     (454 )     (1,027 )     (438 )
    Allowance for credit losses   21,571       22,925       22,779       23,406  
    Allowance for credit losses to total loans (2)   1.10 %     1.17 %     1.15 %     1.17 %
    Non-performing loans $ 12,651     $ 11,697     $ 16,368     $ 15,365  
    Non-performing loans/total loans   0.64 %     0.60 %     0.82 %     0.77 %
    Non-performing loans/total assets   0.55 %     0.51 %     0.71 %     0.66 %
    Allowance for credit losses/non-performing loans   170.51 %     195.99 %     139.17 %     152.33 %
                                   
    Capital (Bank only):                              
    Tier 1 Capital $ 203,322     $ 201,925     $ 201,744     $ 198,196  
    Tier 1 leverage ratio   9.29 %     8.95 %     9.13 %     8.85 %
    Common equity tier 1 capital ratio   13.16 %     13.37 %     13.32 %     12.99 %
    Tier 1 risk based capital ratio   13.16 %     13.37 %     13.32 %     12.99 %
    Total risk based capital ratio   14.41 %     14.62 %     14.58 %     14.24 %
                                   
    Equity data:                              
    Shares outstanding (3)   7,499,243       7,503,731       7,427,127       7,428,366  
    Stockholders’ equity $ 198,885     $ 196,643     $ 196,638     $ 192,339  
    Book value per share (3)   26.52       26.21       26.48       25.89  
    Tangible common equity (3)   179,495       177,239       177,220       172,906  
    Tangible book value per share (3)   23.94       23.62       23.86       23.28  
    Tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio (3)   7.83 %     7.80 %     7.73 %     7.49 %
                   
    (1) Excludes $187 thousand, $0, $0 and $0 provision for credit losses on unfunded commitments for the quarters ended 6/30/25, 3/31/25, 12/31/24 and 9/30/24, respectively.
    (2) Calculation excludes loans held for sale.
    (3) Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    STATISTICAL SUMMARY
    QUARTERLY TREND
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands, except share data)
                   
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024
                   
    Loan distribution (1):              
    Residential mortgages $ 715,418     $ 708,649     $ 702,832     $ 719,037  
    Multifamily   539,573       535,429       550,570       557,634  
    Commercial real estate – OO   267,223       264,855       261,223       246,458  
    Commercial real estate – NOO   271,552       280,345       298,517       305,536  
    Commercial & industrial   148,907       146,050       145,457       149,853  
    Home equity   23,361       24,914       26,422       26,825  
    Consumer   418       432       503       470  
                   
    Total loans $ 1,966,452     $ 1,960,674     $ 1,985,524     $ 2,005,813  
                   
    Sequential quarter growth rate   0.29 %     -1.25 %     -1.01 %     -0.35 %
                   
    CRE concentration ratio   368 %     369 %     385 %     397 %
                   
    Loans sold during the quarter $ 46,045     $ 46,649     $ 53,499     $ 43,537  
                   
    Funding distribution:              
    Demand $ 243,664     $ 215,569     $ 211,656     $ 206,327  
    N.O.W.   655,333       698,297       692,890       621,880  
    Savings   42,860       46,275       48,885       53,024  
    Money market   497,799       458,068       503,082       572,213  
    Total core deposits   1,439,656       1,418,209       1,456,513       1,453,444  
    Time   511,625       518,229       497,770       504,100  
    Total deposits   1,951,281       1,936,438       1,954,283       1,957,544  
    Borrowings   107,805       107,805       107,805       125,805  
    Subordinated debentures   24,716       24,702       24,689       24,675  
                   
    Total funding sources $ 2,083,802     $ 2,068,945     $ 2,086,777     $ 2,108,024  
                   
    Sequential quarter growth rate – total deposits   0.77 %     -0.91 %     -0.17 %     0.80 %
                   
    Period-end core deposits/total deposits ratio   73.78 %     73.24 %     74.53 %     74.25 %
                   
    Period-end demand deposits/total deposits ratio   12.49 %     11.13 %     10.83 %     10.54 %
                   
    (1) Excluding loans held for sale
                   
    Note: Prior period information has been adjusted to conform to current period presentation.      
                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    RECONCILIATION OF NON-GAAP FINANCIAL MEASURES (1)(unaudited)
    (dollars in thousands, except share and per share amounts)
                       
      6/30/2025   3/31/2025   12/31/2024   9/30/2024   6/30/2024
    Tangible common equity                  
    Total equity (2) $ 198,885     $ 196,643     $ 196,638     $ 192,339     $ 190,072  
    Less: goodwill   (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )
    Less: core deposit intangible   (222 )     (236 )     (250 )     (265 )     (279 )
    Tangible common equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
                       
    Tangible common equity (“TCE”) ratio                
    Tangible common equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
    Total assets   2,311,976       2,291,527       2,312,110       2,327,814       2,331,098  
    Less: goodwill   (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )     (19,168 )
    Less: core deposit intangible   (222 )     (236 )     (250 )     (265 )     (279 )
    Tangible assets $ 2,292,586     $ 2,272,123     $ 2,292,692     $ 2,308,381     $ 2,311,651  
    TCE ratio (2)   7.83 %     7.80 %     7.73 %     7.49 %     7.38 %
                       
    Tangible book value per share                  
    Tangible equity (2) $ 179,495     $ 177,239     $ 177,220     $ 172,906     $ 170,625  
    Shares outstanding (2)   7,499,243       7,503,731       7,427,127       7,428,366       7,402,163  
    Tangible book value per share (2) $ 23.94     $ 23.62     $ 23.86     $ 23.28     $ 23.05  
                       
    (1)  A non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are required to be disclosed in the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“U.S. GAAP”). The Company’s management believes the presentation of non-GAAP financial measures provide investors with a greater understanding of the Company’s operating results in addition to the results measured in accordance with U.S. GAAP. While management uses non-GAAP measures in its analysis of the Company’s performance, this information should not be viewed as a substitute for financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP or considered to be more important than financial results determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP.
                       
    (2)  Includes common stock and Series A preferred stock.
     
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    NET INTEREST INCOME ANALYSIS
    For the Three Months Ended June 30, 2025 and 2024
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands)
                                                   
      2025
      2024
      Average       Average   Average       Average
      Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost   Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost
                                                   
    Assets:                                              
    Interest-earning assets:                                              
    Loans $ 1,978,535     $ 29,785       6.04 %   $ 2,014,820     $ 31,124       6.21 %
    Investment securities   99,448       1,433       5.78 %     99,324       1,534       6.21 %
    Interest-earning cash   62,760       695       4.44 %     36,633       497       5.46 %
    FHLB stock and other investments   8,039       136       6.79 %     11,473       265       9.29 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,148,782       32,049       5.98 %     2,162,250       33,420       6.22 %
    Non interest-earning assets:                                              
    Cash and due from banks   9,218                       7,979                  
    Other assets   50,164                       51,106                  
    Total assets $ 2,208,164                     $ 2,221,335                  
                                                   
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:                                              
    Interest-bearing liabilities:                                              
    Savings, N.O.W. and money market deposits $ 1,126,495     $ 10,649       3.79 %   $ 1,117,029     $ 12,667       4.56 %
    Time deposits   487,088       5,058       4.17 %     461,489       4,910       4.28 %
    Total savings and time deposits   1,613,583       15,707       3.90 %     1,578,518       17,577       4.48 %
    Borrowings   118,026       1,221       4.15 %     206,820       2,270       4.41 %
    Subordinated debentures   24,707       326       5.29 %     24,653       326       5.32 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   1,756,316       17,254       3.94 %     1,809,991       20,173       4.48 %
    Demand deposits   225,364                       194,687                  
    Other liabilities   27,615                       25,039                  
    Total liabilities   2,009,295                       2,029,717                  
    Stockholders’ equity   198,869                       191,618                  
    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $ 2,208,164                     $ 2,221,335                  
    Net interest rate spread                   2.04 %                     1.74 %
    Net interest income/margin         $ 14,795       2.76 %           $ 13,247       2.46 %
                                                   
    HANOVER BANCORP, INC.
    NET INTEREST INCOME ANALYSIS
    For the Six Months Ended June 30, 2025 and 2024
    (unaudited, dollars in thousands)
                                                   
      2025
      2024
      Average       Average   Average       Average
      Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost   Balance   Interest   Yield/Cost
                                                   
    Assets:                                              
    Interest-earning assets:                                              
    Loans $ 1,984,135     $ 59,769       6.07 %   $ 1,999,448     $ 60,861       6.12 %
    Investment securities   92,681       2,619       5.70 %     97,085       2,991       6.20 %
    Interest-earning cash   97,914       2,177       4.48 %     55,652       1,511       5.46 %
    FHLB stock and other investments   8,027       321       8.06 %     10,358       489       9.49 %
    Total interest-earning assets   2,182,757       64,886       5.99 %     2,162,543       65,852       6.12 %
    Non interest-earning assets:                                              
    Cash and due from banks   9,360                       7,962                  
    Other assets   49,930                       50,523                  
    Total assets $ 2,242,047                     $ 2,221,028                  
                                                   
    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:                                              
    Interest-bearing liabilities:                                              
    Savings, N.O.W. and money market deposits $ 1,171,711     $ 22,104       3.80 %   $ 1,139,111     $ 25,600       4.52 %
    Time deposits   489,023       10,378       4.28 %     474,134       9,872       4.19 %
    Total savings and time deposits   1,660,734       32,482       3.94 %     1,613,245       35,472       4.42 %
    Borrowings   113,524       2,328       4.14 %     172,304       3,546       4.14 %
    Subordinated debentures   24,700       652       5.32 %     24,646       652       5.32 %
    Total interest-bearing liabilities   1,798,958       35,462       3.98 %     1,810,195       39,670       4.41 %
    Demand deposits   218,235                       194,679                  
    Other liabilities   26,179                       26,499                  
    Total liabilities   2,043,372                       2,031,373                  
    Stockholders’ equity   198,675                       189,655                  
    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $ 2,242,047                     $ 2,221,028                  
    Net interest rate spread                   2.01 %                     1.71 %
    Net interest income/margin         $ 29,424       2.72 %           $ 26,182       2.43 %
                                                   

    The MIL Network –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-Evening Report: Almost a third of NZ households face energy hardship – reform has to go beyond cheaper off-peak power

    Source: The Conversation (Au and NZ) – By Kimberley O’Sullivan, Senior Research Fellow, He Kainga Oranga – Housing and Health Research Programme, University of Otago

    Igor Suka/Getty Images

    The spotlight is again on New Zealand’s energy sector, with a group of industry bodies and independent retailers pushing for a market overhaul, saying the sector was “broken” and “driving up the cost of living”.

    The Commerce Commission and the Electricity Authority has already established a joint task force, after prices peaked in 2024, to investigate ways to improve the performance of the electricity market.

    The Authority recently announced new rules requiring larger electricity retailers to offer lower off-peak power prices from next year. The government is also expected to make further announcements on the sector.

    But the question is whether these changes will do enough to help New Zealanders live affordably in dry and warm homes.

    Some 30% of households face energy hardship. This means they struggle to afford or access sufficient energy to meet their daily needs.

    Caused by a combination of poor housing quality, high energy costs and the specific needs of vulnerable residents, energy hardship can lead to serious health issues and high hospital admission costs.

    We know from our own research over the past 18 years that having power disconnected can negatively affect health and wellbeing.

    People have told us that not being able to afford enough power to keep warm made them more likely to get sick and exacerbated existing health conditions. They described mental distress from unaffordable electricity and the threat of disconnection.

    Research participants used words such as “stressed”, “anxious” or “depressed”. They also spoke about having to choose between food and power bills.

    If power is disconnected, there can be additional costs from losing food in the fridge and freezer, as well as the problem of paying disconnection and reconnection fees when people already can’t afford the bill.

    What’s driving up power bills?

    In 2024, a “dry year” that increased the value of hydro generation, combined with lower-than-usual wind and declining supply of gas, resulted in wholesale electricity price spikes. But these winter shortages aren’t the only factor pushing up power bills.

    Electricity bills reflect several costs along the supply chain from generation to getting the electricity to the sockets in our homes. A new regulatory period for lines charges from April 2025 increased bills by $10 to $25 per month, depending on where you live.

    At the same time, low fixed daily charges are being phased out. This means the cost of being connected to the grid is the same no matter how much power is used.

    It is the poorest New Zealanders who are being hardest hit. The lowest income households spend a bigger proportion of their income on power compared to higher income households. Having electricity prices increase faster than inflation will put even more families at risk.

    The average household electricity bill was up 8.7% in May 2025 compared to June 2024. According to a recent Consumer NZ survey, 20% of respondents said they struggled to pay their power bill in the past year.

    Tackling hardship

    The new Consumer Care Obligations might help reduce some of the risks. Power companies must now comply with these obligations when working with households struggling to pay their bills, are facing disconnection or have someone in the home who is medically dependent on electricity.

    If households feel their power company is not meeting these obligations, they can contact Utilities Disputes, a free independent electricity and gas complaint resolution service, or the Electricity Authority.

    But multiple changes are needed to address the different parts of the energy hardship problem. Improving home energy efficiency through schemes like Warmer Kiwi Homes is crucial.

    Introducing an Energy Performance Rating for houses would make it easier for home buyers and renters to know how much it will cost to power a home before they move in. This would also help target energy hardship support.

    The government can also make electricity more affordable by supporting not-for-profit power companies. Another good move would be to help more households to install rooftop solar by providing access to long-term low-interest finance.

    Lower prices during off-peak hours are a good start. But it is clear the sheer size and complexity of the problems mean government action, with community and industry collaboration, needs to go beyond slightly cheaper electricity when there is less demand.

    Kimberley O’Sullivan receives funding from a Rutherford Discovery Fellowship administered by the Royal Society Te Apārangi, the Health Research Council, the Ministry of Business, Employment, and Innovation, and Lotteries Health Research.

    – ref. Almost a third of NZ households face energy hardship – reform has to go beyond cheaper off-peak power – https://theconversation.com/almost-a-third-of-nz-households-face-energy-hardship-reform-has-to-go-beyond-cheaper-off-peak-power-259140

    MIL OSI Analysis – EveningReport.nz –

    July 24, 2025
  • MIL-OSI New Zealand: Take that! Tourism campaign a hit with Aussies

    Source: New Zealand Government

    The ‘Everyone Must Go’ campaign encouraging Australians to pick New Zealand for their next holiday has hit its results out of the park, bringing in thousands of visitors in a boost for regional economies and tourism operators. 

    Tourism and Hospitality Minister Louise Upston says ‘Everyone Must Go’ was initially targeted at 6,750 additional arrivals over the autumn but ended up significantly exceeding expectations. 

    “‘Everyone Must Go’ has been a winner,’” Louise Upston says.

    “Tourism NZ stats released to me show it delivering an additional 7,981 visitors to smash its initial forecasts. It also attracted significant attention on both sides of the Tasman, and got Kiwis and Aussies talking about New Zealand as a destination.

    “Tourism is a key part of our plan to grow the economy, create jobs, lift wages and help Kiwis get ahead.  ‘Everyone Must Go’ is a great example of the sector and Government working together to achieve these goals. 

    “We knew Aussies would recognise it as a great opportunity. Just like they grabbed Phar Lap and pavlova, it’s proved the same story with ‘Everyone Must Go.’

    “A key part of this campaign’s success were the deals the tourism industry came to the party with.  This team approach showed we can deliver great results for the sector when Government and industry are joined up and working towards the same goals.”

    More than 800 deals from 450 operators across accommodation, transport and experiences were available during the campaign. 

    The initial $500,000 campaign spend delivered a solid return on investment, leading to an additional $300,000 to give the campaign a further boost. 

    “This campaign was the first Tourism Boost initiative, and these positive results show that with the right investment in the right markets we will drive economic growth.

    “Every one of those Australian visitors who ate at cafes and restaurants, visited tourist attractions and shopped in our towns and cities has helped the New Zealand tourism sector grow, and boosted the Kiwi economy in the process,” Louise Upston says. 

    MIL OSI New Zealand News –

    July 24, 2025
←Previous Page
1 2 3 4 5 6 … 149
Next Page→
NewzIntel.com

NewzIntel.com

MIL Open Source Intelligence

  • Blog
  • About
  • FAQs
  • Authors
  • Events
  • Shop
  • Patterns
  • Themes

Twenty Twenty-Five

Designed with WordPress